PWC 600

Relion® 650 series
Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0

Technical Manual
Document ID: 1MRK 511 275-UEN
Issued: March 2019
Revision: C
Product version: 1.0
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor
used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may
be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/).
This product includes cryptographic software written/developed by: Eric Young

(eay@cryptsoft.com) and Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
This product includes software provided by the jQuery Foundation (http://jquery.org/) and by
the Flot project (http://www.flotcharts.org/).
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. Switchsync is a trademark of the
ABB Group. All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks
or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås
Sweden
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18
http://www.abb.com/substationautomation
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or product
description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All persons
responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves that
each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety or
other operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where
a system failure and/or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons
(including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the
person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to
ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely ruled
out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer.
Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible or
liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of the
equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified
voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests
conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive,
and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The
product is designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.
Safety information
Dangerous voltages can occur on the connectors, even though the auxiliary
voltage has been disconnected.
Non-observance can result in death, personal injury or substantial property

damage.
Only a competent electrician is allowed to carry out the electrical installation.
National and local electrical safety regulations must always be followed.
The frame of the IED has to be carefully earthed.
Always keep the factory supplied caps on unused optical communication

ports, to prevent exposure to laser radiation.
Whenever changes are made in the IED, measures should be taken to avoid
inadvertent closing or opening of circuit breaker.
The IED contains components which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge.

ESD precautions shall always be observed prior to touching components.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.......................................................................................................17
1.1 This manual........................................................................................................................................17
1.2 Intended audience............................................................................................................................17
1.3 Product documentation.................................................................................................................. 17
1.3.1 Product documentation set.......................................................................................................17
1.3.1.1 Related documents.................................................................................................................. 17
1.3.2 Document revision history.........................................................................................................18
1.4 Symbols and conventions...............................................................................................................18
1.4.1 Symbols......................................................................................................................................... 18
1.4.2 Document conventions...............................................................................................................18
Section 2 Available functions........................................................................................... 19

2.1 Control and monitoring functions................................................................................................19
2.2 Station communication..................................................................................................................20
2.3 Basic IED functions.......................................................................................................................... 21
Section 3 Analog inputs.................................................................................................... 23

3.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................... 23
3.2 Operation principle..........................................................................................................................23
3.3 Settings .............................................................................................................................................25
Section 4 Binary inputs and outputs............................................................................... 29

4.1 Binary inputs..................................................................................................................................... 29
4.1.1 Debounce filter.............................................................................................................................29
4.1.2 Oscillation filter........................................................................................................................... 29
4.1.3 Settings......................................................................................................................................... 30
4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary inputs.................................................................................. 30
4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for precision binary inputs.................................................................31
4.2 Binary outputs.................................................................................................................................. 34
4.2.1 Binary outputs..............................................................................................................................34
Section 5 Local HMI............................................................................................................35

5.1 Local HMI elements......................................................................................................................... 35
5.1.1 Display........................................................................................................................................... 35
5.1.2 LEDs................................................................................................................................................37
5.1.3 Keypad........................................................................................................................................... 38
5.2 Local HMI screen.............................................................................................................................. 39
5.2.1 Identification................................................................................................................................ 39
5.2.2 Settings......................................................................................................................................... 39
5.3 Local HMI signals............................................................................................................................. 39
5.3.1 Identification................................................................................................................................ 39
5.3.2 Function block..............................................................................................................................39
Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0 1

Technical Manual
Table of contents
5.3.3 Signals........................................................................................................................................... 40
5.4 Status LEDs.......................................................................................................................................40
5.5 Indication LEDs................................................................................................................................ 40
5.5.1 Identification................................................................................................................................40
5.5.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................................ 41
5.5.3 Function block.............................................................................................................................. 41
5.5.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................41
5.5.5 Settings......................................................................................................................................... 42
5.5.6 Operation principle..................................................................................................................... 42
5.5.6.1 Operating modes..................................................................................................................... 42
5.5.6.2 Acknowledgment/reset..........................................................................................................43
5.5.6.3 Operating sequence................................................................................................................ 43
5.6 Function keys....................................................................................................................................49
5.6.1 Identification................................................................................................................................49
5.6.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................................49
5.6.3 Function block..............................................................................................................................49
5.6.4 Signals........................................................................................................................................... 50
5.6.5 Settings......................................................................................................................................... 50
5.6.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................... 50
5.6.6.1 Operating sequence in Control mode.................................................................................. 51
5.6.6.2 Input function............................................................................................................................51
Section 6 Web HMI (WHMI)............................................................................................... 53
Section 7 Controlled Switching and Monitoring............................................................55

7.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................... 55
7.2 Operation principle..........................................................................................................................55
7.2.1 List of functionalities................................................................................................................. 59
7.2.2 Control...........................................................................................................................................60
7.2.2.1 Normal switching mode......................................................................................................... 60
7.2.2.2 CB timing test (learning) mode.............................................................................................82
7.2.3 Monitoring.................................................................................................................................... 83
7.2.3.1 Electrical monitoring............................................................................................................... 83
7.2.3.2 Mechanical monitoring........................................................................................................... 93
7.2.3.3 Combined monitoring...........................................................................................................100
7.2.3.4 Resetting the calculated and acquired values..................................................................103
7.2.4 Data Acquisition........................................................................................................................ 103
Section 8 Control.............................................................................................................. 111

8.1 Selector mini switch VSGGIO........................................................................................................111
8.1.1 Identification............................................................................................................................... 111
8.1.2 Functionality................................................................................................................................111
8.1.3 Function block.............................................................................................................................111
8.1.4 Signals...........................................................................................................................................111
8.1.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................ 112
8.1.6 Operation principle ................................................................................................................... 112
8.2 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO.................................................... 113
2 Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0

Technical Manual
Table of contents
8.2.1 Identification...............................................................................................................................113
8.2.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 113
8.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 113
8.2.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 113
8.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................114
8.2.6 Operation principle ...................................................................................................................114
8.3 Strategy switching SSCPOW........................................................................................................114
8.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 114
8.3.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 114
8.3.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 115
8.3.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 116
8.3.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 120
8.3.6 Operation principle....................................................................................................................123
8.3.6.1 System application and switching pattern detection (Static application
switching strategy)................................................................................................................124
8.3.6.2 Source selection and zero-crossing detection.................................................................124
8.3.6.3 Case Control Strategy........................................................................................................... 129
Section 9 General calculation......................................................................................... 133

9.1 Analog scaling ANSCAL................................................................................................................. 133
9.1.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 133
9.1.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 133
9.1.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 133
9.1.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................134
9.1.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 134
9.1.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 135
9.1.6.1 Limit module........................................................................................................................... 136
9.1.6.2 Chart function......................................................................................................................... 136
9.1.6.3 Equation function................................................................................................................... 137
9.2 Double point input status time monitoring DPISTTIM...........................................................138
9.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 138
9.2.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 138
9.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 138
9.2.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................138
9.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 139
9.3 Binary status to analog conversion BINSTSAN........................................................................ 141
9.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 141
9.3.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 141
9.3.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 142
9.3.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................142
9.3.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 143
9.3.6.1 Calculating output values using 1 of n mode................................................................... 144
9.3.6.2 Calculating output values using incremental mode........................................................145
9.3.6.3 Calculating output values using summation mode........................................................ 145

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Section 10 Logic................................................................................................................. 147

10.1 Configurable logic blocks............................................................................................................. 147
10.1.1 Standard configurable logic blocks....................................................................................... 147
10.1.1.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................147
10.1.1.2 OR function block................................................................................................................... 147
10.1.1.3 Inverter function block INVERTER.......................................................................................148
10.1.1.4 PULSETIMER function block ................................................................................................149
10.1.1.5 Controllable gate function block GATE..............................................................................150
10.1.1.6 Exclusive OR function block XOR......................................................................................... 151
10.1.1.7 Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY............................................................................. 151
10.1.1.8 Timer function block TIMERSET.......................................................................................... 152
10.1.1.9 AND function block ............................................................................................................... 153
10.1.1.10 Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY.................................................................154
10.1.1.11 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY....................................................... 155
10.2 Fixed signals FXDSIGN.................................................................................................................. 157
10.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 157
10.2.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 157
10.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 157
10.2.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................158
10.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 158
10.2.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 158
10.3 Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I.......................................................................................158
10.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 158
10.3.2 FunctionalityBoolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I ......................................................... 158
10.3.3 Function block............................................................................................................................159
10.3.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................159
10.3.5 Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 160
10.3.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 160
10.4 Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation B16IFCVI.................... 160
10.4.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................160
10.4.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................160
10.4.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 161
10.4.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 161
10.4.5 Settings .......................................................................................................................................162
10.4.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 162
10.5 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A.................................................................................... 162
10.5.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 162
10.5.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 162
10.5.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 162
10.5.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................163
10.5.5 Settings .......................................................................................................................................163
10.6 Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation IB16FCVB................... 164

Technical Manual
Table of contents
10.6.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 164

10.6.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................164
10.6.3 Function block............................................................................................................................164
10.6.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................164
10.6.5 Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 165
Section 11 Monitoring....................................................................................................... 167

11.1 Measurements................................................................................................................................ 167
11.1.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 167
11.1.2 Measurements CVMMXN......................................................................................................... 168
11.1.2.1 Identification ..........................................................................................................................168
11.1.2.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 168
11.1.2.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 169
11.1.2.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 170
11.1.2.5 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 173
11.1.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU.................................................................................... 173
11.1.3.1 Identification .......................................................................................................................... 173
11.1.3.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 173
11.1.3.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 174
11.1.3.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 174
11.1.3.5 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 175
11.1.4 Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU....................................................................... 175
11.1.4.1 Identification .......................................................................................................................... 175
11.1.4.2 Function block.........................................................................................................................175
11.1.4.3 Signals.......................................................................................................................................176
11.1.4.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 176
11.1.4.5 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 177
11.1.5 Current sequence component measurement CMSQI......................................................... 177
11.1.5.1 Identification .......................................................................................................................... 177
11.1.5.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 177
11.1.5.3 Signals.......................................................................................................................................178
11.1.5.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 178
11.1.5.5 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................180
11.1.6 Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI.............................................................................. 180
11.1.6.1 Identification ..........................................................................................................................180
11.1.6.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 180
11.1.6.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 180
11.1.6.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 181
11.1.6.5 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 182
11.1.7 Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU.................................................................. 183
11.1.7.1 Identification .......................................................................................................................... 183
11.1.7.2 Function block.........................................................................................................................183
11.1.7.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 183
11.1.7.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 184
11.1.7.5 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................184

Technical Manual
Table of contents

11.1.8.1 Measurement supervision.................................................................................................... 185
11.1.8.2 Measurements CVMMXN...................................................................................................... 189
11.1.8.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU................................................................................ 193
11.1.8.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXU............ 194
11.1.8.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI.....................................194
11.1.9 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 194
11.2 Event Counter CNTGGIO...............................................................................................................194
11.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 194
11.2.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................195
11.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................195
11.2.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................195
11.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 195
11.2.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 196
11.2.7.1 Reporting................................................................................................................................. 196
11.2.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 196
11.3 Disturbance report.........................................................................................................................197
11.3.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................................. 197
11.3.2 Disturbance report DRPRDRE..................................................................................................197
11.3.2.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 197
11.3.2.2 Function block.........................................................................................................................197
11.3.2.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 198
11.3.2.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 198
11.3.2.5 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................198
11.3.3 Analog input signals AxRADR .................................................................................................202
11.3.3.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 202
11.3.3.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 202
11.3.3.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 202
11.3.3.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................203
11.3.4 Analog input signals A4RADR ................................................................................................ 206
11.3.4.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 206
11.3.4.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 206
11.3.4.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 207
11.3.4.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................207
11.3.5 Binary input signals BxRBDR................................................................................................... 210
11.3.5.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................210
11.3.5.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 211
11.3.5.3 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 211
11.3.5.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 212
11.3.6.1 Disturbance information...................................................................................................... 218
11.3.6.2 Indications .............................................................................................................................. 218
11.3.6.3 Event recorder ........................................................................................................................218
11.3.6.4 Event list ..................................................................................................................................218
11.3.6.5 Trip value recorder ................................................................................................................ 218

Technical Manual
Table of contents
11.3.6.6 Disturbance recorder ............................................................................................................218

11.3.6.7 Time tagging........................................................................................................................... 218
11.3.6.8 Recording times......................................................................................................................218
11.3.6.9 Analog signals......................................................................................................................... 219
11.3.6.10 Binary signals...........................................................................................................................221
11.3.6.11 Trigger signals.........................................................................................................................221
11.3.6.12 Post Retrigger......................................................................................................................... 222
11.3.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 222
11.4 Indications.......................................................................................................................................223
11.4.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................................. 223
11.4.2 Function block............................................................................................................................223
11.4.3 Signals..........................................................................................................................................223
11.4.3.1 Input signals............................................................................................................................ 223
11.4.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 224
11.5 Event recorder ............................................................................................................................... 224
11.5.1 Functionality ..............................................................................................................................224
11.5.2 Function block............................................................................................................................224
11.5.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 224
11.5.3.1 Input signals............................................................................................................................224
11.5.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 225
11.6 Event list.......................................................................................................................................... 225
11.6.1 Functionality ..............................................................................................................................225
11.6.2 Function block............................................................................................................................225
11.6.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 226
11.6.3.1 Input signals............................................................................................................................226
11.6.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 226
11.7 Trip value recorder.........................................................................................................................226
11.7.1 Functionality ..............................................................................................................................226
11.7.2 Function block............................................................................................................................ 227
11.7.3 Signals..........................................................................................................................................227
11.7.3.1 Input signals............................................................................................................................ 227
11.7.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 227
11.8 Disturbance recorder.................................................................................................................... 227
11.8.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 227
11.8.2 Function block............................................................................................................................228
11.8.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 228
11.8.4 Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 228
11.8.5.1 Memory and storage............................................................................................................. 229
11.8.6 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 230
11.9 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO....................................................230
11.9.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................230

Technical Manual
Table of contents
11.9.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 231

11.9.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 231
11.9.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 231
11.9.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................231
11.9.6 Operation principle....................................................................................................................231
11.10 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs SP16GGIO...............................231
11.10.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 231
11.10.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 232
11.10.3 Function block............................................................................................................................232
11.10.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................232
11.10.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 233
11.10.6 MonitoredData...........................................................................................................................233
11.11 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions MVGGIO...................................................234
11.11.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................234
11.11.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................234
11.11.3 Function block............................................................................................................................234
11.11.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 234
11.11.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 235
11.11.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 235
11.12 Measured value expander block MVEXP....................................................................................236
11.12.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................236
11.12.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................236
11.12.3 Function block............................................................................................................................236
11.12.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 236
11.12.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 237
11.13 Operation log.................................................................................................................................. 237
11.13.1 Operation log function OPERLOG..........................................................................................238
11.13.1.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................238
11.13.1.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 238
11.13.1.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 238
11.13.1.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 238
11.13.1.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................239
11.13.1.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................ 241
11.14 Clear operation log data CLROPLOG ........................................................................................244
11.14.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................244
11.14.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 244
11.14.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 244
11.14.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 244
11.14.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 245
11.15 Compensation of circuit breaker switching times CBCOMP................................................245
11.15.1 Identification .............................................................................................................................245
11.15.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................245
11.15.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 246

Technical Manual
Table of contents
11.15.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 246

11.15.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 249
11.15.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 251
11.15.7.1 Compensation mode............................................................................................................. 253
11.15.7.2 Sensor status.......................................................................................................................... 254
11.16 Monitoring and compensation CB parameters MONCOMP................................................. 254
11.16.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................254
11.16.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................255
11.16.3 Function block............................................................................................................................256
11.16.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................257
11.16.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................260
11.16.6 Monitored data..........................................................................................................................260
11.16.7.1 Coordination logic................................................................................................................. 264
11.16.7.2 Fingerprint average logic..................................................................................................... 265
11.16.7.3 Deviation from average logic.............................................................................................. 266
11.16.7.4 Drift average logic..................................................................................................................267
11.16.7.5 Error evaluation logic............................................................................................................ 268
11.17 Multilevel threshold alarm generation MONALM.................................................................... 268
11.17.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................268
11.17.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 268
11.17.3 Function block............................................................................................................................270
11.17.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 271
11.17.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 274
11.17.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 278
11.17.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................280
11.17.7.1 Alarm status logic...................................................................................................................281
11.17.7.2 Hysteresis................................................................................................................................ 283
11.17.7.3 Circuit breaker operation capability.................................................................................. 284
11.18 ACBMSCBR...................................................................................................................................... 286
11.18.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................286
11.18.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................287
11.18.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 288
11.18.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 289
11.18.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 292
11.19 CBLEARN..........................................................................................................................................294
11.19.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................294
11.19.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 294
11.19.3 Function block............................................................................................................................295
11.19.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 296
11.19.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 299
11.19.6.1 Command handling logic..................................................................................................... 303
11.19.6.2 Data acquisition logic........................................................................................................... 307

Technical Manual
Table of contents
11.19.6.3 Core logic.................................................................................................................................307
Section 12 Station communication..................................................................................311

12.1 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol ....................................................................................311
12.1.1 Identification...............................................................................................................................311
12.1.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 311
12.1.3 Communication interfaces and protocols............................................................................312
12.1.4 Settings........................................................................................................................................312
12.1.5 Technical data.............................................................................................................................312
12.2 GOOSE binary receive GOOSEBINRCV....................................................................................... 312
12.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 312
12.2.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 312
12.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 313
12.2.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 313
12.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 314
12.3 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value GOOSEDPRCV...............................315
12.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 315
12.3.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 315
12.3.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 315
12.3.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................315
12.3.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................315
12.4 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV......................................316
12.4.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 316
12.4.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 316
12.4.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 317
12.4.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 317
12.4.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................317
12.4.6 Operation principle ...................................................................................................................317
12.5 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value GOOSEMVRCV................................. 318
12.5.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 318
12.5.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 318
12.5.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 318
12.5.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................318
12.5.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 319
12.6 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value GOOSESPRCV................................. 319
12.6.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 319
12.6.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 319
12.6.3 Function block............................................................................................................................320
12.6.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 320
12.6.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 320
12.7 IEC 61850-9-2(LE) merging unit.................................................................................................. 321
12.7.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................ 321

Technical Manual
Table of contents
12.7.2 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 321

12.7.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 321
12.7.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................322
12.7.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 322
12.7.6.1 Signal identification ............................................................................................................. 324
12.7.6.2 Time synchronization............................................................................................................ 325
12.7.6.3 Alarm signals...........................................................................................................................325
12.7.6.4 Accuracy of power measurement functions.....................................................................326
12.7.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 326
12.8 Redundant station bus communication................................................................................... 326
12.8.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................326
12.8.2 Functionality ..............................................................................................................................326
12.8.3 Function block............................................................................................................................326
12.8.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................327
12.8.5 Setting parameters................................................................................................................... 327
12.9 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG.................................................................................... 328
12.9.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG...................................................................................................... 328
12.9.2 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 329
12.10 Generic security application component AGSAL.....................................................................330
12.10.1 Generic security application AGSAL...................................................................................... 330
Section 13 Basic IED functions......................................................................................... 331

13.1 Self supervision with internal event list ....................................................................................331
13.1.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 331
13.1.2 Internal error signals INTERRSIG............................................................................................ 331
13.1.2.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 331
13.1.2.2 Function block.........................................................................................................................331
13.1.2.3 Signals.......................................................................................................................................331
13.1.2.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 332
13.1.3 Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST.......................................................................................... 332
13.1.3.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................332
13.1.3.2 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 332
13.1.4.1 Internal signals....................................................................................................................... 334
13.1.4.2 Run-time model...................................................................................................................... 335
13.1.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 336
13.2 Time system....................................................................................................................................336
13.2.1 Functionality...............................................................................................................................336
13.2.2 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN................................................................................ 336
13.2.2.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................336
13.2.2.2 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 337
13.2.3 Time synchronization via SNTP...............................................................................................337
13.2.3.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................337
13.2.3.2 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 337

Technical Manual
Table of contents
13.2.4 SYNCHPPS:1................................................................................................................................ 337

13.2.4.1 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 337
13.2.5 Time system, summer time begin DSTBEGIN..................................................................... 338
13.2.5.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................338
13.2.5.2 Settings....................................................................................................................................338
13.2.6 Time system, summer time ends DSTEND...........................................................................338
13.2.6.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................338
13.2.6.2 Settings....................................................................................................................................339
13.2.7 Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE............................................................................................ 339
13.2.7.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................339
13.2.7.2 Settings....................................................................................................................................339
13.2.8 Time synchronization via IRIG-B.............................................................................................340
13.2.8.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 340
13.2.8.2 Settings................................................................................................................................... 340
13.2.9.1 General concepts................................................................................................................... 340
13.2.9.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation......................................................................................... 342
13.2.9.3 Synchronization options.......................................................................................................342
13.2.10 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 343
13.3 Test mode functionality TESTMODE......................................................................................... 344
13.3.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................344
13.3.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 344
13.3.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 344
13.3.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 344
13.3.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 345
13.4 Change lock function CHNGLCK ................................................................................................346
13.4.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................346
13.4.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 346
13.4.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 346
13.4.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 346
13.4.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 347
13.5 IED identifiers TERMINALID......................................................................................................... 347
13.5.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................347
13.5.2 Functionality ............................................................................................................................. 348
13.5.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 348
13.6 Product information .................................................................................................................... 348
13.6.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................348
13.6.2 Functionality ............................................................................................................................. 348
13.6.3 Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 349
13.7 Primary system values PRIMVAL.................................................................................................349
13.7.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................349
13.7.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 349
13.7.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 349
13.8 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI........................................................................................ 349

Technical Manual
Table of contents
13.8.1 Functionality ............................................................................................................................. 349

13.8.2 Identification..............................................................................................................................350
13.8.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 350
13.8.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 350
13.8.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 352
13.9 Global base values GBASVAL....................................................................................................... 355
13.9.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................355
13.9.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................355
13.9.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 355
13.10 Authority check ATHCHCK........................................................................................................... 356
13.10.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................356
13.10.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................356
13.10.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 356
13.10.4.1 Authorization handling in the IED....................................................................................... 357
13.11 Authority management AUTHMAN............................................................................................ 358
13.11.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................358
13.11.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................358
13.11.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 358
13.12 FTP access with password FTPACCS.........................................................................................358
13.12.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................358
13.12.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................358
13.12.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 359
13.13 Authority status ATHSTAT........................................................................................................... 359
13.13.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................359
13.13.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................359
13.13.3 Function block............................................................................................................................359
13.13.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 360
13.13.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................360
13.13.6 Operation principle ..................................................................................................................360
13.14 Denial of service.............................................................................................................................360
13.14.1 Functionality ............................................................................................................................. 360
13.14.2 Denial of service, frame rate control for front port DOSFRNT........................................ 360
13.14.2.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 360
13.14.2.2 Function block.........................................................................................................................361
13.14.2.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 361
13.14.2.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 361
13.14.2.5 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 361
13.14.3 Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1......................................... 362
13.14.3.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................362
13.14.3.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 362
13.14.3.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 362
13.14.3.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................362
13.14.3.5 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................362

Technical Manual
Table of contents
13.15 Source selection SRCSELECT...................................................................................................... 363

13.15.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................363
13.15.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................363
13.15.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 364
13.15.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 365
13.15.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 367
13.16 Web server.......................................................................................................................................368
13.16.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................368
13.16.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 368
Section 14 IED physical connections............................................................................... 371

14.1 Protective earth connections.......................................................................................................371
14.2 Inputs................................................................................................................................................ 371
14.2.1 Measuring inputs....................................................................................................................... 371
14.2.2 Auxiliary supply voltage input................................................................................................. 372
14.2.3 Binary inputs...............................................................................................................................373
14.3 Outputs............................................................................................................................................374
14.3.1 Outputs for signalling...............................................................................................................375
14.3.2 IRF................................................................................................................................................. 375
14.4 Communication interfaces.......................................................................................................... 376
14.4.1 Ethernet RJ-45 front connection............................................................................................ 376
14.4.2 Station communication rear connection .............................................................................376
14.4.3 Optical serial rear connection................................................................................................. 377
14.4.4 EIA-485 serial rear connection................................................................................................ 377
14.4.5 Process bus rear connection .................................................................................................. 377
14.4.6 Communication interfaces and protocols........................................................................... 378
14.4.7 Recommended industrial Ethernet switches ......................................................................378
14.5 Connection diagrams....................................................................................................................378
Section 15 Technical data................................................................................................. 379

15.1 Dimensions .....................................................................................................................................379
15.2 Power supply...................................................................................................................................379
15.3 Measuring inputs .......................................................................................................................... 379
15.4 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................................380
15.5 Signal outputs ................................................................................................................................381
15.6 Power outputs ............................................................................................................................... 381
15.7 Data communication interfaces ................................................................................................ 382
15.8 Enclosure class .............................................................................................................................. 383
15.9 Ingress protection.........................................................................................................................384
15.10 Environmental conditions and tests......................................................................................... 384
15.11 Electromagnetic compatibility tests......................................................................................... 385
15.12 Insulation tests.............................................................................................................................. 386
15.13 Mechanical tests............................................................................................................................ 387
15.14 Product safety ............................................................................................................................... 387
15.15 EMC compliance ............................................................................................................................ 387

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Section 16 Glossary........................................................................................................... 389

Technical Manual
16
1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 1
Introduction
Section 1 Introduction
1.1 This manual GUID-44873E8A-0624-49D3-AA84-4DA61C513D66 v3
The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists function
blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted
per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
1.2 Intended audience GUID-0EFD9002-000E-43C2-A39F-D790486D43C1 v5
This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel, who
use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal service.
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of control and protection systems,
control and protection equipment, control and monitoring functions and the configured
functional logic in the IEDs. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic
knowledge in handling electronic equipment.
1.3 Product documentation
1.3.1 Product documentation set GUID-DBA0DD95-55A1-42D3-B161-8F1C487BA9AB v6
The user manual provides basic instructions on how to install and use Switchsync PWC600.
The manual provides instructions for engineering, mechanical and electrical installing,
commissioning and operating, to cover the common use cases of the product.
The communication protocol manual describes a communication protocol supported by the

IED. The manual concentrates on vendor-specific implementations.
The cyber security deployment guideline describes setting up a secure system, including
password procedures and levels of access in the system.
The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists function
blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted
per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
1.3.1.1 Related documents GUID-42926503-028A-4885-96EA-39CE83211411 v5
Documents related to Switchsync PWC600 Identity number

Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 1MRK 511 269-UEN
Cyber Security deployment guidelines 1MRK 511 298-UEN
User Manual 1MRK 511 346-UEN
Technical manual 1MRK 511 275-UEN
MICS 1MRK 511 297-WEN
Table continues on next page

Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 275-UEN C
Introduction
Documents related to Switchsync PWC600 Identity number

PICS 1MRG 018 800
PIXIT 1MRG 010 6581)
TICS 1MRG 010 6591)
1) Switchsync PWC600 1.0 is based on ABB 650 series, version 1.3. So the PIXIT and TICS from ABB 650 series,
version 1.3 are applicable for Switchsync PWC600 1.0 too.
1.3.2 Document revision history GUID-2FDA8977-F1F8-424B-B6E4-A68B78BD49C6 v8
Document revision/date Product version History

A/2017-12-26 1.0 First release
B/2019-02-13 1.0 Maintenance
1.4 Symbols and conventions
1.4.1 Symbols D0E747T201305151541 v1
The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the

concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard which
could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or property.
The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or
how to use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand that
under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result in
degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important that the
user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices.
1.4.2 Document conventions D0E809T201305141505 v2
• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary
also contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push button
icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.

Technical Manual
Available functions
Section 2 Available functions
2.1 Control and monitoring functions GUID-84ACFB7B-5C10-4BE6-8DFF-AC77419F26AB v2
IEC 61850 or Function description Switchsync

function name
PWC600 (MX00)
Control
DPGGIO IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions 20
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 10
VSGGIO Selector mini switch 99
SSCPOW Controlled switching strategy function 1
General calculation
ANSCAL Curve shape description 54
DPISTTIM Double point input status time monitoring 6
BINSTSAN Binary status to analog conversion 6
Logic
OR Configurable logic blocks 270
INVERTER Configurable logic blocks 100
PULSETIMER Configurable logic blocks 99
GATE Configurable logic blocks 99
XOR Configurable logic blocks 99
LOOPDELAY Configurable logic blocks 99
TIMERSET Configurable logic blocks 99
AND Configurable logic blocks 100
SRMEMORY Configurable logic blocks 100
RSMEMORY Configurable logic blocks 99
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1
B16I Boolean 16 to Integer conversion 16
B16IFCVI Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with Logic Node representation 16
IB16A Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 16
IB16FCVB Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with Logic Node representation 16
MINMAX Logical function to determine the minimum and maximum value 20
Monitoring
CVMMXN Power system measurement 1
CMMXU Current measurement 1
VMMXU Voltage measurement phase-phase 2
CMSQI Current sequence measurement 1
VMSQI Voltage sequence measurement 2
VNMMXU Voltage measurement phase-earth 2
AISVBAS General service value presentation of analog inputs 1

Technical Manual
Available functions

function name
PWC600 (MX00)
CNGTGGIO Event counter 3
DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1
A1RADR-A4RADR,
B1RBDR-B6RBDR
SPGGIO Generic communication function for single point indication 20
SP16GGIO Generic communication function for single point indication 16 inputs 8
MVGGIO Generic communication function for measured values 40
MVEXP Measured value expander block 90
MONEVG Monitoring Event Component for Acknowledgable alarms feature 4
OPERLOG Operation Log Function 15
CBCOMP Compensation of circuit breaker switching times 1
MONCOMP Provider of monitored data for circuit breaker operation 3
MONALM Multilevel threshold alarm generation function 4
ACBMSCBR Advanced circuit breaker operation and monitoring 3
CBLEARN Circuit breaker contact operation time learning function 1
GFGDE General Function to map to GDE 40
CLROPLOG Clear operation log data 1
2.2 Station communication GUID-E24223CC-E583-4990-A616-6D1C7EC94D08 v1

function name
PWC600 (MX00)
Station communication
IEC61850-8-1 IEC61850 communication protocol 1
GOOSEBINRCV Goose binary receive 10
ETHFRNT Ethernet configuration of front port 1
GATEWAY Ethernet configuration of gateway 1
ETHLAN1PRP Ethernet configuration of LAN1 port 1
PRPSTATUS System component for parallel redundancy protocol 1
CONFPROT IED Configuration protocol 1
ACTLOG Activity logging parameters 1
AGSAL Generic security application component 1
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double point value 45
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an integer value 32
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a measure and value 45
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a single point value 45

Technical Manual
Available functions
2.3 Basic IED functions GUID-ABCC4E51-F6C2-4858-8C8D-49A7517BF12A v1

function name
PWC600 (MX00)
Basic IED functions
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list 1
SELFSUPEVLST Self supervision with internal event list 1
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization 1
SNTP Time synchronization 1
DTSBEGIN Time synchronization 1
DTSEND Time synchronization 1
TIMEZONE Time synchronization 1
IRIG-B Time synchronization 1
SYNCHPPS Time synchronization 1
SETGRPS Setting group handling 1
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups 1
TESTMODE Test Mode Functionality 1
CHNGLCK Change lock function 1
TERMINALID IED identifiers 1
PRODINF Product information 1
SYSTEMTIME System time 1
RUNTIME IED Runtime Comp 1
PRIMVAL Primary system values 1
SMAI Signal Matrix for analog inputs 1
GBASVAL Global base values for settings 6
ATHSTAT Authority status 1
ATHCHCK Authority check 1
ATHMAN Authority management 1
SPACOMMMAP SPA communication mapping 1
FTPACCS FTP access with password 1
DOSFRNT Denial of service, frame rate control for front port 1
DOSLAN1 Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port 1
DOSSCKT Denial of service, socket flow control 1
SAFEFILECOPY Safe file copy function 1
SPATD Date and time via SPA protocol 1
BCSCONF Basic communication system 1
WEBSERVER WebServer 1
SRCSELECT Source selection between transformer module and merging unit 5
MONMEMSUP Monitoring component memory supervision configuration component 1
SSTCONF SST Configuration holder for unmapped parameters 1

Technical Manual
22
Analog inputs
Section 3 Analog inputs D0E3188T201305151403 v1
3.1 Introduction D0E3189T201305151403 v1
Analog input channels in the IED must be set properly in order to ensure correct controlled
switching operations. The directions of the input currents must be defined in order to reflect
the way the current transformers are installed/connected in the field (primary and secondary
connections). Control and monitoring algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities.
Consequently, the setting values are expressed in primary quantities as well and therefore it is
important to set the transformation ratio of the connected current transformers and voltage
transformers properly.
The availability of CT and VT inputs, as well as setting parameters are fixed for Switchsync
PWC600.
The IED has the ability to receive sampled voltage and current values from one or more (up to
4) merging units (MUs) via IEC 61850-9-2(LE) process bus. Mixed mode is possible, for
example, conventional voltage transformers and electronic current sensors via MU, or vice
versa.
A reference PhaseAngleRef must be defined to facilitate service values reading. This analog
channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle information will
be shown in relation to this analog input. By default, PhaseAngleRef is assigned to TRM -
Channel 5, which is used for the first reference voltage input (Source voltage L1) in the pre-
configuration. If source voltage from TRM is not available (not connected), SST would next
select TRM - Channel1 (Load current), MU1-L1U (Source voltage 9-2 LE) and MU1-L1I (Load
current 9-2 LE). During testing and commissioning of the IED, the reference channel can be
changed to facilitate testing and service values reading.
3.2 Operation principle D0E3192T201305151403 v1
The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are typically star
connected and can be connected with the star point towards the object or away from the
object. This information must be set in the IED.
The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:
• Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into the
object.
• Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out from the
object.
For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see Figure 1).
• Forward means the direction is into the object.

• Reverse means the direction is out from the object.

Technical Manual
Analog inputs
Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object
Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"
en05000456.vsd
D0E9312T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 1: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or ToObject
according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows towards the protected
object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the protected object.
The settings of the IED are given in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs and VTs are
therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated secondary and primary currents
and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated ratios.
The CT and VT ratings are entered in SST, under the Reference signals milestone. Channel
names are assigned in the pre-configuration. Manual changes can be done under Main menu/
Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the LHMI or WHMI.

Technical Manual
Analog inputs
3.3 Settings D0E3201T201305151403 v1
PID-3935-SETTINGS v1
Table 1: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseAngleRef TRM - Channel 1 - - TRM - Channel 1 Reference channel for phase angle
TRM - Channel 2 presentation
TRM - Channel 3
TRM - Channel 4
TRM - Channel 5
TRM - Channel 6
TRM - Channel 7
TRM - Channel 8
TRM - Channel 9
TRM - Channel 10
AIM - Channel 1
AIM - Channel 2
AIM - Channel 3
AIM - Channel 4
AIM - Channel 5
AIM - Channel 6
AIM - Channel 7
AIM - Channel 8
AIM - Channel 9
AIM - Channel 10
MU1 - L1I
MU1 - L2I
MU1 - L3I
MU1 - L4I
MU1 - L1U
MU1 - L2U
MU1 - L3U
MU1 - L4U
MU2 - L1I
MU2 - L2I
MU2 - L3I
MU2 - L4I
MU2 - L1U
MU2 - L2U
MU2 - L3U
MU2 - L4U
MU3 - L1I
MU3 - L2I
MU3 - L3I
MU3 - L4I
MU3 - L1U
MU3 - L2U
MU3 - L3U
MU3 - L4U
MU4 - L1I
MU4 - L2I
MU4 - L3I
MU4 - L4I
MU4 - L1U
MU4 - L2U
MU4 - L3U
MU4 - L4U

Technical Manual
Analog inputs
D0E3312T201305151403 v1
Table 2: TRM_4I_6U Non group settings (basic)

CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec5 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim5 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec6 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
Table 3: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

SVId 0 - 35 - 1 ABB_MU0101 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group

Technical Manual
Analog inputs
Table 4: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation
GUID-242C96FD-E2AA-4B57-AD66-79571D067FCB v1
MU2_4I_4U, MU3_4I_4U and MU4_4I_4U have the same settings as MU1_4I_4U.

Technical Manual
28
Binary inputs and outputs
Section 4 Binary inputs and outputs
4.1 Binary inputs

GUID-96B8BB9C-7C3D-48D9-95FB-A2E5C6377C21 v1
A binary input mirrors the status (on/off) of an electrical DC signal and reports every status
change with time stamp.
The BIO module provides 9 optically isolated binary inputs. Some of them share a common
negative terminal; see the connection diagram for details.
The PIO module provides 12 optically isolated precision binary inputs with time stamp
accuracy of 100 microseconds.
All binary inputs are equipped with digital filters, to eliminate bouncing and oscillations on the
input signals.
4.1.1 Debounce filter D0E3037T201305151403 v1
The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.
A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a millisecond when a
binary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A debounced status change is
forwarded when the time counter reaches the set DebounceTime value and the debounced
input value is high, or when the time counter reaches 0 and the debounced input value is low.
The default setting of DebounceTime is 5 ms.
A binary input ON-event is assigned the time stamp of the first rising edge after which the
counter does not reach 0 again. The same applies when the signal goes down to 0 again.
Each binary input has a filter time parameter DebounceTimex, where x is the number of the
binary input of the module in question (for example DebounceTime1). For precision binary
inputs, the debounce time can be specified separately for On and Off status changes.
The debounce time should be set to the same value for all channels on the
board.
4.1.2 Oscillation filter D0E3034T201305151403 v1
Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields from
for example nearby breakers. An oscillation filter is used to reduce the disturbance from the
system when a binary input starts oscillating.
Each debounced change of input status increments an oscillation counter. Periodically (every
OscillationTime), the oscillation counter is checked and reset. If the counter value before reset
is above the set OscillationCount value the signal is declared as oscillating and not valid. If the
value is below the set OscillationCount value, the signal is declared as valid. During counting of
the oscillation time the status of the signal remains unchanged, leading to a fixed delay in the
status update, even if the signal has attained normal status again.

Technical Manual
Each binary input has an oscillation count parameter OscillationCountx and an oscillation time
parameter OscillationTimex, where x is the number of the binary input of the module in
question. For precision binary inputs, the filter parameters can be specified separately for On
and Off status changes.
4.1.3 Settings
4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary inputs

D0E3036T201305151403 v1
Table 5: BIO_9BI Non group settings (basic)

BatteryVoltage 24 - 250 V 1 110 Station battery voltage
Table 6: BIO_9BI Non group settings (advanced)

Threshold1 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station
battery voltage for input 1
DebounceTime1 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 1
OscillationCount1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 1
OscillationTime1 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 1

Technical Manual

GUID-4D21A653-A108-4D4A-9B15-24CEEC483C34 v1
For Switchsync PWC600, Battery voltage is usually entered in SST, under the
Power System milestone.
4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for precision binary inputs

Table 7: PIO_12PBI Non group settings (basic)

BatteryVoltage 24 - 250 - 1 110 Station battery voltage
Table 8: PIO_12PBI Non group settings (advanced)

Threshold1 15 - 221 - 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station
DebounceTimeOn1 0.0000 - 0.1270 - 0.0001 0.0050 Debounce time On for input 1
DebounceTimeOff1 0.0000 - 0.1270 - 0.0001 0.0050 Debounce time Off for input 1
OscillationCntOn1 0 - 255 - 1 0 OscillationCountOn for input 1
OscillationCntOff1 0 - 255 - 1 0 OscillationCountOff for input 1
OscillationTimeOn1 0.000 - 600.000 - 0.001 0.000 OscillationTimeOn for input 1
OscillationTimeOff1 0.000 - 600.000 - 0.001 0.000 OscillationTimeOff for input 1
OscillationCntOff 2 0 - 255 - 1 0 OscillationCountOff for input 2

Technical Manual

OscillationCntOff 3 0 - 255 - 1 0 OscillationCountOff for input 3

Technical Manual


Technical Manual
4.2 Binary outputs
4.2.1 Binary outputs GUID-5E9466BB-B479-4CDF-9FAD-7D0C6E2D0789 v1
The PSM02 or PSM03 module provides 10 output relay contacts. 6 of these are rated for
making and carrying high currents, and three of them include circuits for trip coil supervision.
The remaining 4 relay contacts are intended for signaling; one of them is internally hardwired
to indicate Internal Relay Failure (IRF).
The BIO module provides 9 output relay contacts. Out of these, 3 are rated for making and
carrying high currents. The remaining 6 contacts are intended for signaling; some of them
share a common terminal, see the connection diagram for details.
The PIO module provides 6 fast static outputs that are rated for making and carrying high
currents. The switching instants of these precision binary outputs can be controlled at 100
microseconds’ accuracy, which makes them ideal for controlled switching of circuit breakers.
Binary outputs rated for making and carrying high currents allow connection directly to
breaker tripping and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage failure of the
breaker auxiliary contacts normally breaking the coil current, parallel reinforcement by an
external relay is required.

Technical Manual
Local HMI
Section 5 Local HMI
5.1 Local HMI elements D0E752T201305141540 v2
D0E1319T201305141540 V1 EN-US
Figure 2: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:
• Display (LCD)
• Buttons
• LED indicators
• Communication port for PCM600 or WHMI
The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.
5.1.1 Display D0E778T201305141540 v2
The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome display with a resolution of 320 x 240 pixels. The
character size can vary. The amount of characters and rows fitting the view depends on the
character size and the view that is shown.
The display view is divided into four basic areas.

Technical Manual
Local HMI
IEC13000063-1-en.vsd
D0E1348T201305141540 V1 EN-US
Figure 3: Display layout
1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)
• The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too long to be
shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is indicated with three dots.
• The content area shows the menu content.
• The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in and the
object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600.
• If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar appears on the
right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not fit in the
display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.
The function key panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function keys.
Each function key has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback signal for the function
key control action. The LED is connected to the required signal with PCM600.

Technical Manual
Local HMI
D0E1308T201305141540 V1 EN-US
Figure 4: Function key panel

The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs. Three alarm
LED pages are available.
D0E1200T201305141540 V1 EN-US
Figure 5: Alarm LED panel

The function key and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel is shown by
pressing one of the function keys or the Multipage button. Pressing the ESC button clears the
panel from the display. Both the panels have dynamic width that depends on the label string
length that the panel contains.
5.1.2 LEDs D0E757T201305141540 v2
The LHMI includes three status LEDs above the display: Ready, Start and Trip. In Switchsync
PWC600, only the Ready and Start LEDs are used.
There are 15 programmable alarm LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can indicate three
states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The alarm texts related to each three-color LED
are divided into three pages and can be browsed with the Multipage button.
There are 3 separate pages of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in one LED
group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be indicated since there are
three LED groups. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be
selected with the LHMI or PCM600.
The functions and operation modes of the LEDs on page 1 are defined in the default pre-
configuration.

Technical Manual
Local HMI
5.1.3 Keypad D0E709T201305141540 v2
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views or
menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications or provide
help.
The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons (function keys) that can be configured
either as menu shortcut or control buttons. The first function key is assigned in the default
pre-configuration for resetting the alarm LEDs.
23
18
1
19
2
20
3
21
4
5 17
22 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
D0E1311T201305141540 V2 EN-US
Figure 6: LHMI keypad (IEC variant) with object control, navigation and command push-
buttons and RJ-45 communication port
1...5 Function key

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 User Log on
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Ethernet communication port (RJ-45)
18 Multipage
19 Main menu
20 Clear
21 Help
22 Programmable alarm LEDs
23 Protection status LEDs

Technical Manual
Local HMI
5.2 Local HMI screen
5.2.1 Identification
D0E5719T201305151403 v1
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Local HMI screen behaviour SCREEN - -
5.2.2 Settings
D0E5950T201305151403 v1
Table 9: SCREEN Non group settings (basic)

DisplayTimeout 10 - 120 Min 10 60 Local HMI display timeout
ContrastLevel -100 - 100 % 10 0 Contrast level for display
DefaultScreen 0-0 - 1 0 Default screen
EvListSrtOrder Latest on top - - Latest on top Sort order of event list
Oldest on top
AutoIndicationDRP Off - - Off Automatic indication of disturbance
On report
SubstIndSLD No - - No Substitute indication on single line
Yes diagram
InterlockIndSLD No - - No Interlock indication on single line
Yes diagram
BypassCommands No - - No Enable bypass of commands
Yes
5.3 Local HMI signals
D0E5720T201305151403 v1

Local HMI signals LHMICTRL - -
5.3.2 Function block D0E5676T201305151403 v1
LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD
D0E13174T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 7: LHMICTRL function block

Technical Manual
Local HMI
5.3.3 Signals
D0E5952T201305151403 v1
Table 10: LHMICTRL Input signals

Name Type Default Description
CLRLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs
D0E5953T201305151403 v1
Table 11: LHMICTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are
cleared
LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active
5.4 Status LEDs D0E5632T201305151403 v1
There are three status LEDs on the LHMI, above the LCD screen: Ready (green), Start (yellow),
Trip (red).
The green LED has a fixed function that present the healthy status of the IED. The yellow and
red LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a disturbance report
is triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The red LED can be used to
indicate a operation command.
The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder function, DRPRDRE,
by connecting a start or trip signal from the actual function to a BxRBDR binary input function
block in PCM600 and configuring the SetLEDn setting to Off, Start or Trip for that particular
signal.
5.5 Indication LEDs
D0E5721T201305151403 v1

Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN - -
Individual LEDs in LHMI alarm GRP1_LED1 - - -
groups GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1 -
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1 -
GRP3_LED15

Technical Manual
Local HMI
5.5.2 Functionality D0E5633T201305151403 v1
The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx (x=1-15) control, and
supply information about the status of the indication LEDs. Input and output signals of the
function blocks are configured with PCM600. The input signal for each LED is selected
individually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is controlled by a GRP1_LEDx function block, which
determines the color and the operating mode.
By applying logical 1 to one of the inputs, a LED is activated in the corresponding color. In case
more than one input is active at the same time, red has highest priority, followed by yellow and
green.
Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different sequences;
two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types are intended to
be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset
functionality. The other two are intended to be used as signalling system in collecting mode
with acknowledgment functionality.
LEDGEN
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK
D0E13177T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 8: LEDGEN function block
GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
D0E13180T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 9: GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is shown as an example; each of the 15 LEDs in groups 1 - 3 has a
similar function block.
5.5.4 Signals
D0E5681T201305151403 v1
Table 12: LEDGEN Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs
D0E5679T201305151403 v1
Table 13: GRP1_LED1 Input signals

HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1

Technical Manual
Local HMI
D0E5682T201305151403 v1
Table 14: LEDGEN Output signals

NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input is set
ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged
5.5.5 Settings
D0E5683T201305151403 v1
Table 15: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
tMax 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Maximum time for the definition of a
disturbance
D0E5680T201305151403 v1
Table 16: GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

SequenceType Follow-S - - Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI
Follow-F alarm group 1
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_OFF Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is off
LabelRed 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is red
LabelYellow 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is yellow
LabelGreen 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is green
5.5.6 Operation principle
5.5.6.1 Operating modes D0E5634T201305151403 v1
Collecting mode
LEDs that are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated (latched on) continuously
until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as a
simplified alarm system.
Re-starting mode
In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs and
activates only those, which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-starting
mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a

Technical Manual
Local HMI
new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the
activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.
5.5.6.2 Acknowledgment/reset D0E5635T201305151403 v1
From local HMI

Active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual acknowledgment and manual
reset have the same meaning and refer to a common signal for all the operating sequences
and LEDs. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. Acknowledgment/reset
is performed via the button and menus on the LHMI.
From function input

Active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from the RESET input to the LEDGEN
function. This input can for example be configured to a binary input operated from an external
push button. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even
if the button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications
active at the moment when the button is first pressed.
Automatic reset
Automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined to operate in re-starting mode
with latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When automatic reset of the LEDs has been
performed, still persisting indications will be indicated with a steady light.
5.5.6.3 Operating sequence D0E5638T201305151403 v1
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow the input
signal continuously. For the Latched type the LED is switched ON whenever the corresponding
input signal is activated, and remains ON until the active indications are reset.
The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED separately.
For sequence 1 and 2 Follow type, the acknowledgment/reset function is not applicable.
Sequence 3 and 4 Latched type with acknowledgement are only working in collecting mode.
Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode while Sequence 6 is
working according to Latched type and re-starting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence
names have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flash.
Upon activation of the input signal, LED is switched ON in the color corresponding to the
activated input and operates according to the selected sequence diagrams below.
In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the following characteristics:
= No indication = Steady light = Flash
G= Green Y= Yellow R= Red

IEC09000311.vsd
D0E13156T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 10: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams
Sequence 1 (Follow-S) D0E5419T201305151403 v1

This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals. It does
not react to acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its
operation.

Technical Manual
Local HMI
Activating
signal
LED
IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
D0E10923T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 11: Operating Sequence 1 (Follow-S)

D0E5641T201305151403 v1
If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to one LED the priority is as
described above. An example of the operation when two colors are activated in parallel is
shown in Figure 12.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED G G R G
D0E13159T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 12: Operating sequence 1, two colors
Sequence 2 (Follow-F) D0E5422T201305151403 v1

This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of
showing steady light.
Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S D0E5423T201305151403 v1

This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independent
of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication starts
flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is not present any
more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
D0E10926T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 13: Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S

D0E5648T201305151403 v1
When acknowledgment is given, all indications that have appeared before the indication with
higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent of if the low priority
indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. Figure 14 shows the sequence when a
signal of lower priority becomes activated after acknowledgment has been performed on a
higher priority signal. The low priority signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high
priority signal resets.

Technical Manual
Local HMI
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
R R G
LED
Acknow
D0E13162T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 14: Operating Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S), 2 colors involved

D0E5655T201305151403 v1
If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained. Acknowledgment of
indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low priority indications, which are not
visible according to Figure 15.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED G Y R R Y
Acknow.
D0E13165T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 15: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

D0E5662T201305151403 v1
If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priority
indication the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged according to Figure
16.

Technical Manual
Local HMI
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED G G R R Y
Acknow.
D0E13168T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 16: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F) D0E5426T201305151403 v1

This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light are
swapped.
Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S D0E5427T201305151403 v1

This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of the
input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4
is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset that is, immediately
after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active
signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal
LED
Reset
D0E10932T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 17: Operating Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S

D0E5669T201305151403 v1
That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with lower
priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according to Figure 18.

Technical Manual
Local HMI
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
R G
LED
Reset
D0E13171T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 18: Operating sequence 5, two colors
Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S D0E5430T201305151403 v1

In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to
Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be
affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset
has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. LEDs set for
sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences.
Timing diagram for sequence 6 D0E5431T201305151403 v1

Figure 19 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
D0E10935T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 19: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same

disturbance
Figure 20 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.

Technical Manual
Local HMI
Disturbance Disturbance
tRestart tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
D0E10938T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 20: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

Figure 21 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has
reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
D0E10941T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 21: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same

disturbance but with reset of activating signal between
Figure 22 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

Technical Manual
Local HMI
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
D0E10944T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 22: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset
5.6 Function keys
D0E5722T201305151403 v1

HMI Function Keys Control module FNKEYMD1 - - -
FNKEYMD5
Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function keys, directly to the left of the LCD,
that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each button has an
indication LED that can be configured in the application configuration.
When used as a menu shortcut, a function key provides a fast way to navigate between default
nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control a binary signal.
Pressing any function key will first display the list of corresponding labels on the LHMI screen.
Only when this list is displayed, the associated functions can be executed, see User manual for
more information.
5.6.3 Function block

D0E5693T201305151403 v1
FNKEYMD1
^LEDCTL1 ^FKEYOUT1
D0E13183T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 23: FNKEYMD1 function block

Technical Manual
Local HMI
Only the function block for the first button is shown. There is a similar block for every function
key.
5.6.4 Signals
D0E5692T201305151403 v1
Table 17: FNKEYMD1 Input signals

LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key
D0E5691T201305151403 v1
Table 18: FNKEYMD1 Output signals

FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key
5.6.5 Settings
D0E5690T201305151403 v1
Table 19: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)

Mode Off - - Off Output operation mode
Toggle
Pulsed
PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled by
LCDFn1
LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state
Table 20: FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Type Off - - Off Function key type
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut - 0 Menu shortcut for function key
5.6.6 Operation principle D0E5696T201305151403 v1
Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled from the LHMI
function keys. When used in operation mode (Type setting) ‘Control’, pressing a function key
controls the output signal of the respective function block. These binary outputs can in turn be
used to control other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks, binary I/O outputs
etc.
FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and parameters that
govern its behavior. These settings and parameters are normally defined in the pre-
configuration and can be modified by using the PST.

Technical Manual
Local HMI
5.6.6.1 Operating sequence in Control mode D0E5697T201305151403 v1
The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or PULSED.
Setting OFF
This mode always keeps the output at 0 (low). Pressing the function key does not affect the
output value.
Setting TOGGLE
In this mode, pressing the function key for minimum 0.5 seconds (detection period, not
changeable) toggles the output between 0 (low) and 1 (high). Key presses shorter than the
detection period are ignored.
Key press
0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s
Output
IEC17000251 V1 EN-US
Figure 24: Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE

Setting PULSED
In this mode, pressing the function key for minimum 0.5 seconds (detection period, not
changeable) changes the output to 1 (high). After a time defined by PulseTime, the output will
return to 0 (low) irrespective of the status of the function key.
If the function key is pressed again, a new pulse will be generated only if the output is 0 at the
end of the detection period. See Figure 25.
Key press
0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s
Output
PulseTime PulseTime PulseTime
Figure 25: Sequence diagram for setting PULSED
5.6.6.2 Input function D0E5704T201305151403 v1
The binary input LEDCTL is active only when Type is set to ‘Control’. In this mode, the status
(ON/OFF) of the yellow LED on the function key directly follows the status of LEDCTL. This
functionality is independent of the Mode setting.

Technical Manual
52
Web HMI (WHMI)
Section 6 Web HMI (WHMI)
GUID-1644E12F-1CD1-4CB2-91E2-291C4DC5E219 v1
The WHMI provides a remote user interface on a common Internet browser via Ethernet link.
The functionality is explained in the User manual.
Basic operation of the WHMI is configured by the WEBSERVER function block.

Technical Manual
54
Controlled Switching and Monitoring
Section 7 Controlled Switching and Monitoring
7.1 Introduction GUID-7B9D8386-0CCA-4AB9-92E3-DE05405A0405 v1
The function blocks described in this section are at the core of the controlled switching
functionality. These function blocks have strong interdependency and are combined in this
section to explain the concept and the functional interactions.
Controlled switching is not a category of function blocks in PCM600 and LHMI.
Controlled switching (also known as point-on-wave switching or synchronous switching) is

defined as controlling the circuit breaker in such a manner that the instant of current inception
(on closing) or contact separation (on opening) occurs at an instant that is optimal for the
circuit breaker, the load, and/or power quality. This section explains the operation principle
from the product user’s view point.
The involved function blocks are listed in Table 21.
Table 21: Core application functions in the IED

Function name Description Instances Function category in
PCM600 LHMI/WHMI
SSCPOW Determines and releases 1 CONTROL
controlled switching
commands to the circuit
breaker
ACBMSCBR Monitors switching 3 (one per phase) MONITORING
operation of the circuit
breaker
MONCOMP Consolidates monitored 3 (one per phase) MONITORING
data for logging
A Switchsync PWC600 IED controls the instants at which the circuit breaker operates,
monitors the switching operation and logs the monitored data. To achieve this, various
function blocks perform specific functionalities. SSCPOW sets the switching target and
controls the CB accordingly, ACBMSCBR monitors the switching and determines the
correction(s) required, and MONCOMP assists in logging the data.
7.2 Operation principle GUID-87EB84D8-3AC2-466B-A323-FBB5FB9477D6 v1
A random instant of switching the circuit breaker might impact the load, power system or
circuit breaker contacts because of high voltage or current transients or re-ignitions/re-strikes
in the CB. Conversely, controlled switching of the circuit breaker, and hence, the power system
equipment can avoid harmful transients in the network and also increase the life time of the
circuit breaker and/or the switched load.
Figure 26 shows an ideal circuit breaker closing on a grounded single phase reactive load.
Considering no energy stored on reactor time, at the instant when CB is operated, the source
voltage wave shown in the figure will appear across the circuit breaker contacts until the
circuit breaker closes electrically. If a command is given at any random instant trsc to the

Technical Manual
circuit breaker, the circuit breaker will close electrically at trsi and mechanically after the circuit
breaker operating time TCB. However, the random point on wave Drsi at which this switching
happens might create undesirable transients. In such circumstances, it is recommended to
optimize the switching targets based on the design and connection configuration of
connected load that need to be switched. A point-on-wave controller such as PWC600 analyzes
the reference voltage signal and identifies a favorable switching target (Dosi, at time tosi) for
the reactive load. Now the controller delays the command by TCTD = tosi – trsi (controller time
delay) and releases it to circuit breaker at tosc. This will result into making of the current at
instant tosi considering the circuit breaker closing time of TCB.
trsc tosc trsi tosi

Voltage (V)
Dosi
Time(t)
Drsi
TCB
TCTD
TCB
IEC17000164-1-en.vsdx
Figure 26: Principle of controlled switching (single phase)

Where
trsc = instant of random switching command
tosc = instant of optimal (point-on-wave controlled) switching command
trsi = instant of random switching instant
tosi = instant of optimal switching instant
tCB = circuit breaker operating time
tCTD = controller time delay
Drsi = point on wave for random switching
Dosi = optimal (target) point on wave

Technical Manual
After releasing the switching command, the controller monitors the switching operation to
evaluate various electrical and mechanical parameters of CB, like electrical operating time,
mechanical operating time etc. These monitored parameters are used for assessing the
success of the performed operation and the health of the circuit breaker, as well as for
adapting the operating parameters for subsequent operations so as to achieve optimal point-
on-wave performance. Key parameters will also be logged for future analysis.
Actual switching operations can be monitored by analyzing the precision mechanical status
feedback contacts (precision auxiliary contacts) and/or the primary current or load voltage
signals. Figure 27 and Figure 28 shows the single line diagram with possible feedback options.
Busbar
Bus
VT
Reference signal
CT Electrical Input
feedback command
Output Switchsync
PWC600
Circuit command
breaker Mechanical
feedback
Load
Figure 27: Controlled switching with current feedback

Technical Manual
Busbar
Bus
VT
Reference signal
Output Input
command command
Mechanical
Circuit feedback Switchsync
breaker PWC600
Electrical
feedback
Load
VT
Load
Figure 28: Controlled switching with load voltage feedback

To achieve the desired control, monitoring and data logging, the four functions work in a close
coordination. Figure 29 shows the interconnection between these functions. Control
functionality is mainly handled by SSCPOW function. Monitoring and data acquisition is
handled by ACBMSCBR and MONCOMP functions respectively. Individual phases are handled
with separate instances. CBCOMP takes the external parameters like idle time, drive pressure,
temperature and spring charge as input and provides the corresponding compensation value.

Technical Manual
7.2.1
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 275-UEN C
Command Command
inputs outputs
SSCPOW
Reference Signal Logging

Source voltage / trigger
Current
Idle time
Coordination for Coordination for
L1\L2\L3
Control and Monitoring Data logging
Control
voltage
3 3
List of functionalities
Drive Pressure 2 Correction & Adaptation data 2
CBCOMP 1 1
L1\L2\L3
Spring charge
L1\L2\L3
ACBMSCBR MONCOMP
Coordination for Data aquisition Data to be
Temperature Compensation
L1\L2\L3 logged
L1\L2\L3
The main functionalities can be categorized into:

Electrical Feedback
Current / Load voltage
Figure 29: Main application functions in the device

Monitored data
Mechanical Feedback
59
GUID-34209D2E-606D-42F4-865B-D864971025FA v1
Section 7
1. Control
2. Monitoring
3. Data acquisition
7.2.2 Control GUID-F45F7CE6-622A-4A1C-8373-BC80CACB6992 v1
Control (Switching target evaluation and command handling) is mainly handled by SSCPOW. It
supports two modes of operation:
• Normal switching mode

• CB learning mode
7.2.2.1 Normal switching mode GUID-C902E2A8-DD28-4A1C-9C16-600962A925ED v1
The primary objective of Switchsync PWC600 is to energize or de-energize loads at optimal

points on wave to minimize switching transients and prevent re-ignitions or re-strikes. In
normal switching mode, SSCPOW function achieves this primary objective.
Reference signals GUID-A172C8FD-8642-4331-99DF-A4B2F85E1585 v2

To perform a controlled switching, the function requires a valid reference signal against which
the optimal point on wave control has to be achieved. The reference signal for closing
operations is always source voltage. The reference for opening operations can be selected by
setting OpenRefI as either source voltage or load current, as shown in Table 22.
Table 22: Selection of reference signal for controlled opening operations

Interface Type Available in Description
function
OpenRefl Setting SSCPOW Defines the reference signal for controlled opening operation.
There are two options for the setting:
• Voltage (meaning source voltage)

• Current (meaning load current)
If voltage is used as reference, the source voltage signals can be provided from single-phase or
three-phase VTs, which measure either phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltage. The actual
VT configuration shall be selected through the settings detailed in Table 23.

Technical Manual
Table 23: Voltage reference selection

function
UConn Type Setting SSCPOW Specifies the connection type of the source voltage
transformer. It can be selected as
• One phase star — Either of the phase to ground voltage

signal is available
• Three phase star — All the phase to ground voltage
signals are available
• One phase delta — Either of the phase to phase voltage
signal is available
• Three phase delta — All the phase to phase voltage
signals are available
UConnPh Setting SSCPOW When UConnType is selected as “One phase star” or “One
phase delta”, the actually connected phase or phase to phase
information has to be specified here from the options
• L1/L1-L2
• L2/L2-L3
• L3/L3-L1
Selection in this setting is irrelevant if Three phase star or

Three phase delta are selected for UConnType setting.
When only one phase voltage is available, the setting UConnPh is used to specify the phase
information that is connected. L1/L1-L2 when selected means that L1 phase is connected if
selection in UConnType is One phase star, or L1-L2 voltage is connected if selection in
UConnType is One phase delta. The same is applicable for L2/L2-L3 and L3/L3-L1.
When One phase star or One phase delta is being used, that voltage signal shall
always be connected to the L1 voltage input of the IED irrespective of the
phase/phases being connected in real filed to the voltage transformer.
The input interfaces to connect voltage and current signals are described in Table 24.
Table 24: Voltage and current inputs

function
VoltCHA Input SSCPOW RMS Voltage input for phase L1/L1-L2
VoltCHB Input SSCPOW RMS Voltage input for phase L2/L2-L3
VoltCHC Input SSCPOW RMS Voltage input for phase L3/L3-L1
CurrCHA Input SSCPOW Current channel input for phase L1
CurrCHB Input SSCPOW Current channel input for phase L2
CurrCHC Input SSCPOW Current channel input for phase L3
U3P Input SSCPOW Reference voltage instantaneous sample inputs for three
phases
I3P Input SSCPOW Reference current instantaneous sample inputs for three
phases
For any reference source, the frequency and point-on-wave targets are ascertained by tracking
the signal for a number of half cycles. This can be configured using the NumOfHalfCycle
setting as described in Table 25. Higher values of NumOfHalfCycle are used to provide more
stable tracking. Conversely, if the system frequency is expected to change rapidly, a lower

Technical Manual
value of NumOfHalfCycle can be provided. Moreover in case of rapid changes in frequency, the
low value of the parameter may lead to inaccurate targeting.
Point-on-wave switching is not suggested to be used on rapidly changing

system conditions.
Half cyclic algorithm for Frequency tracking: At every execution cycle the functions (SSCPOW
& ACBMSCBR) check the latest 20 samples @ 80 samples / cycle, for change in polarity (from
positive to negative or vice versa), between 2 consecutive samples. Using linear interpolation,
the time stamp of exact zero crossing point will be calculated between the 2 samples of
opposite polarity, and stored in a list (Cyclic) of zero crossings. The same procedure will be
repeated for 2*NumOfHalfCycle execution cycles, appending every zero crossing time stamp
to the list. Upon completion of checking the set number of half cycles the average of stored
zero crossing time stamp data will give the approximated time between zero crossings as well
as actual system frequency, which will be further used for point-on-wave switching operations.
Table 25: Number of half cycles for tracking

function
NumOfHalfCycle Setting SSCPOW Number of half cycles to be considered for half cycle
average time period evaluation.
Any selected reference signal is validated to be healthy before being used. If the reference
signal cannot be used, reference missing condition is declared and switching will either be
bypassed or blocked according to the ContingencyMode setting (see below). The healthiness
of a reference signal is ascertained by comparing its RMS magnitude against a configurable
threshold called the dead value setting. If the RMS magnitude of the signal is lower than the
threshold, the signal cannot be used as a reference. Separate settings are available to check
the healthiness of source voltage and load current as reference.
For a three-phase reference signal, the healthiness of each phase is checked individually. Only
if all phases are found healthy then the entire reference signal is declared healthy.
Table 26: Dead value settings

function
UDead Setting SSCPOW Threshold level for input source voltage signal in percent of
UBase. If the RMS voltage is less than this threshold level,
source voltage cannot be used as reference.
IDead Setting SSCPOW Threshold level for input current signal in percent of IBase. If
the RMS current is less than this threshold level, load current
cannot be used as reference.
GlobalBaseSel Setting SSCPOW Selection of GBASVAL function instance from which UBase
and IBase are taken
SSCPOW expects that UBase and IBase in GBASVAL (selected by GlobalBaseSel)

are set as rated phase-to-ground voltage and maximum steady-state current
into the load, respectively. For controlled switching of transformers,
transmission lines, or cables, the steady-state current shall be given as the
nominal charging current with no further load connected.
The conditions for using the available reference signal and for declaring missing reference are
summarized in Table 27 below.

Technical Manual
Table 27: Use and status of reference signals

CB status Load type OpenRefl Assessment of Assessment of Missing Reference signal
source voltage load current reference used
signal signal
Open (any) (any) healthy (any) no source voltage
Open (any) (any) not healthy (any) yes none
Closed (any) Voltage healthy (any) no source voltage
Closed (any) Voltage not healthy (any) yes none
Closed (any) Current (any) healthy no load current
Closed (preset) Current healthy not healthy no source voltage
Closed (user-defined) Current healthy not healthy yes none
Closed (any) Current not healthy not healthy yes none
In case of missing reference, incoming switching commands will be bypassed through or

blocked as per the ContingencyMode selection, see below. SSCPOW will declare loss of
reference at its output REFSIGLOS if enabled by the RefSignalLossAlm setting, see Table 28.
Table 28: Loss of reference signal

function
REFSIGLOS Output SSCPOW Status of the reference signal: Logical 1 means reference
signal is missing.
RefSignalLossAlm Setting SSCPOW Enable or disable the REFSIGLOS alarm
Handling of switching commands GUID-48CEA456-E1C7-4370-8A6F-A4F50572B9F9 v2

SSCPOW reacts to switching commands received on the inputs described in Table 29. There
are two inputs for initiating a CB opening operation and two inputs for initiating a CB closing
operation. In case commands are received on both the inputs (for example, when the
application is configured to receive commands from binary inputs and GOOSE interfaces in
parallel), the command that has been received earlier will be executed and the other one is
ignored. When a switching command has been accepted, no further commands are accepted
until the function completes the earlier command by logging the data.
Table 29: Command inputs

function
CMDOPEN Input SSCPOW Initiating input 1 (from binary input) for CB opening
operation
CMDOPENG Input SSCPOW Initiating input 2 (from GOOSE command) for CB opening
operation
CMDCLOSE Input SSCPOW Initiating input 1 (from binary input) for CB closing
operation
CMDCLOSEG Input SSCPOW Initiating input 2 (from GOOSE command) for CB closing
operation
The specific reaction to a received command is controlled by different settings and inputs as
shown in Table 30. Blocking means that no command will be forwarded to the CB. Bypass
means that the CB will be operated without point-on-wave control.

Technical Manual
Table 30: Operation Modes

function
CntrldOperType Setting SSCPOW This setting is used to select the type of operations to be
enabled (performed). It can be selected as
• Open
• Close
• Open and Close
If Open option is selected, closing operations are blocked.

Similarly, if Close option is selected, opening operations
are blocked.
ByPassMode Setting SSCPOW The operation type(s) selected in this setting are
bypassed if they are enabled in CntrldOperType setting.
Options are,
• Disable (that is, no bypassing)

• Open
• Close
• Open and Close
BLKOPOPR Input SSCPOW Opening operations (if enabled by CntrldOperType

setting) will be blocked if this input is high.
BLKCLOPR Input SSCPOW Closing operations (if enabled by CntrldOperType setting)
will be blocked if this input is high.
BLKSYNSW Input SSCPOW If this input is high, operations enabled by CntrldOperType
will be blocked or bypassed as per the ContingencyMode
setting.
ContingencyMode Setting SSCPOW During conditions not suitable for performing controlled
switching, as explained above, contingency mode is
activated and all permitted operations are either blocked
or bypassed depending on the selection in this setting. It
can be selected as
• Block opening and block closing

• Bypass opening and bypass closing
• Block opening and bypass closing
• Bypass opening and block closing
Different combinations of switching are possible with the settings and inputs described in
Table 30. Table 31 describes the overall effect of these on opening and closing operations.
Table 31: Switching combinations

CntrldOperTy ByPassMode BLKOPOP BLKCLOPR BLKSYNSW or ContingencyMode Opening Closing
pe R contingency operation operation
condition
Open Disable / 0 (any) 0 (any) Controlled Blocked
Close
Open Disable / 0 (any) 1 Block open (any Blocked Blocked
Close option for close)
Open Disable / 1 (any) (any) (any) Blocked Blocked
Close
Open Disable / 0 (any) 1 Bypass open (any Bypassed Blocked
Close option for close)
Open Open / Open 0 (any) 1 Block open (any Blocked Blocked
& Close option for close)

Technical Manual
CntrldOperTy ByPassMode BLKOPOP BLKCLOPR BLKSYNSW or ContingencyMode Opening Closing

pe R contingency operation operation
condition
Open Open / Open 1 (any) (any) (any) Blocked Blocked
& Close
Open Open / Open 0 (any) 0 (any) Bypassed Blocked
& Close
Open Open / Open 0 (any) 1 Bypass open (any Bypassed Blocked
& Close option for close)
Close Disable / (any) 0 0 (any) Blocked Controlled
Close
Close Disable / (any) 0 1 Block close (any Blocked Blocked
Close option for open)
Close Disable / (any) 1 (any) (any) Blocked Blocked
Close
Close Disable / (any) 0 1 Bypass close (any Blocked Bypassed
Close option for open)
Close Open / Open (any) 0 1 Block close (any Blocked Blocked
& Close option for open)
Close Open / Open (any) 1 (any) (any) Blocked Blocked
& Close
Close Open / Open (any) 0 0 (any) Blocked Bypassed
& Close
Close Open / Open (any) 0 1 Bypass close (any Blocked Bypassed
& Close option for open)
Open & Close Disable 0 0 0 (any) Controlled Controlled
Open & Close Disable 0 1 0 (any) Controlled Blocked
Open & Close Disable 1 0 0 (any) Blocked Controlled
Open & Close Close 0 1 0 (any) Controlled Blocked
Open & Close Close 0 0 0 (any) Controlled Bypassed
Open & Close Close 1 0 0 (any) Blocked Bypassed
Open & Close Open 1 0 0 (any) Blocked Controlled
Open & Close Open 0 0 0 (any) Bypassed Controlled
Open & Close Open 0 1 0 (any) Bypassed Blocked
Open & Close Open/Close 1 0 0 (any) Blocked Bypassed
Open & Close Open/Close 0 1 0 (any) Bypassed Blocked
Open & Close Open/Close 0 0 0 (any) Bypassed Bypassed
Open & Close (any) 1 1 0 (any) Blocked Blocked
Open & Close (any) (any) (any) 1 Block open&close Blocked Blocked
Open & Close (any) 0 0 1 Blockopen- Blocked Bypassed
Bypassclose
Open & Close (any) 0 0 1 Bypassopen- Bypassed Blocked
Blockclose
Open & Close (any) 0 0 1 Bypass open&close Bypassed Bypassed
If any command is blocked or bypassed as per Table 31, the outputs BLKOPL1 / BLKOPL2 /
BLKOPL3, BLKCLL1 / BLKCLL2 / BLKCLL3, OPBYPASS or CLBYPASS, go high for the respective
open or close operation. If the condition for blocking or bypassing is persisting (example:
BLOCK input is high or Bypass setting is enabled), these outputs remain high; conversely, if the
conditions are temporary, for example, because of loss of reference signal etc., they are

Technical Manual
generated for as long as the condition persists, minimum one execution cycle. The outputs are
defined in Table 32.
Table 32: Block and bypass information outputs

function
BLKOPL1 Output SSCPOW Indication that open command has been blocked for phase
BLKOPL2 L1 / L2 / L3
BLKOPL3
BLKCLL1 Output SSCPOW Indication that close command has been blocked for phase
BLKCLL2 L1 / L2 / L3
BLKCLL3
OPBYPASS Output SSCPOW Indication that opening command has been bypassed
(uncontrolled opening)
CLBYPASS Output SSCPOW Indication that closing command has been bypassed
(uncontrolled closing)
UNCONTSWT Output SSCPOW Indication (alarm) for last switching operation (opening or
closing) performed uncontrolled
UncontSwitchAlm Setting SSCPOW Enable or disable the UNCONTSWT alarm
For controlled switching operations, SSCPOW will delay the release of the output commands
to the three phases of the circuit breaker to achieve a point on wave switching that is
desirable for the selected application. Minimum controller delay is one power cycle and
depends on operating time and switching angle.
All output commands are issued on three individual outputs for opening and three outputs for
closing operations. These output signals include time stamp information to switch on the
IED’s static outputs on the PIO card at the specified times. The outputs are described in Table
32.
The STRDPOW output indicates the controlled switching status, that is, a valid operation
command (Close or Open) was received and the command is for controlled operation of the
breaker. STRDPOW will not be set if a bypass command was received. The output is set to high
immediately after detecting a valid controlled operation command, and reset when the last
control output is switched off at the end of the operation.
Table 33: Output interfaces for commands

function
OPCMDL1 Output SSCPOW Controlled opening command outputs for phase L1 / L2 / L3
OPCMDL2
OPCMDL3
CLCMDL1 Output SSCPOW Controlled closing command outputs for phase L1 / L2 / L3
CLCMDL2
CLCMDL3
STRDPOW Output SSCPOW Indication of point on wave controlling start
Application selection GUID-83E87F12-A0DF-4E6B-8C3C-FB09BC0BB94A v1

SSCPOW function can be configured to automatically execute a preset switching strategy
based on application information, or to switch at user defined targets. LoadType setting
allows the user to do this selection between a choice of predefined loads or user defined
setting. If user defined load is selected, the user can manually specify exact target points
where the three phases are to be switched, separately for opening and closing. The settings
are described in Table 34.

Technical Manual
Table 34: Application selection

function
LoadType Setting SSCPOW This setting specifies the connected load. Refer to Table 35
for further selection of the load type for reactors and
transformers. Available options are,
• Capacitor
• Reactor
• Coupled reactor
• Power transformer
• Coupled transformer
• Transmission line / power cable
• User defined
Grounding Setting SSCPOW For all load types other than ”User defined”, this setting
specifies the effective grounding of system and load.
Available options are,
• Star grounded
• Ungrounded / Delta
• Impedance grounded (only for reactor and transformer
load types)
See Table 36 for details.

ImpRatio Setting SSCPOW If LoadType is selected as ’Reactor’, ’Power
transformer’, ’Coupled reactor’ or ’Coupled Transformer’
and Grounding is specified as ’Impedance grounded’, then
ImpRatio specifies the ratio of grounding impedance to
phase impedance.
Table 35: Load selection for reactors and transformers

Actual Load Core configuration Secondary/Tertiary LoadType in SSCPOW
winding
Reactor Individual bank n/a Reactor
Reactor Common core 4/5-limb n/a Reactor
Reactor Common core 3-limb n/a Coupled Reactor
Tansformer Individual bank No delta winding Power transformer
Tansformer Common core 4/5-limb No delta winding Power transformer
Tansformer Common core 3-limb No delta winding Coupled transformer
Tansformer Individual bank At least one winding is Coupled transformer
delta
Tansformer Common core 4/5-limb At least one winding is Coupled transformer
delta
Tansformer Common core 3-limb At least one winding is Coupled transformer
delta
Table 36: Grounding options

Source Grounding Load connection (of primary winding Grounding in SSCPOW
for transformers)
Ungrounded (any) Ungrounded/Delta
Solidly grounded Star grounded (Yn) Star grounded
Solidly grounded Ungrounded star (Y) / Delta (Δ) Ungrounded star / Delta
Solidly grounded Star (Y) connected, grounded Impedance grounded
through neutral reactor

Technical Manual
For the purpose of controlled switching, “primary winding” of a transformer

refers to the winding that is switched under point-on-wave control.
For all predefined load types (LoadType other than ‘User defined’), the function automatically
calculates the optimal point-on-wave switching targets (which are described in the User
manual), tracking the actual system voltage and frequency. However, if ‘User defined’ load is
used, the switching is performed at user defined phase angles specified by the settings
described in Table 37.
Table 37: User defined controlled switching targets

function
PhFixSelectOpen Setting SSCPOW Selection of lead phase for controlled opening
operations as random or fixed (L1*)
LeadTargetOpen Setting SSCPOW Opening (that is, contact separation) target in
electrical degrees relative to a positive-going
zero crossing of the selected reference signal,
for the lead phase
FirstFollowOpen Setting SSCPOW Opening (that is, contact separation) target in
electrical degrees relative to LeadTargetOpen,
for the first following phase
SecondFollowOpen Setting SSCPOW Opening (that is, contact separation) target in
electrical degrees relative to LeadTargetOpen,
for the second following phase
PhFixSelectClose Setting SSCPOW Selection of lead phase for controlled closing
operations as random or fixed (L1*)
LeadTargetClose Setting SSCPOW Current making target in electrical degrees
relative to a positive-going reference voltage
zero crossing, for the lead phase
FirstFollowClose Setting SSCPOW Current making target in electrical degrees
relative to LeadTargetClose, for the first
following phase
SecondFollowClose Setting SSCPOW Current making target in electrical degrees
relative to LeadTargetClose, for the second
following phase
* In PWC600 1.0.1, fixed lead phase selection L1 is erroneously shown as L2 in PST.
As defined by the controlled switching strategy, SSCPOW staggers the switching of the three
poles to achieve optimal energization or de-energization of the load. The pole which is
controlled to operate first is called the lead phase. Controlled switching targets for the lead
phase are defined by LeadTargetOpen and LeadTargetClose settings. The first following and
second following phases are defined as the phases which lag the lead phase by 120° and 240°,
respectively. Refer to Table 38 for descriptions.
Table 38: Definition of lead phase and following phase

System phase rotation Lead phase First following phase Second following phase
Normal (L1-L2-L3) L1 L2 L3
Reverse (L3-L2-L1) L1 L3 L2

Technical Manual
Figure 30 illustrates optimal energizing targets for a star grounded reactor bank, viz. the
positive voltage peaks, with L1 lead phase in a system with normal phase rotation. Table 39
describes the settings to be applied for a user defined switching strategy.
90°
Lead Phase
Voltage (V)
Time (t)
90°
First following
phase
Time (t)
120°
90°
Second
240° following phase
Time (t)
Figure 30: Optimal energization targets for star grounded reactor bank
Table 39: Example of user-defined controlled closing strategy

Setting Value Description
LeadTargetClose 90ۜ° L1 phase switches at 90° after its
own phase zero crossing
FirstFollowClose 120° L2 phase switches 120° after L1
phase has switched
SecondFollowClose 240° L3 phase switches 240° after L1
phase has switched
Target selection for closing operations GUID-DFA06B61-ECF2-4796-A802-FD90105F6D3E v2

For controlled closing operations, SSCPOW chooses the ideal switching strategy depending on
load and system configuration defined in section Application selection.
The selection of the target phase angles for energization (also referred as making targets)
depends on the basic capacitive or reactive nature of the load. Capacitive loads need to be
energized at voltage zero across the circuit breaker. This switching strategy ensures low
inrush currents and low transient voltages. Refer to Equation 1 for relation of voltage across
the capacitive load and current through it. If the switching happens at zero voltage, the
instantaneous current drawn will be marginal.

Technical Manual
i i
L
v = Vm sin(wt ) C v = Vm sin(wt )
Figure 31: Capacitive and inductive loads
dv
i =C´
dt
IECEQUATION17033 V1 EN-US (Equation 1)
Inductive loads, without residual magnetic flux, are energized at a reference voltage maximum
(peak) . This switching strategy ensures symmetric current and thus prevents inrush current by
preventing core saturation, refer to Equation 2 for the relation of voltage across the inductive
load and current through it. If the switching occurs at voltage peak, the current will be
symmetric.
1
L ò
i= ´ v.dt
Table 40 to Table 45 describe the preset target angles used for switching of predefined loads.
All the switching angles have been described with L1 lead phase, assuming PhFixSelectClose
was set to Fixed L1. If PhFixSelectClose was set to Random, lead phase will be selected
dynamically (Lead phase will be the phase which can be switched first with the given switching
strategy) and the following phases are rotated accordingly.
Table 40: Capacitor making angles (preset strategies) assuming L1 lead phase
Capacitor bank configuration L1 (lead phase) making target L2 making target L3 making target
Yn (wye/star, grounded) Positive-going zero crossing 120° after lead phase 240° after lead phase
of L1 phase-to-ground
voltage
Y (wye/star, ungrounded) or Positive-going zero crossing of L1-L2 (phase-phase) voltage 270° after lead phase
Δ (delta)
Table 41: Reactor making angles (preset strategies) assuming L1 lead phase
Reactor configuration L1 (lead phase) making target L2 making target L3 making target
Yn (wye/star, grounded) Positive peak of L1 phase-to- 120° after lead phase 240° after lead phase
ground voltage
Y (wye/star, ungrounded) or Positive peak of of L1-L2 (phase-phase) voltage 90° after lead phase
Δ (delta)
Y (wye/star) with neutral Positive peak of L1 phase-to- ΦC after lead phase 240° after lead phase
grounding reactor ground voltage

Technical Manual
Table 42: Coupled reactor making angles (preset strategies) assuming L1 lead phase
Coupled reactor configuration L1 (lead phase) making target L2 making target L3 making target
ground voltage
Δ (delta)
Y (wye/star) with neutral Positive peak of L1 phase-to- ΦC after lead phase 240° after lead phase
grounding reactor ground voltage
Table 43: Power transformer making targets (preset strategies) assuming L1 lead phase
Transformer configuration L1 (lead phase) making target L2 making target L3 making target
ground voltage
Y (wye/star, ungrounded) or Positive peak of L1-L2 (phase-phase) voltage 90° after lead phase
Δ (delta)
Table 44: Coupled transformer making targets (preset strategies)

Coupled transformer L1 (lead phase) making target L2 making target L3 making target
configuration
ground voltage
Δ (delta)
Table 45: Transmission line / cable making targets (preset strategies)

Line/cable configuration L1 (lead phase) making target L2 making target L3 making target
Yn (wye/star, grounded) Positive-going zero crossing 120° after lead phase 240° after lead phase
of L1 phase-to-ground
voltage
ΦC is the optimized closing angle for the second phase to close when neutral grounding
reactors are used. The optimal switching angle requires to be shifted to counter the neutral
voltage shift. ΦC is calculated as
180o 3
fC = 90o + .arctan
p 1+
2k
k +1
Where k is the ratio of neutral grounding impedance to phase impedance,
Lneutral
k=
Lphase
Similarly, in case of 3-limb cores for transformers or reactors or a transformer with secondary/
tertiary delta connection, charging of one phase induces voltage in other phases. Making
targets are appropriately modified to optimize the switching angles.

Technical Manual
Whenever a Power transformer is being energized from star grounded side and
at least one of its secondary or tertiary winding is delta connected, the
application should be selected as Coupled transformer.
The above mentioned targets are ideal point-on-wave angles at which load energization
(current inception) should occur. However, for a practical circuit breaker, the primary contacts
close with a certain velocity and thereby reducing the gap between the contacts with time. At
any point of time, if the gap’s dielectric strength is less than the instantaneous voltage
appearing across the contacts, the dielectric breaks down and a pre-strike happens, thereby
energizing the load through an electrical arc. For practical purposes, the rate of decay of
dielectric strength (RDDS) is assumed constant, see Figure 32.
Voltage (V)
MAX. DIELECTRIC
STRENGTH
RDDS
Electrical switching
instant Mechanical contact
touch
T1
TCB Time(t)
Figure 32: Closing of non-ideal circuit breaker

From Figure 32, it is evident that current inception happens before the mechanical contact
touch. Hence, the optimal switching command release as described in section Operation
principle is further delayed by time T1, to occur at tasc, as illustrated in Figure 33.

Technical Manual
Voltage (V)
RDDS Electrical making
System voltage instant
Mechanical contact
Dosi touch
trsc tosc tasc tosi

Time(t)
TCTD TCB T1
TCTD T1 TCB
Figure 33: Actual command release compensating the RDDS of circuit breaker
Further factors that affect the actual command release are the uncertainty (statistical scatter)
in mechanical operating times, RDDS of the circuit breaker, degradation in dielectric strength
and operating characteristics. Modern circuit breakers have been designed for stable
operating times. However, even slight deviations from the optimal energization instant can
result in higher electrical stress, depending on whether the actual switching time is shortened
or elongated. Figure 34 shows this for a capacitive application, where the effect of scatter is
more predominant.
Nominal RDDS
Voltage (V)
D’’osi
D’osi
V’’
V V’
Dosi Time(t)
Figure 34: Mechanical and dielectric scatter of circuit breaker influencing actual current
making instant
Where,
RDDS = RDDS of circuit breaker if there is no scatter
RDDS’ = RDDS of circuit breaker when scatter delays the operation
RDDS” = RDDS of circuit breaker when scatter advances the operation
V = Energization voltage with no scatter

Technical Manual
V’ = Energization voltage when scatter delays the operation
V”= Energization voltage when scatter advances the operation
Dosi = Ideal point on wave of current inception (no scatter)
D’osi = Point-on-wave of current inception when scatter delays the operation
D”osi = Point-on-wave of current inception when scatter advances the operation
From Figure 34, it is evident that, given symmetrical scatter, V” is significantly higher than V’.
Therefore, the target instant of mechanical contact touch is delayed such that current
inception would ideally occur at Dosi, to minimize the highest pre-strike voltage on either side.
This is illustrated in Figure 35. For capacitive loads, the actual switching point is delayed from
optimal switching point.
Nominal RDDS
Voltage (V)
D’’osi
D’osi
V
Dosi Time(t)
Figure 35: Shifting of target angle to compensate the influence of mechanical scatter
Similarly, for inductive loads, the actual switching point is advanced from optimal switching
point so that current inception occurs as close to voltage peak as possible.
Voltage (V)
RDDS Electrical switching

System voltage instant
Mechanical contact
Dasi Dosi touch
trsc tosc tasc tosi

tasi
Time(t)
TCTD TCB T1
TCTD T1
TCB T6
T6
Figure 36: Shifting of mechanical target switching instant to compensate the influence
of mechanical scatter

Technical Manual
The statistical scatter of the mechanical operating times and of the RDDS is considered
specific for each circuit breaker type. Furthermore, certain environmental and operating
conditions like temperature of the drive, control voltage of the operating mechanism, idle time
of the circuit breaker, drive pressure etc. may impact the operating times. For every circuit
breaker type, tests can be conducted to know the dependence of operating times on each of
these parameters, as described in IEC 62271-302. If this information is made available,
compensation of scatter and other influences as defined above can be directly applied. The
amount of correction to be provided is calculated by the ACBMSCBR and CBCOMP function
blocks. ACBMSCBR calculates the correction related to scatter in RDDS, T6. In addition to the
static correction, ACBMSCBR also evaluates the dynamic correction required because of
changes in system voltage and frequency. When information is made available and
compensation is enabled, CBCOMP function evaluates the correction value T2 that is
attributable to environmental parameters like control voltage, drive pressure, drive
temperature etc. Up to two additional compensation characteristics can also be configured by
the user based on the application requirements. SSCPOW takes the information from these
two functions and calculates the overall correction to be applied.
Apart from the factors described above, the circuit breaker making time can vary with time, for
example, because of ageing. ACBMSCBR monitors every operation to identify the amount of
deviation of the actual making instant from the target making instant. A fraction β of the
deviation is compensated for the next operations to ensure that the target converges to the
optimum target instant. This functionality enables adaptive correction independently for both
electrical and mechanical errors. Equation 5 gives the calculation of adaptive correction.
T3 = b elec × (electrical error ) + b mech × (mechanical error )
Where,
βelec = Factor for electrical error compensation
βmech = Factor for mechanical error compensation
electrical error = Difference between target making instant and actual current making instant
mechanical error = Difference between target and actual (estimated) instants of primary
contact touch
For calculating the predicted operating time for the next operation, the new correction value is
added to the predicted operating time of the last operation.
New predicted operating,
Tnew = Told + T3
Applying only electrical or mechanical adaptation will still influence both the
electrical and mechanical targets because of the influence of prestrike
characteristics of the circuit breaker. Setting βelec or βmech as zero ensures that
the corresponding electrical error or mechanical error are not being used for
adaptive correction.
The primary contact’s closing instant is obtained from the timing information of NO (52a) and
NC (52b) auxiliary contacts, when available, based on the contact displacement settings. It is

Technical Manual
sufficient to have only one auxiliary contact information to estimate the primary contact
timing. However, the information is more reliable and accurate if NO (52a) contact information
is available and further more accurate if both the auxiliary contact information is made
available. Calculation of the mechanical operating time is described in Section Mechanical
monitoring.
The overall target release instant for closing is thus calculated as
tasc = trsc + T1 + T2 + T3 + T6 + TCTD

Where,
tasc = Target command release time (output to circuit breaker)
trsc = Random command received time
T1 = Prestrike time
T2 = Compensation for known influences of circuit breaker operating time.
T3 = Adaptive correction as a fraction of previous closing target error
T6 = Scatter angle correction
TCTD = Controller time delay for energizing the selected load type by an ideal breaker.
CBCOMP calculates the compensation T2 of known influences on circuit breaker operating

time and provides the information to SSCPOW function. ACBMSCBR function evaluates the
scatter correction T6, adaptive correction T3, prestrike time T1, and provides the information to
SSCPOW function.
The settings and signals used to define the closing parameters are given in Table 46.
Table 46: Correction and compensation interfaces for close operations

function
INPRICLL1 Input SSCPOW TCB – circuit breaker default mechanical closing time,
INPRICLL2 SSCPOW that is, from command release to primary contact touch,
INPRICLL3 SSCPOW for phase L1 / L2 / L3
INPRICLLX ACBMSCBR
INNOCLLX Input ACBMSCBR Default time from command release to closing of NO
(52a) auxiliary contact for close operation
INNCCLLX Input ACBMSCBR Default time from command release to opening of NC
(52b) auxiliary contact for close operation
RDDSLX Setting ACBMSCBR Nominal Rate of Decay of Dielectric Strength of circuit
breaker, in kV/ms
ScatterMechClLX Setting ACBMSCBR Scatter of mechanical closing time (maximum scatter on
either side of the nominal closing time of circuit breaker)
in ms
ScatRDDSPercLX Setting ACBMSCBR Scatter of RDDS in percent of nominal value
BetaAdjustElec Setting ACBMSCBR Fraction for adaptive correction of electrical target error
BetaAdjustMech Setting ACBMSCBR Fraction for adaptive correction of mechanical target
error

Technical Manual

function
DELTAT1L1 Input SSCPOW T1 – Prestrike time correction
DELTAT1L2 Output ACBMSCBR
DELTAT1L3
DELTAT2L1 Input SSCPOW T2 – compensation for known influences of circuit
DELTAT2L2 Output CBCOMP breaker operating time information
DELTAT2L3
DELTAT3L1 Input SSCPOW T3 – Adaptive correction information
DELTAT3L3
DELTAT6L1 Input SSCPOW T6 – Scatter correction information
DELTAT6L3
CMPLOSIN Input SSCPOW Indication for loss of compensation signal
LOSCOPSG Output CBCOMP
COPSIGLOS Output SSCPOW Indication for loss of compensation signal
T2ALSTS Input ACBMSCBR Alarm from sensors or measured signals used for
ALMSTS Output CBCOMP compensation; see 11.15.7.2 Sensor status. Can be used
for blocking the compensation function to prevent
wrong targeting.
Target selection for opening operations GUID-FEDBC10F-1961-49DA-A15B-BFFA4D97A180 v2

For controlled opening operations, SSCPOW chooses the ideal switching strategy depending
on load and system configuration defined in section Application selection.
The selection of the target phase angles for de-energization (also referred as interrupting
targets) depends on the basic capacitive or reactive nature of the load. Capacitive loads need
to be de-energized such that by the time the current is interrupted at its natural zero, the
circuit breaker contacts have separated sufficiently far for the dielectric strength of the
contact gap to exceed the voltage appearing across it. This switching strategy ensures that
the capacitive load doesn’t restrike.
Figure 37 shows the CB primary contacts opening at time topen. The current continues to flow
till its natural current zero (tint). Restrike can be avoided if the circuit breaker regains its
dielectric strength after current interruption such that it is always greater than the voltage
appearing across it.
For de-energizing capacitive loads, the arcing time (Tarc = tint – topen) is considered such that it
allows the circuit breaker to gain as much dielectric strength as possible by the time of
interruption, subject to the condition that mechanical scatter doesn’t shift topen beyond the
preceding current zero crossing.

Technical Manual
Voltage (V)
Current (A)
topen tint
RRDS locus
Gap strength
Source voltage
Time(t)
Current
Voltage across
circuit breaker
Figure 37: Capacitive load de-energization

Inductive loads, upon interruption of current, create high-frequency Transient Recovery
Voltages (TRV). Similar to the case of de-energization of capacitive loads, the circuit breaker
should have gained sufficient dielectric strength to avoid re-ignitions after current
interruption.
Figure 38: Reactor de-energization

From inductive switching type tests, the re-ignition free window of a circuit breaker can be
deduced for the specific circuit. Re-ignition free window is defined as the range of arcing
times wherein the circuit breaker doesn’t re-ignite. Providing high arcing times can increase
the current chopping thus creating higher TRV. Providing low arcing times can help in reducing
the TRV but the circuit breaker might not gain sufficient dielectric strength. By default,
PWC600 applies a compromise strategy of opening the primary contacts in the middle of the
re-ignition free window defined for the specific circuit breaker model.
In case of a transformer, the charging current is usually so small that a modern circuit-breaker
will extinguish it by chopping within a very short time, usually not exceeding a millisecond.
Table 47 defines the settings specifying the minimum and maximum arcing times required for
reactive loads. The same settings are also used for capacitive loads. For transformer, the
arcing time information is provided by a separate setting.

Technical Manual
Current (A)
topen
Time(t)
min. arcing time
max. arcing time

Figure 39: Re-ignition free window, defined by earliest and latest opening times
(corresponding to maximum and minimum arcing times)
Table 47: Interfaces for controlled opening

function
INPRIOPL1 Input SSCPOW TCB – circuit breaker default mechanical opening time
INPRIOPL2 SSCPOW for phase L1 / L2 / L3
INPRIOPL3 SSCPOW
INPRIOPLX ACBMSCBR
INNOOPLX Input ACBMSCBR Default time from command release to opening of NO
(52a) auxiliary contact for opening operation
INNCOPLX Input ACBMSCBR Default time from command release to closing of NC
(52b) auxiliary contact for opening operation
EarliestOpeningTi Setting ACBMSCBR Maximum arcing time that can be allowed for inductive
me loads. If opening is done before this time from the next
zero crossing, the circuit breaker might have a fast re-
ignition
LatestOpeningTim Setting ACBMSCBR Minimum arcing time that can be allowed for inductive
e loads. If opening is done after this time from the next
zero crossing, the circuit breaker might have a re-
ignition
ArcTimeTrafoLX Setting ACBMSCBR Expected arcing time for de-energizing transformer
loads
Table 48 to Table 51 describe the preset switching strategies for controlled de-energization of
predefined loads. All the switching angles have been described with lead phase as L1,
assuming PhFixSelectClose was set to Fixed L1. If PhFixSelectClose was set to Random, lead
phase will be selected dynamically and the following phases are rotated accordingly.
Table 48: Interrupting targets for capacitor loads (preset strategies), assuming L1 lead phase
Capacitor bank L1 (lead phase) L2 interruption target L3 interruption target
configuration interruption target
Yn (wye/star, grounded) Positive-going zero 120° after lead phase 240° after lead phase
crossing of L1 phase
current
Y (wye/star, Positive-going zero 90° after lead phase
ungrounded) or Δ (delta) crossing of lead phase
current

Technical Manual
Table 49: Target arcing times for de-energization of capacitor banks

System frequency Minimum arcing time Maximum arcing time
50 Hz 4.5 ms 6.5 ms
60 Hz 3.6 ms 5.6 ms
Table 50: Interrupting targets for reactor and coupled reactor loads (preset strategies), assuming L1 lead
phase
Reactor configuration L1 (lead phase) L2 interruption target L3 interruption target
interruption target
Yn (wye/star, grounded) Positive-going zero 120° after lead phase 60° after lead phase
current
Y (wye/star, Positive-going zero 90° after lead phase
ungrounded) or Δ (delta) crossing of lead phase
current
Yn (wye/star) with Positive-going zero 120° after lead phase ΦO after lead phase
neutral grounding crossing of L1 phase
reactor) current
Table 51: Target arcing times for de-energization of shunt reactors, assuming L1 lead phase
Yn (wye/star, grounded) (Tamin + Tamax) / 2 (Tamin + Tamax) / 2 (Tamin + Tamax) / 2
Y (wye/star, (1.5·Tamin + Tamax) / 2 (0.87·Tamin + Tamax) / 2 (0.87·Tamin + Tamax) / 2
ungrounded) or Δ (delta)
Y (wye/star) with neutral ((1+K/4)·Tamin + (Tamin + Tamax) / 2 ((1+K/4)·Tamin +
grounding reactor Tamax) / 2 Tamax) / 2
Where,
Tamin = Minimum arcing time
T amax = Maximum arcing time
Table 52: Interrupting targets for transmission line and cable loads (preset strategies), assuming L1 lead phase
Capacitor bank L1 (lead phase) L2 interruption target L3 interruption target
configuration interruption target
(any) Positive-going zero 120° after lead phase 240° after lead phase
current
Table 53: Target arcing times for de-energization of transmission lines and power cables
System frequency Minimum arcing time Maximum arcing time
50 Hz 4.5 ms 6.5 ms
60 Hz 3.6 ms 5.6 ms
ΦO is the optimized opening angle for the second phase to open when neutral grounding
reactors are used. The optimal switching angle requires to be shifted to counter the neutral
voltage shift. ΦO is calculated as

Technical Manual
180ν 180ν
εO < 120ν ,
ο
≥ tan ,1
3
2k
<
ο
≥ tan ,1 ∋ 3(1 ∗ 2 k ) (
1∗
k ∗1
Where k is the impedance ratio, calculated as per Equation 8.
The above mentioned targets are optimal phase angles at which load de-energization (current
interruption) should occur. However, for a practical circuit breaker, the primary contacts open
with a certain velocity and thereby increasing the gap between the contacts with time. As
explained above, the contacts should be opened such as to interrupt the current at the times
specified in Table 48 to Table 51. SSCPOW function hence considers the arcing times as
specified in Table 47to release the commands as shown in Equation 9.
tasc = trsc + Tarc + T2 - TCTD
Where,
tasc = Target command release time (output to circuit breaker)
trsc = Random command received time
Tarc = The arcing time to be considered for a certain load. For transformers it is equal to the
ArcTimeTrafo setting. For all other loads the arcing time will be as mentioned above in Table
49 through Table 53.
T2 = Compensation for known influences of circuit breaker operating time information
TCTD = Controller time delay for achieving contact separation of an ideal breaker at the target
interruption instant
As current will usually flow until a natural zero during CB opening, it is not possible to deduce
the actual instant of primary contact separation from the primary voltage and current signals.
Thus, no direct adaptive correction can be performed. However, if any re-strike/re-ignition is
detected by ACBMSCBR, SSCPOW increases the target arcing time by 1ms for every detection.
The user can limit this arcing time extension by specifying how much correction is allowed, in
the MaxReStrikeCorr setting. Hence the actual target interruption instant is defined as given in
Equation 10.
tasc = trsc + Tarc + T2 - TCTD + T7

Where T7 is the cumulated arcing time extension.
CBCOMP calculates the compensation for known influences of circuit breaker operating time
and ACBMSCBR function evaluates arcing time and arcing time extension correction. Both
functions provide their information to SSCPOW function.
Various settings and inputs used to define the opening parameters are given in Table 54.

Technical Manual
Table 54: Correction and compensation interfaces for controlled opening operations
function
INPRIOPL1 Input SSCPOW TCB - Circuit breaker ideal mechanical opening time,
INPRIOPL2 Input ACBMSCBR that is, from command release to primary contact
INPRIOPL3 separation, for phase L1 / L2 / L3
DELTAT1L1 Input SSCPOW Tarc – arcing time correction information (same
DELTAT1L2 Output ACBMSCBR interface as used for closing operations)
DELTAT1L3
DELTAT2L1 Input SSCPOW T2 – compensation for known influences of circuit
DELTAT2L2 Output CBCOMP breaker operating time information (same interface
DELTAT2L3 as used for closing operations)
DELTAT7L1 Input SSCPOW T7 – arcing time extension correction information
DELTAT7L3
MaxReStrikeCorr Setting ACBMSCBR Maximum restrike correction allowed, in
milliseconds
7.2.2.2 CB timing test (learning) mode GUID-AFF33553-179B-4979-A894-1BBAC51168B7 v1
In CB learning mode, the CBLEARN function evaluates and learns the timing of the circuit
breaker primary and (if connected) auxiliary contacts. The commands to the three phases are
delayed by setting TimeOutAlarmDelay, to allow every pole to complete its operation before
operating the next pole. CBLEARN sends requests to SSCPOW to operate a specific CB pole.
(Generally, L1 pole is operated first followed by L2 and L3 poles). SSCPOW upon receiving this
request, releases the command to the circuit breaker pole. CBLEARN function receives the
command and feedback information to evaluate the contact timing information.
The contact timing information evaluated by the CBLEARN is communicated to functions

ACBMSCBR and SCCPOW for switching and monitoring purpose.
The intefaces in SSCPOW and ACBMSCBR related to CBLEARN functionality are:
Table 55: CBLEARN interfaces in SSCPOW and ACBMSCBR

Interface Type Available in function Description
INNOOPLX Input ACBMSCBR Time to operate NO contact for phase LX open
operation (from CBLEARN)
INNCOPLX Input ACBMSCBR Time to operate NC contact for phase LX open
INPRIOPLX Input ACBMSCBR Time to operate main contact for phase LX open
INNOCLLX Input ACBMSCBR Time to operate NO contact for phase LX close
INNCCLLX Input ACBMSCBR Time to operate NC contact for phase LX close
INPRICLLX Input ACBMSCBR Time to operate main contact for phase LX close
INPRIOPL1 Input SSCPOW Time to operate main contact for phaseL1 open
operation
operation
operation

Technical Manual

INPRICLL1 Input SSCPOW Time to operate main contact for phaseL1 close
operation
operation
operation
During the learning mode, SSCPOW and ACBMSCBR do not perform normal monitoring and
controlling operations.
SSCPOW identifies the CB learning mode when its CBTSMODE input is active and it receives
the request to operate from CRDBLSSX input interface.
7.2.3 Monitoring GUID-AA55ADCF-C4E2-4D51-A079-B6E54C7D885D v1
Monitoring is an important aspect of controlled switching for two reasons.
1. It provides the information about the degree of success of each operation performed.
2. It allows adjusting the targets for subsequent operations, to optimize controlled
switching performance.
Operations monitoring is performed for both mechanical and electrical parameters. Various
information and alarms are generated depending upon the monitored parameters, as
described in the sections "Electrical monitoring" and "Mechanical monitoring".
7.2.3.1 Electrical monitoring GUID-DA62E815-2587-40C8-86CB-3A61BDC30190 v2
Electrical monitoring of circuit breaker operations can be performed depending upon the load
connected and available feedback signals. Figure 27 and Figure 28 show the options for
electrical feedback that can be used. Electrical monitoring is performed for identifying the
prestrike angles (current inception), arcing times (current interruption), electrical operating
times, electrical status, circuit breaker interrupter wear, target deviation for performing
adaptive correction, etc.
Table 56 lists the function block interfaces that determine the function of basic electrical
monitoring.
Table 56: Function block interfaces for electrical monitoring

I3P Input ACBMSCBR Feedback current instantaneous sample
inputs for three phases
U3PL Input ACBMSCBR Feedback load voltage instantaneous
sample inputs for three phases
LoadRef Setting ACBMSCBR Selection of feedback signal for
electrical monitoring. Should be set
based on the connected signal. There
are two options:
• Load current (all 3 phases)

• Load voltage (must be phase-to-
ground voltage in all 3 phases)

Technical Manual

IDead Setting ACBMSCBR Dead current setting to determine if the
feedback current signal is healthy or
dead noise samples. It is represented as
percentage of global base current.
UDead Setting ACBMSCBR Dead voltage setting to determine if
the feedback voltage signal is healthy
or dead noise samples. It is represented
as percentage of global base voltage.
NumOfHalfCycle Setting ACBMSCBR The setting defines the number of half
cycle time of the reference signal to be
averaged . The averaged half cycle time
is used for further calculations.
GlobalBaseSel Setting ACBMSCBR The setting defines the global base
group to be used for monitoring
purpose. The base voltage, current
defined under this group is used to
determine the absolute value of IDead
and UDead.
Example: If Idead is 20% of global base
current value, the absolute value of
Idead is 0.2*Global Base current value.
Table 57 and Table 58 lists the features that can be monitored based on the available feedback
for different load types.
Table 57: Electrical monitoring information

Information Description
Current Identification of instant at which current inception has occurred during CB closing
inception operation. This includes evaluating the point-on-wave phase angle with respect to the
reference signal.
Current inception instant is defined as the instant at which the selected monitoring
feedback signal exceeds a fixed percentage of the corresponding base value.
Current Identification of instant at which the load current was finally interrupted during CB
interruption opening operation.
Current interruption instant is defined as the instant at which the selected monitoring
feedback signal finally drops below a fixed percentage of the corresponding base value.
Arcing time Arcing time is the time between mechanical opening instant and current interruption
instant.
The mechanical opening instant is obtained directly by adding the mechanical operating
time value, received from CBLEARN, to the received trip output command timestamp from
SSCPOW.
As the mechanical opening time is directly received as input from CBLEARN function, the
arcing time calculation is independent of the auxiliary contacts availability.
Electrical status Assumption of the circuit breaker status (open/closed), based on presence or absence of
the selected feedback signal: If the RMS value is greater than IDead x IBase or UDead x
UBase, respectively, the circuit breaker is declared electrically closed, otherwise electrically
open.
Electrical Defined as the time from command release to the instant of current inception (for closing
operating time operation) or current interruption (for opening operation).
Re-strike/re- Re-strike or re-ignition is declared if re-occurrence of the selected electrical signal is
ignition detected after initial interruption. See explanation below.
Interrupter wear Cumulated wear (contact ablation, nozzle erosion) of the circuit breaker interrupter, based
on interrupted current. See detailed description below.
For reliable electrical monitoring from primary current signals, the secondary
current through the PWC600 analog inputs should be greater than 50 mA.

Technical Manual
Table 58: suitability of electrical monitoring information based on connected physical load
Information Current feedback Load voltage feedback
Transformer Transmission ”Fixed” loads Transformer Transmission ”Fixed” loads
line / Cable (Capacitor line / Cable (Capacitor
and Reactor) and Reactor)
Current No Yes* Yes Yes Yes Yes
inception
Current No Yes* Yes Yes Yes Yes
interruption,
arcing time
Electrical No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
status
Electrical No Yes* Yes Yes Yes Yes
operating
time
Re-strike/re- No Yes* Yes Yes Yes Yes
ignition
Interrupter No Yes* Yes No No No
wear
* For transmission line or power cable, electrical monitoring can be performed only if the charging current
RMS is significant that is, greater than the dead current value setting (IDead x IBase) in ACBMSCBR function.
In PWC600 1.0.1.2 and earlier, first 5 operation cycles will be monitored to ascertain if the current is significant
and steady to be used for monitoring purposes. If the current is not steady, current signal is not used for
electrical monitoring even if it is greater than the dead current setting. (Current is evaluated as steady only if
the RMS values after 5 cycles post inception, or just prior to interruption, have been constant within ±10% for
5 consecutive initial operations. This evaluation is restarted whenever one of the SSCPOW settings defining
the load application is changed). This “load learning” is not performed in PWC600 1.0.1.3 and it is the user’s
responsibility to select the appropriate load feedback signal.
When the command is received, ACBMSCBR evaluates the target and predicts the electrical
operating time, prestrike angle, and arcing time information as appropriate for closing or
opening operations, and forwards them to the MONCOMP function block. The same is
performed for the actual values acquired during the operation. After completing the
monitoring, MONCOMP calculates the error information and consolidates data for logging.
Different outputs that provide the predicted, monitored and error information is described in
Table 59.
Table 59: Monitored electrical parameters

function
PELORTMX Output MONCOMP Predicted electrical operating time (Open or Close) for
the respective phase (L1, L2, or L3)
AELORTMX Output MONCOMP Actual electrical operating time (Open or Close)
ERELORTX Output MONCOMP Error of actual value from predicted value of electrical
operating time (Open or Close)
ERELOTOX Output MONCOMP Error of actual value from predicted value of electrical
operating time (Open)
ERELOTCX Output MONCOMP Error of actual value from predicted value of electrical
operating time (Close)
PPRESTRAX Output MONCOMP Predicted prestrike angle
APRESTRAX Output MONCOMP Actual prestrike angle
ERPSAX Output MONCOMP Error of actual value from predicted value of prestrike
angle
PARCTMX Output MONCOMP Predicted arcing time

Technical Manual

function
AARCTMX Output MONCOMP Actual arcing time
ERARGTIMX Output MONCOMP Error of actual value from predicted value of arcing time
SWALX Output ACBMSCBR Steady-state RMS current before last open operation
LOOPPILX Output ACBMSCBR Peak current interrupted during last open operation
Figure 40 and Figure 41 shows a graphical representation of the electrical operation

information for closing and opening operations, respectively.
APRESTRAX
Voltage (V)
Time(t)
Current inception
Current (A)
Command time
instant
Time(t)
CMDCLOSE AELORTMX
Figure 40: Electrical monitoring information for close operation

Technical Manual
Current (A)
Contact separation
Command time
Arc extinction
instant
instant
Time(t)
CMDOPEN
AARCTMX
AELORTMX
Figure 41: Electrical operating information for open operation

For every operation, ACBMSCBR function monitors the operation parameters, forwards the
data to operation log through MONCOMP, and provides the electrical target correction to
SSCPOW. For opening operations, perform the additional calculations to detect the presence
of any re-strikes/re-ignitions and provide correction of target arcing time (if configured).
Re-strike/Re-ignition detection GUID-E8200784-01DB-4236-9323-FA6C5DEC42F7 v1

Figure 42 shows a typical representation of re-strike/re-ignition during CB opening.

Technical Manual
Tna
Current (A)
Tarc Trs
tcs
Time(t)
Figure 42: Re-strike/Re-ignition detection

Following the opening command, the primary contacts separate at instant tcs. Instantaneously
an electrical arc is drawn, which keeps the current flowing in the circuit until interruption
(usually near natural current zero). The time from contact separation until initial current
interruption is called arcing duration or arcing time, Tarc. If the following current interruption
and the dielectric strength of the circuit breaker does not exceed the recovery voltage across
its terminals, the arc will re-ignite. This breakdown will make the circuit conducting again and
current will flow till the next natural zero crossing. Trs(for single re-strike), Trs1....Trsn(for
multiple re-strike) is the duration for which the current flows due to the re-strike/re-ignition.
Tna is the no-arc duration between initial interruption and re-strike/re-ignition. Equation 11
defines the monitored arcing time at successful first interruption. Equation 12 defines the
monitored arcing time when (single or multiple) re-strike/re-ignition was detected.
AARCTMX = Tarc
IEC17000261 V1 EN-US (Equation 11)
AARCTMX = Tarc + Trs = Tarc + Trs1 + Trs2 ... .. ...Trsn

To detect the occurrence of re-strike/re-ignition, use the either or both of these conditions:
1. (AARCTMX – PARCTMX) > 1/2 cycle

2. Trs > 0 and Tna ≥ 1/8 cycle
Checking for re-strikes/re-ignitions are performed for 550 milliseconds from reception of the
incoming open command.
The settings and interfaces that are related to re-strikes/re-ignitions are listed in Table 60.

Technical Manual
Table 60: Re-strike/Re-ignition detection interfaces

function
RTKCTLX Output ACBMSCBR Total number of operations with re-strikes/re-
RTKCTX Input MONCOMP ignitions.
RTKCTOX Output MONCOMP Total number of operations with re-strikes/re-
ignitions, for logging in operation log.
RSTRDETLX Output ACBMSCBR Indication for re-strike/re-ignition detected in the last
controlled opening operation.
MaxRkRiAlm Setting ACBMSCBR Disables/enables both the restrike/re-ignition
detection and also the restrike/re-ignition count alarm.
MAXRALOLX Output ACBMSCBR Indication for limit of re-ignition/re-strike count
reached.
Note: Limit supervision is done in MONALM and the
range information returned to ACBMSCBR at its
ALMS... inputs.
MAXRCALLX Output ACBMSCBR Indication that the value for adaptive re-ignition /re-
strike correction has reached its maximum value
MaxReStrikeCorr.
MaxReStrikeCorr Setting ACBMSCBR Limit of adaptive correction of target arcing time,
based on detection of re-strikes/re-ignitions.
MaxReStrCorrAlm Setting ACBMSCBR Enable or disable MAXRCALLX alarm indication.
Resetting of Re-strike/Re-ignition detection GUID-441CC8B3-3FE2-43DF-9BE9-96CE1A0DE688 v1

When re-strikes/re-ignitions are detected and the limit for correction has been reached, an
alarm(MAXRCALLX) is generated. Subsequent controlled opening operations will use the
maximum correction value and no more correction is allowed. If further re-strikes/re-ignitions
are detected, it is advised to either review the settings or check the circuit breaker.
When the circuit breaker has been attended (example: overhauled, or

interrupter replaced, or insulating gas replaced), it is advised to review the
settings, considering that the maximum allowed restrike correction is already
being applied.
Resetting the maximum restrike correction modifies the allowable arcing time
of the breaker during the open operation.
To modify the settings, either increase the arcing time or the maximum allowed corrections. In
both cases, noted that if the maximum restrike correction is reset, the correction applied
comes back to zero. It is suggested to change the settings accordingly, preferably in the IED
through LHMI/WHMI or in PST.
Interrupter wear GUID-19E91A3A-0F01-4EAF-9837-5F5BAE7683E4 v1

In new condition, a circuit breaker is rated for a certain number of mechanical operations, that
is, no interrupting or very low currents. It is also rated for a certain (low) number of operations
interrupting maximum fault current. In between these extremes, the interrupted current in
every Open operation will cause some erosion of the contacts and/or ablation of the nozzles,
until CB has lost its ability to reliably switch off current. This interrupter wear characteristic is
often generated in the form of a curve such as Figure 43.

Technical Manual
10000
Number of switching operations
1000
100
10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Interrupted current (kA)
IntTh1 IntTh2
Figure 43: Example of interrupter wear characteristic of a circuit breaker rated for 10000
mechanical operations (interrupting currents up to 3000 A) or 20
interruptions of 63 kA fault current
ACBMSCBR calculates interrupter wear as the equivalent number of mechanical operations
that the circuit breaker has lost after interrupting a specific current. The algorithm for
calculation of interrupter wear works in several steps. For every CB open operation,
1. The samples xi of interrupted current are numerically integrated to yield a value Y,
å
k n
x
Y= i =1 i
k
where n is the breaker type specific exponent (setting CumCurrPower, default value n = 2)
and k is the total number of arcing current samples. Summation starts at the estimated
instant of contact separation and ends at the time of final current interruption (including
additional periods of current flow due to re-ignition or re-strike).
2. The nth root of integrated current Y is categorized against two threshold values,
MinCurrentLimit and OvercurrentLimit x IBase. MinCurrentLimit is defined as the
minimum current interrupted up to which the wear of contacts can be approximated to
one mechanical operation. OvercurrentLimit x IBase is defined as the maximum current
above which the wear of contacts can be approximated to saturated level of mechanical
operations lost. For more information, see Figure 43 .
3. Depending on the category, interrupter wear for the operation is calculated as follows:

Technical Manual
n
Y < MinCurrentLimit ® Wear = 1
MinCurrentLimit ′ n Y ′ OvercurrentLimit ≥ IBase

⇑ Wear < C0 ∗ C1 √ Y p1 ∗ C2 √ Y p2 ∗ C3 √ Y p3 ∗ C4 √ Y p4
n
Y = OvercurrentLimit ≥ IBase ↑ Wear < AblatCalShEst
All threshold values, coefficients (Cz, Pz, corresponding to settings AblationCoeffz, and
PowerCoeffz, where suffix z represents the co-efficient number), and saturation value
(AblatCalShEst ) are specific to a CB type. Where available, they are provided in the circuit
breaker library.
4. Finally, the individual Wear values from all operations are added up into a cumulated wear
value.
5. If cumulated interrupter wear exceeds the set thresholds AblationWarnLevel or
AblationAlarmLevel, a warning or alarm will be raised.
Coefficients AblationCoeffz and PowerCoeffz are determined based on the circuit breaker’s
loading dependency on interrupted current. Standard curve fitting methods can be used to
determine the coefficients such that at any given interrupted current value in the
characteristics, the wear per operation is evaluated according to above equations.
For example, according to Figure 43, using a standard curve fitting method, the coefficients
and thresholds can be approximated as
AblationCoeff0 = C0 = 0
AblationCoeff1 = C1 = 0.10085
AblationCoeff2 = C2 = -0.07959
AblationCoeff3 = C3 = -1.44630
AblationCoeff4 = C4 = 0.15915
PowerCoeff1 = P1 = 1.02393
PowerCoeff3 = P3 = -0.78450
MinCurrentLimit = 3 kA
OvercurrentLimit · IBase = 63 kA
AblatCalShEst = 1000
Using curve fitting methods, various solutions are possible. Selection of

coefficients should be such that error in approximation is minimum at the most
likely interrupted currents. It is recommended to contact ABB for obtaining the
optimal coefficients for any circuit breaker type that is not included in the CB
library of SST.

Technical Manual
Contact wear calculation is done by the function ACBMSCBR when current is used as electrical
feedback. Relevant interfaces are described in Table 61.
Table 61: Contact wear interfaces

function
Ablation Setting ACBMSCBR Enables or disables contact wear calculation if
current is used as feedback signal
PowerCoeff1 Setting ACBMSCBR Power coefficient 1 for calculating interrupter wear in
the intermediate range
PowerCoeff2 Setting ACBMSCBR Power coefficient 2
AblationCoeff0 Setting ACBMSCBR Ablation coefficient for calculating interrupter wear
in the intermediate range
AblationCoeff1 Setting ACBMSCBR Ablation coefficient 1
MinCurrentLimit Setting ACBMSCBR Defines the lower level of integrated current, below
which for each opening operation the contact wear
value is considered equivalent to one mechanical
operation.
OvercurrentLimit Setting ACBMSCBR Defines the upper level of integrated current, above
which for each opening operation the contact wear
value is considered equivalent to the saturated value
defined by AblatCalShEst setting.
The value is entered in percent of IBase. Hence, care
must be taken to adjust OvercurrentLimit whenever
IBase is changed.
AblatCalShEst Setting ACBMSCBR Saturated loss of mechanical operations when
current interrupted is above OvercurrentLimit
setting.
InitialCumAblLX Setting ACBMSCBR Initial value of cumulated interrupter wear when the
CB wear is cleared through LHMI/WHMI.
CumCurrPower Setting ACBMSCBR Current exponent setting for integrating the
interrupted current.
LOOPABLLX Output ACBMSCBR Interrupter wear value calculated for the last opening
operation.
AblationWarnLevel Setting ACBMSCBR Warning threshold limit for interrupter wear. If the
cumulated wear exceeds the limit, a warning is
raised.
AblationAlarmLevel Setting ACBMSCBR Alarm threshold limit for interrupter wear. If the
cumulated wear exceeds the limit, an alarm is raised.
AblationAlm Setting ACBMSCBR Setting to enable/disable ALABLLX output.
WRABLLX Output ACBMSCBR Activated when the cumulated interrupter wear is
between AblationWarnLevel and AblationAlarmLevel.
ALABLLX Output ACBMSCBR Activated when the cumulated interrupter wear
exceeds AblationAlarmLevel.
Overcurrent (Fault current) detection GUID-D095AF24-4F47-4441-B64A-C0C7F6DFF1E7 v1

ACBMSCBR can be configured to indicate if the RMS current through the circuit breaker is
higher than a set value. This functionality is always active, not just during switching

Technical Manual
operations. It can be useful to identify conditions where controlled switching was not
performed in steady-state situations.
The interfaces for fault detection are listed in Table 62. There is no setting for disabling the
fault current indication output.
Table 62: Fault detection interfaces

FaultCurrentPercent Setting ACBMSCBR Threshold for instantaneous current
magnitude (in percent of IBase) above
which an alarm will be raised
FLTDETLX Output ACBMSCBR Activated when the current magnitude
exceeds FaultCurrentPercent x IBase
The function always monitors within a moving observation window of one power cycle. If the
instantaneous current magnitude is greater than FaultCurrentPercent x IBase, the current is
declared to be fault current. The function will not consider the instantaneous spikes or noise
for fault current detection.
7.2.3.2 Mechanical monitoring GUID-6701B89F-553F-4830-809D-388E062355F4 v2
Mechanical monitoring of the circuit breaker is based on timing information of the NO (52a)
and NC (52b) auxiliary contacts in the drive. Depending upon the connected inputs, the
ACBMSCBR function monitors different mechanical information in normal operation (that is,
not in CB learning mode), see Table 63 for more information.
NO (52a) is the auxiliary contact that follows the state of the circuit breaker. By definition, it is
closed when the primary contact is fully conducting. A contact of this type is normally used to
interrupt the trip coil current.
NC (52b) is the auxiliary contact that follows the inverse state of the circuit breaker. By
definition, it is closed when the primary contacts are electrically isolated. A contact of this type
is normally used to interrupt the close coil current.
For practical monitoring purposes, the auxiliary contacts’ status is acquired by precision
binary inputs on the PIO hardware module.
To assure accurate contact opening instant detection in case of long cables

between CB drive and the PWC600 IED, discharge resistors should be
connected to each IED input terminal to quickly discharge the cable
capacitance. Recommended ratings are given in the User manual.
Table 63: Circuit breaker auxiliary contact information

AuxPosAvailable Setting ACBMSCBR Specifies which of the NO (52a) and NC
(52b) auxiliary contacts are connected to the
function
INPNOLX Input ACBMSCBR NO (52a) status signal from CB phase LX
INPNCLX Input ACBMSCBR NC (52b) status signal from CB phase LX
TotalDispLX Setting ACBMSCBR Total mechanical contact displacement (in
mm) between fully open and fully closed
positions, for phase LX

Technical Manual

PriDispLX Setting ACBMSCBR Primary contact’s change-over point
displacement (in mm) from fully open
position for phase LX
NODispLX Setting ACBMSCBR NO contact’s change-over point
NCDispLX Setting ACBMSCBR NC contact’s change-over point
Use the mechanical monitoring to identify mechanical problems in the circuit breaker and
manage the maintenance schedule. Different information that can be evaluated based on
auxiliary contact timing is tabulated in Table 64 to Table 66. See also Figure 44 and Figure 45
for more information.
Table 64: Mechanical monitoring information

Information Description
Initial mechanical Time taken by the circuit breaker’s operating mechanism to start moving. This is
delay measured as the time from command release till opening of the appropriate auxiliary
contact (NC for closing, NO for opening).
Moving time Time taken by the circuit breaker’s primary contact to move from closed to open or
from open to closed position. This is measured as the time from opening of the first
auxiliary contact to closing of the second auxiliary contact.
Linear contact Average speed at which the primary contacts move. Calculated as displacement
velocity between auxiliary contacts’ changeover points divided by Moving time.
Mechanical operating Time from command release to estimated primary contact touch / separation.
time
Unstable operation If the circuit breaker’s mechanical operating time is varying consistently by more
detected than 10% for two consecutive closing, opening, or closing & opening operations, the
circuit breaker is declared as unstable. See below explanation.
See Table 65 for availability of features.
Supervision of the mechanical monitoring information is done by the MONALM

function block. Use SST for calculating the monitoring thresholds from the
actual operation times entered for the circuit breaker.
Table 65: Mechanical monitoring for closing (C) and opening (O) operations, depending on auxiliary contacts
connected to the IED
Auxiliary contacts Initial Moving time Linear contact Mechanical Unstable
mechanical velocity operating time operation times
delay
NO NC C O C O C O C O C O
No No - - - - - - - - - -
No Yes X - - - - - - X - -
Yes No - X - - - - X - - -
Yes Yes X X X X X X X X X X

Technical Manual
Only items marked with X are evaluated.
When a command is received, ACBMSCBR evaluates the target and predicts mechanical
operating time information. ACBMSCBR evaluates both the actual and predicted mechanical
parameters and communicates the information to the MONCOMP. MONCOMP evaluates the
mechanical error information as described in Table 66. The error information, actual and
predicted mechanical parameters are available as an output of the MONCOMP. The
information will be available at MONCOMP function outputs till the next operation is
performed.
Table 66: Mechanical monitoring output interfaces

PMCORTMX Output MONCOMP Predicted mechanical operating time
(Open or Close) for phase LX.
The predicted mechanical operating time
is calculated as the summation of breaker
main contact operating time (recieved
from CBLEARN) and external
compensation (received from CBCOMP).
AMCORTMX Output MONCOMP Actual mechanical operating time (Open
or Close) for phase LX.
ERMCORTX Output MONCOMP Error of actual value from predicted value
of mechanical operating time (Open or
Close) for phase LX.
ERMCOTOX Output MONCOMP Error of actual value from predicted value
of mechanical operating time (Open) for
phase LX.
ERMCOTCX Output MONCOMP Error of actual value from predicted value
of mechanical operating time (Close) for
phase LX.
OPTOPNOLX Output ACBMSCBR Actual mechanical operating time (Open)
AMCOTMOX MONCOMP for phase LX.
The actual mechanical operating time is
calculated as the time difference between
the received trip command instant and
breaker main contact separation instant.
The breaker main contact separation
instant is calculated considering the
changeover instants of the auxiliary
contacts(if available), refer Equation 20,
21 and 22.
In case of unavailability of any of the
auxiliary contacts, the mechanical
operating time is not evaluated.
OPTCLSOLX Output ACBMSCBR Actual mechanical operating time (Close)
AMCOTMCX MONCOMP for phase LX.
The actual mechanical operating time is
the received close command instant and
breaker main contact touching instant.
The breaker main contact touching
instant is calculated considering the
changeover instants of the auxiliary
contacts(if available), refer Equation 17,
18 and 19.
auxiliary contacts, the mechanical
operating time is not evaluated.
AIMCDX Output MONCOMP Actual initial mechanical movement delay
(Open or Close) for phase LX.

Technical Manual

RCTTOPOLX Output ACBMSCBR Actual initial mechanical delay (Open) for
AIMCDOX MONCOMP phase LX.
The actual initial mechanical delay is
the trip command and NO contact
changeover instant.
This output is only available if NO signal is
available to the function.
RCTTCLOLX Output ACBMSCBR Actual initial mechanical delay (Close) for
AIMCDCX MONCOMP phase LX.
The actual initial mechanical delay is
the close command and NC contact
changeover instant.
This output is only available if NC signal is
available to the function.
AMCMVX Output MONCOMP Actual mechanical moving time (Open or
Close) for phase LX.
AUXSWTOLX Output ACBMSCBR Actual mechanical moving time (Open) for
AMCMVOX MONCOMP phase LX.
The actual mechanical moving time is
the auxiliary contacts (NO and NC)
changeover instants.
This output is only available if both NO
and NC signals are available to the
function.
AUXSWTCLX Output ACBMSCBR Actual mechanical moving time (Close)
AMCMVCX MONCOMP for phase LX.
The actual mechanical moving time is
the auxiliary contacts (NC and NO)
changeover instants.
This output is only available if both NO
and NC signals are available to the
function.
ACVX Output MONCOMP Actual linear contact velocity for phase
LX.
OPSPOPOLX Output ACBMSCBR Actual linear contact velocity (Open) for
ACVOX MONCOMP phase LX.
The actual linear contact velocity is
calculated by dividing the distance
between the auxiliary contacts (NODispLx
– NCDispLx) to the time difference
between the auxiliary contact changeover
instants.
auxiliary contacts, the contact velocity is
not evaluated.
OPSPCLOLX Output ACBMSCBR Actual linear contact velocity (Close) for
ACVCX MONCOMP phase LX.
The actual linear contact velocity is
calculated by dividing the distance
between the auxiliary contacts (NODispLx
– NCDispLx) to the time difference
between the auxiliary contact changeover
instants.
auxiliary contacts, the contact velocity is
not evaluated.
Based on available auxiliary contacts feedback, ACBMSCBR calculates the mechanical

operating times as follows.

Technical Manual
Close operation
• If both NO and NC auxiliary contacts are available:
 TNO  TNC 
OPTCLSOLX  TNC    INPRICLLX  INNCCLLX  .
 INNOCLLX  INNCCLLX 
 
• If only NO auxiliary contact is available:
OPTCLSOLX  TNO   INPRICLLX  INNOCLLX 

• If only NC auxiliary contact is available:
OPTCLSOLX  TNC   INPRICLLX  INNCCLLX 

Open Operation
• If both NO and NC auxiliary contacts are available:
 TNO  TNC 
OPTOPNOLX  TNO    INPRIOPLX  INNOOPLX  . 
 INNCOPLX  INNOOPLX
 

• If only NO auxiliary contact is available:
OPTOPNOLX  TNO   INPRIOPLX  INNOOPLX 

• If only NC auxiliary contact is available:
OPTOPNOLX  TNC   INPRIOPLX  INNCOPLX 
Where,
• OPTCLSOLX = calculated mechanical closing time (from CB operation command to

primary contact touch)
• OPTOPNOLX = calculated mechanical opening time (from CB operation command to
primary contact separation)
• TNc = actual time from CB operation command to changeover of NC auxiliary contact
• TNO = actual time from CB operation command to changeover of NO auxiliary contact
• INPRICLLX = nominal time from CB closing command to primary contact touch
• INPRIOPLX = nominal time from CB opening command to primary contact separation
• INNCCLLX = nominal time from CB closing command to NC auxiliary contact opening
• INNOCLLX = nominal time from CB closing command to NO auxiliary contact closing
• INNCOPLX = nominal time from CB opening command to NC auxiliary contact closing
• INNOOPLX = nominal time from CB opening command to NO auxiliary contact opening
The nominal times are read from CBLEARN.

Technical Manual
Figure 44 and Figure 45 shows a graphical representation of initial mechanical delay, moving
time, and mechanical operating time and travel curve for a closing and opening operation,
respectively.
Current (A)
Time(t)
CLCMDLx
NC(52b)
AIMCDCX
AMCMVCX
NO(52a)
Travel curve
Current inception
NO changeover
NC changeover
Command time
instant
instant
instant
Figure 44: Mechanical monitored information for close operation

Technical Manual
Current (A)
Time(t)
OPCMDLx
NO(52a)
AIMCDOX
AMCMVOX
NC(52b)
Travel curve
separation instant
NO changeover
Primary contact
NC changeover
Command time
instant
instant
Figure 45: Mechanical monitored information for open operation

Based on the monitored information, ACBMSCBR function tracks the deviation of mechanical
operating times between consecutive operations of the same type (Close or Open). If the
difference is higher than 10% twice in a row, a CB Unstable alarm will be raised on the
UNSTOPOLX output.

Technical Manual
If such a deviation is identified, the function declares the circuit breaker as unstable and stops
SSCPOW from issuing further controlled switching commands. All subsequent operations
follow the ContingencyMode setting (that is, they are either bypassed or blocked). Controlled
switching will be allowed only after Unstable mode is reset. Table 67 lists the alarm output and
its enabling setting.
Table 67: Circuit breaker unstable mode interfaces

function
UNSTOPOLX Output ACBMSCBR Circuit breaker unstable alarm indication
UnstOpChrAlm Setting ACBMSCBR Enables or disables circuit breaker unstable alarm
indication
Disabling the ‘Circuit breaker unstable’ alarm only prevents the output
UNSTOPOLX from going high. This will neither prevent the functions from
entering the unstable mode nor will it exit from unstable mode. Once the cause
has been resolved, unstable mode must be cleared in the LHMI under Clear/
Clear CB indicators/Clear unstable mode, for each affected CB pole
individually. The same clearing procedure should be followed after changing
the active (that is, set or learned values) mechanical operating times.
7.2.3.3 Combined monitoring GUID-E62BD628-E0A7-4A01-877E-9E7C3F9D0999 v1
Some of the circuit breaker operation characteristics are evaluated based on both electrical
and mechanical monitoring. For example, if auxiliary contacts are not connected to the IED, the
status Open/Closed) of the circuit breaker can be determined from load current. This electrical
status can be used as equivalent mechanical status for compensation and other calculation
and detections.
Status monitoring GUID-EED6B1B1-E51F-4F3B-8902-E3A42908F1FE v1

As described above, the status of the circuit breaker can be determined based on mechanical
and electrical inputs. A circuit breaker can be detected to be electrically closed if the RMS
current flowing through the circuit is above IDead x IBase. However, this is done only when the
load type is set as capacitor, reactor or coupled reactor. For other preset load types
(transformer, line/cable) the load current may vary and hence this method is not applied. If
user-defined load type is selected, based on the first 10 operations, load monitoring algorithm
evaluates whether the load will draw a fixed current or variable current. During that time, no
electrical status detection is done. The evaluation is restarted when one of the settings
defining the load in SSCPOW (LoadType, Grounding) is changed.
The load monitoring algorithm computes and evaluates the RMS value of current for 550 ms,
and if the average RMS calculated with in this time is equal, then the load will be evaluated as
fixed load. If the calculated current RMS average is not equal, the load will be evaluated as
variable load. The same procedure will be repeated for 10 successive operations (5 Close
operations and 5 Open operations).
Once the load is identified as fixed, either by setting or by learning for user defined loads,
ACBMSCBR uses the electrically detected status to internally evaluate the circuit breaker
status and to update output interfaces CBSTNOLX and CBSTNCLX, which are equivalent NO
(52a) and NC (52b) of the circuit breaker. The interfaces used for this functionality are listed in
Table 68.
If the mechanical status and electrical status contradict each other, that is, if the current
flowing, mechanical status is Open, the CB position is indicated as intermediate (“CBInter”
mode) and the status indication interfaces in Table 67 reflect the positions of the auxiliary
contacts.

Technical Manual
The inputs and outputs signifying the breaker status are:
Table 68: Status monitoring interfaces

function
CBSTNOLX Output ACBMSCBR The circuit breaker’s equivalent NO (52a) status
based on electrical and mechanical monitoring.
CBSTNCLX Output ACBMSCBR The circuit breaker’s equivalent NC (52b) status
based on electrical and mechanical monitoring.
CntrlPosAlm Setting ACBMSCBR Enable or disable the indication for contradictory
position between electrical and mechanical status.
CBSTSCFLX Output ACBMSCBR Consolidated circuit breaker position, may take the
following values:
• 0 =Cbinter- electrical status conflicts with

mechanical status, provided both electrical and
mechanical status are evaluated as valid
• 1 = Open- valid Open status indication from all
available and valid status indications (electrical
and/or mechanical)
• 2 =Closed- valid Closed status indication from
all available and valid status indications
(electrical and/or mechanical)
• 4/5/6 = N/A Not applicable mode (current
cannot be used for status monitoring)
CBSTSLX Output ACBMSCBR Combined output for both electrical and mechanical
status of the circuit breaker. The output values that
can be seen in LHMI or WHMI are:
• 0 = Unknown
• 4 = Electrically open, mechanically invalid
• 5 = Electrically open, mechanically open
• 6 = Electrically open, mechanically closed
• 7 = Electrically open, mechanically faulty
• 8 = Electrically closed, mechanically invalid
• 9 = Electrically closed, mechanically open
• 10 = Electrically closed, mechanically closed
• 11 = Electrically closed, mechanically faulty
Invalid means that either both the auxiliary contacts

are not available (AuxPosAvailable = None) or both
INPNOLX and INPNCLX inputs are 0.
Faulty means that both INPNOLX and INPNCLX
inputs are 1.
CNTPOSOLX Output ACBMSCBR Indicates contradicting electrical and mechanical CB
position, that is, current flowing through mechanical
status is Open.
Operation Count GUID-96ADAE79-69F6-4813-8400-8147305B53D2 v1

Every CB close-open cycle is counted as a single operation. Operations are evaluated in
ACBMSCBR for each circuit breaker pole individually. As soon as the monitoring of each phase
is completed, the operation counter is updated. The update happens after every opening
operation. The operation count interfaces are:

Technical Manual
Table 69: Circuit breaker operation count interfaces

OPRCNTRST Output ACBMSCBR Total number of circuit breaker C&O
operation cycles, updated on every detected
closing/opening operation cycle. Can be reset
by RESOPCNT (Refer Table 71 for LHMI path).
OPRCNTL1 Output SSCPOW Same as OPRCNTRST output from ACBMSCBR
OPRCNTL2 for phase L1, L2 or L3
OPRCNTL3
OPRCNTCLS Output ACBMSCBR Total count of CB closing operations. Can be
reset by RESOPCNT (Refer Table 71 for LHMI
path).
OPRCNTOPN Output ACBMSCBR Total count of CB opening operations. Can be
reset by RESOPCNT (Refer Table 71 for LHMI
path).
RESOPCNT Input ACBMSCBR Boolean input to reset operation count
INOPCNCLX Output ACBMSCBR Total count of synchronous closing
operations. Can be reset by RESOPCNT (Refer
Table 71 for LHMI path).
INOPCNOLX Output ACBMSCBR Total count of synchronous opening
operations. Can be reset by RESOPCNT (Refer
Table 71 for LHMI path).
OperationsMon Setting ACBMSCBR Number of erroneous operations to be
monitored to raise an alarm
OpCntAlm Setting ACBMSCBR Enable or disable the alarm for operation
count. (The setting for this limit is in
MONALM function.)
OPCWRNOLX Output ACBMSCBR Number of operations has exceeded the
warning level (limit settings are in MONALM
function).
OPCALMOLX Output ACBMSCBR Number of operations has exceeded the
alarming level (limit settings are in MONALM
function).
The function also raises an alarm and warning for operation count beyond warning and alarm
levels. With every energizing and de-energizing operation of the circuit breaker, the operation
counter is increased. The energization and the de-energization of the breaker is confirmed
after electrical and mechanical (if available) monitoring. This operation count is used for the
below evaluation:
• Operation count alarm and warning: The user can configure to raise an alarm or warning
based on the number of operations that has taken place in the breaker. These alarming
and warning thresholds can be set in the function MONALM. The alarm and the warning is
issued by the ACBMSCBR function and this can be enabled or disabled based on the
setting OpCntAlm.
The operation count can also be reset to zero through LHMI. The LHMI path is Main menu/
Clear/Clear CB cond. Indicators/Clear operation count.
By clearing this counter, the function is instructed to start counting the number of breaker
operation from zero again. This also resets the operation counter based alarm and warning.
The corresponding interface descriptions are provided in the Table 70.

Technical Manual
Table 70: Alarms and warning interfaces for operation count

function
OperationsMon Setting ACBMSCBR Number of erroneous operations to be monitored
to raise an alarm.
OpCntAlm Setting ACBMSCBR Enable or disable the alarm for operation count.
(The setting for this limit is in MONALM function).
OPCWRNOLX Output ACBMSCBR Number of operations has exceeded the warning
level (limit settings are in MONALM function).
OPCALMOLX Output ACBMSCBR Number of operations has exceeded the alarming
level (limit settings are in MONALM function).
7.2.3.4 Resetting the calculated and acquired values GUID-CF3EEBBC-4F76-4FBD-A58A-5A0786CA645B v1
If the operating environment changes, for example, the circuit breaker has undergone
maintenance or the IED is being used to switch a different breaker, it is recommended to reset
the internal values of accumulated parameters to avoid erroneous calculations. If the circuit
breaker was changed or overhauled during maintenance and the values are not reset, the
functionality may raise alarms. The clear or resetting options can be accessed through LHMI by
navigating to Clear/Clear CB indicators. For controlling reset functions from the application,
the following interfaces are available:
Table 71: Parameter resetting inputs

Reset input Available in Description LHMI path string
function
RESADCOMP ACBMSCBR Resets the adaptive /Main menu/Clear/Clear CB cond.
correction of closing times Indicators/Clear adaptive comp
(T3) to 0.0
RESETABL ACBMSCBR Resets the cumulated /Main menu/Clear/Clear CB cond.
interrupter wear (ablation) Indicators/Clear CB wear
to InitialCumAblLX
RESETUNST ACBMSCBR Clears unstable mode /Main menu/Clear/Clear CB cond.
Indicators/Clear unstable mode
RESOPCNT ACBMSCBR Resets the open, close and /Main menu/Clear/Clear CB cond.
synchronous operation Indicators/Clear operation count
counts to 0
RESRCNT ACBMSCBR Resets the re-strike/re- /Main menu/Clear/Clear CB cond.
ignition count to 0 Indicators/Clear re-strike count
RESRESTRC ACBMSCBR Resets the correction value /Main menu/Clear/Clear CB cond.
for target arcing time (re- Indicators/Clear re-strike correction
strike/re-ignition
correction) to 0.0
7.2.4 Data Acquisition GUID-8557D387-9D3B-472E-AF6B-77CE0CF1BF29 v1
Monitored parameters are stored in the operation log, see the section on Operation Log.
MONCOMP acts as the data provider by consolidating the parameters for every circuit breaker
operation and retaining them at its outputs until all values are ready for storing in operation
log. SSCPOW triggers the operation log only after completion of monitoring in all three
phases. The monitored values and the information evaluated in ACBMSCBR are given as inputs
to MONCOMP, which forwards them to OPERLOG for storing in the database. The input
information provided by ACBMSCBR to MONCOMP are:

Technical Manual
Table 72: Information provided by ACBMSCBR to MONCOMP

ELORTMX Input MONCOMP Actual/predicted electrical operating time
ELORTMLX Output ACBMSCBR of the breaker
MCORTMX Input MONCOMP Actual/predicted mechanical operating
MCORTMLX Output ACBMSCBR time of the breaker
CONVELX Input MONCOMP Linear contact velocity of the breaker
CONVELLX Output ACBMSCBR
PRESTRAX Input MONCOMP Actual/predicted prestrike angle during
PRESTRALX Output ACBMSCBR closing operation
ARCTMX Input MONCOMP Actual/predicted arcing time during
ARCTMLX Output ACBMSCBR opening operation
ITMCDLX Input MONCOMP Initial mechanical delay time of the breaker
ITMCDLLX Output ACBMSCBR
MCMOVTMX Input MONCOMP Mechanical moving time of the breaker
MCMOVTMLX Output ACBMSCBR
The information outputs of MONCOMP forwarded to the operation log are listed in Table 73.
Table 73: Signals from MONCOMP to the operation log

PMCORTMX Output MONCOMP Predicted mechanical operating time
PELORTMX Output MONCOMP Predicted electrical operating time
PPRESTRAX Output MONCOMP Predicted pre-strike angle for closing
operation
PARCTMX Output MONCOMP Predicted arcing time for opening operation
AMCORTMX Output MONCOMP Actual mechanical operating time
AELORTMX Output MONCOMP Actual electrical operating time
APRESTRAX Output MONCOMP Actual pre-strike angle for closing operation
AARCTMX Output MONCOMP Actual arcing time for opening operation
ACVX Output MONCOMP Actual linear contact velocity
AIMCDX Output MONCOMP Actual initial mechanical delay time
AMCMVX Output MONCOMP Actual total mechanical moving time
ERELORTX Output MONCOMP Calculated difference between actual and
predicted electrical operating times
ERMCORTX Output MONCOMP Calculated difference between actual and
predicted mechanical operating times
The PWC600 pre-configuration includes three instances of ACBMSCBR and of

MONCOMP for three phases. The individual breaker pole (phase) is monitored
and data logged independent of other phases.
Every operation is categorized under one of several different modes after reviewing the data
monitored. The mode of a particular operation is defined by the function SSCPOW through the
output OPLOGMODE, see Table 73 below. Whereas MONCOMP acts as the data provider to the
operation log and triggering of the operation log is done by SSCPOW.
In addition to acquiring data and publishing them towards the operation log, MONCOMP and
OPERLOG retain the information of the initial operations. These are also termed as
fingerprints. Comparison of the present operations with the fingerprint operations indicates

Technical Manual
the deviation that has occurred since initial commissioning. MONCOMP stores a certain
number (defined by setting InitialRecords) of initial operations as fingerprint records. The
initial operations until InitialRecords are treated as a fingerprint. There are some additional
criteria to fix the number of energizing and de-energizing operations as fingerprints. An
additional setting in MONCOMP, OptCombEqual, determines the fingerprint records in
context of energizing and de-energizing operation. The details of OptCombEqual are specified
in Table 73. The interfaces for triggering the operation log are:
Table 74: Operation log triggering output

function
OPLOGTRIG Output SSCPOW Trigger for operation log:
The operation log is triggered with the time stamp of
the incoming command.
OPLOGMODE Output SSCPOW Operation type detected for the record being
triggered in operation log. Refer to Table 76 for
details.
BLOCKLOG Input SSCPOW Boolean input to block the triggering of operation log.
BLKLOGOUT Output SSCPOW Output to OPLOG function, to block the triggering of
operation log when BLOCKLOG is high.
InitialRecords Setting MONCOMP Maximum number of operations to be stored as
fingerprint records
OptCombEqual Setting MONCOMP This setting along with the InitialRecords determine
the number of energizing and de-energizing
operations for fingerprint records.
The enums provided under this setting are:
• EqualOpnClsRcrds: This enum option limits the

fingerprint records to be an equal number
(InitialRecords/2 each) of closing and opening
operations. InitialRecords/2 energizing
operations and InitialRecords/2 de-energizing
operations are considered as fingerprint
records.
• CombinedTotalRcrds: This enum option records
any sequence of opening and closing operations
as fingerprint records, up to InitialRecords.
Either energizing or de-enrgizing operation is
considered as fingerprint record, until the total
number of operation reaches the InitialRecords
count.
Furthermore, MONCOMP calculates the average values of the data in fingerprint records and
the deviation of the last operation from these average values, see Table 75.
Table 75: Average and deviation outputs

function
AVPMCOTOX Output MONCOMP Average of the predicted mechanical operating time
of fingerprint open operations.
AVPELOTOX Output MONCOMP Average of the predicted electrical operating time of
fingerprint open operations.
AVAELOTOX Output MONCOMP Average of the actual electrical operating time
(interrupting time) of fingerprint open operations.
AVAMCOTOX Output MONCOMP Average of the actual mechanical operating time of

Technical Manual

function
AVACVOX Output MONCOMP Average of the linear contact velocity of fingerprint
open operations.
AVAARGTX Output MONCOMP Average of the actual arcing time of fingerprint open
operations.
AVAIMDOX Output MONCOMP Average of the initial mechanical delay time of
AVAMCMTOX Output MONCOMP Average of the mechanical moving time of
AVPMCOTCX Output MONCOMP Average of the predicted mechanical operating time
of fingerprint close operations.
AVPELOTCX Output MONCOMP Average of the predicted electrical operating time of
fingerprint close operations.
AVPPSAX Output MONCOMP Average of the actual prestrike angle of fingerprint
close operations.
AVAELOTCX Output MONCOMP Average of the actual electrical operating time
(making time) of fingerprint close operations.
AVAMCOTCX Output MONCOMP Average of the actual mechanical operating time of
AVACVCX Output MONCOMP Average of the linear contact velocity of fingerprint
close operations.
AVAPSAX Output MONCOMP Average of the actual prestrike angle of fingerprint
close operations.
AVAIMDCX Output MONCOMP Average of the initial mechanical delay time of
AVAMCMTCX Output MONCOMP Average of the mechanical moving time of
DVPMCOTX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest predicted mechanical operating
time from average of fingerprint records
DVPELOTX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest predicted electrical operating
time from average of fingerprint records
DVPPSAX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest predicted prestrike angle from
average of fingerprint records
DVAELOTX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest actual electrical operating time
from average of fingerprint records
DVAMCOTX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest actual mechanical operating time
DVACVX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest actual linear contact velocity from
DVAPSAX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest actual prestrike angle from
DVAARGTX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest actual arcing time from average
of fingerprint records
DVAIMDX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest initial mechanical movement
delay from average of fingerprint records
DVAMCMVX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest total mechanical movement time
This helps the user to monitor changes in operating characteristics of the circuit breaker over
time and operations.

Technical Manual
The different modes of operation that can be viewed in WHMI or LHMI, are listed in Table 76. If
several modes are applicable to one operation, the one with the lowest order number is
reported.
Table 76: Operation modes as recorded in Operation log

Order/ Mode Numeric Description of conditions
Priority mode
1 Blocked 1451 • Block inputs for a particular command are high when the
command is received
• A contingency exists and the contingency mode has been
selected to block the particular type of operation.
• Synchronous switching commands are blocked by the
BlkSynSw (block synchronous switching) input of SSCPOW
and the contingency mode has been selected to block the
particular operation.
2 RefMiss 1448 When the command was received, there was no proper reference
signal available (see section "Reference signals").
3 Cancel 1446 In case of time synchronization issues, the PIO module may reject
to execute the time stamped output commands as issued by the
SSCPOW function and indicate this through the Cancel interface.
SSCPOW may then attempt to re-issue updated switching
commands.
4 CBInter 1450 For constant load type, disagreement between electrical and
mechanical status of the circuit breaker during switching was
detected. If mechanical status is unknown/faulty, electrical status
is considered and CBInter mode is not declared.
For other load types CBInter mode is not applicable.
5 CBUnstable 1449 When the mechanical operating times are inconsistent (varying by
10% over previous operating time) for two consecutive operations.
Close operations are compared with close operations only, and
likewise for opening operations.
when this mode is detected and declared for the first time, all
further operations are declared as either bypassed or blocked
(according to contingency mode) until the CBUnstable mode is
reset by the user.
6 Redundnt 1473 • When a closing command is received while the circuit breaker
is already monitored to be in closed condition.
• When an opening command is received while the circuit
breaker is already monitored to be in open condition.
A circuit breaker is considered to be closed under certain

conditions.
• For constant loads, electrical status takes preference.

• For other loads, mechanical status takes preference if
available.
Absence of auxiliary contacts or detection of intermediate state

will not generate Redundant mode but may generate Failed mode.
7 Failed 1474 When a switching command has been issued and no feedback of
mechanical or electrical status change is detected:
• For closing operations, within 12.5 cycles for pre-defined load,

or within 25 cycles for user-defined load, from the time the
command has been issued by the IED.
• For opening operations, 7 cycles from the time the primary

contacts are supposed to have separated for all the loads.

Technical Manual
Order/ Mode Numeric Description of conditions

Priority mode
8 Bypassed 1443 • When the Bypass setting is selected to bypass a particular
command.
• When contingency has been detected and contingency mode
setting is to bypass the command.
9 BlkSynSw 1464 Synchronous switching commands are bypassed, by the BlkSynSw

(block synchronous switching) input of SSCPOW function and
contingency mode setting to bypass a particular command.
10 External 1444 A switching operation is detected to have been controlled
externally, that is, the command was not issued by PWC600 but
mechanical and/or electrical CB status change is detected.
11 Actual 1441 A controlled switching operation was completed with all switching
targets within specified limits.
12 Actual* 1452 • When the modes Table 76 have electrical target error alarms
CBUnstab* 1455 detected above the specified limits. (Electrical target error is
CBInter* 1456 defined as the error between predicted and actual electrical
operating times with thresholds set in MONALM function.)
• Modes with electrical target error alarm “*” supersede the
original modes.
In case of more than one condition per row, each condition individually may
generate that mode.
Apart from the operation mode, the data seen in the WebHMI are listed in Table 77.
Table 77: Signals published in WebHMI

WHMI information name Signal Description
Electrical target error ERELORTX Difference between actual and target electrical
operating times
Electrical operating time AELORTMX actual electrical operating time (making time,
interrupting time) monitored
Predicted electrical operating time PELORTMX Predicted electrical operating time
Current making angle APRESTRAX Actual monitored pre-strike angle on phase
voltage for close operation
Target current making angle PPRESTRAX Predicted pre-strike angle on phase voltage for
close operation
Arcing time AARCTMX Actual monitored arcing time for open operation
Target arcing time PARCTMX Predicted arcing time for open operation
Mechanical target error ERMCORTX Difference between actual and target
mechanical operating times.
Mechanical operating time AMCORTMX Actual mechanical operating time (closing time,
opening time) monitored
Predicted mechanical operating PMCORTMX Predicted mechanical operating time
time
Initial mechanical delay time AIMCDX Actual monitored initial mechanical delay
Mechanical moving time AMCMVX Actual mechanical moving time
Primary contact velocity ACVX Actual contact velocity
Controller delay time CNTRLDEL actual monitored controller delay

Technical Manual
WHMI information name Signal Description

Operation count OPRCNTLX operation count in each phase
Interrupter wear LOOPABLLX Calculated contact ablation for the last opening
operation
Cumulated interrupter wear ABLSUMLX Accumulated contact ablation including the
latest opening operation

Technical Manual
110
Control
Section 8 Control
8.1 Selector mini switch VSGGIO
D0E7201T201305151403 v1

Selector mini switch VSGGIO - -
The Selector mini switch VSGGIO function block is a multipurpose function used for a variety
of applications, as a general purpose switch. It can be used for two purposes:
• Acquiring an external switch position at its inputs. This information can be represented on
the single line diagram by a controllable switch symbol, or used further in the application.
• Issuing switching commands on its outputs. Here, VSGGIO can be controlled from the
menu or from a symbol on the single line diagram (SLD) on the local HMI.
VSGGIO
BLOCK BLOCKED
PSTO POSITION
IPOS1 POS1
IPOS2 POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21
D0E13222T201305151403 V1 EN-US
8.1.4 Signals
D0E7324T201305151403 v1
Table 78: VSGGIO Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input

Technical Manual
Control
D0E7325T201305151403 v1
Table 79: VSGGIO Output signals

BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer
POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1
8.1.5 Settings
D0E7326T201305151403 v1
Table 80: VSGGIO Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CtlModel Dir Norm - - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model
SBO Enh according to IEC 61850
Mode Steady - - Pulsed Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute
signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght
Selector mini switch (VSGGIO) function can be used for dual purpose, in the same way as
switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:
• for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the IPOS1 and
IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the application through the POS1 and POS2 outputs, or to
IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
• for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in the
configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command from the local
HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command from the local
HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is associated with a
controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed on the screen. A
symbol is created and configured in GDE tool in PCM600.
The PSTO input is connected to the Local/Remote switch for selecting the operator's location,
either from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote). An INTONE connection from Fixed
signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow operation from local HMI.
As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit representation,
where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the desired result.

Technical Manual
Control
The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the name of the
string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.
IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value

0 0 PosUndefined P00
1 0 Position1 P01
0 1 Position2 P10
1 1 PosBadState P11
8.2 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions

DPGGIO
D0E6290T201305151403 v1

IEC 61850 generic communication DPGGIO - -
I/O functions
The IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO function block is used to send
double point indications to other systems or equipment in the substation via IEC61850 station
bus. It is especially used in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.
DPGGIO
OPEN POSITION
CLOSE
VALID
D0E12384T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 46: DPGGIO function block
8.2.4 Signals
D0E6532T201305151403 v1
Table 81: DPGGIO Input signals

OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication
D0E6533T201305151403 v1
Table 82: DPGGIO Output signals

POSITION INTEGER Double point indication

Technical Manual
Control
8.2.5 Settings
D0E6053T201305151403 v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control
IED Manager (PCM600).
Upon receiving the input signals, the IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions
(DPGGIO) function block will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system
that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, PCM600 or other tools must be used
to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.
8.3 Strategy switching SSCPOW GUID-2D8D445E-F93C-4465-89ED-848A75F35263 v1
8.3.1 Identification GUID-D1A30927-812E-4809-A199-559582939FD6 v1
Table 83: Identification

Strategy switching of PWC600 SSCPOW — —
8.3.2 Functionality GUID-6AD604C0-8AA8-40A0-A797-B5962069837D v2
The strategy switching (SSCPOW) function of PWC600 provides selection of the relevant
switching sequence based on the inputs. The default switching sequence for closing/opening
operations is based on switching command at the relevant voltage zero or peak of the first
possible phase or in accordance to the phase rotation principle.
SSCPOW processes the voltage/current input and identifies the sequence of zero crossings for
the selection of switching strategy. If the application type is defined with relevant grounding,
the product automatically selects the optimum switching strategy and performs the
operations. However, if there is an application where these strategies may not result in
optimum switching and requires settings, the switching positions where the operations
should be done can be selected. The switching can also be made adaptable.
The switching strategies mentioned previously can be divided into five subparts.
1. System Application and switching pattern detection (Static Application Switching

Strategy)
2. Source selection and Zero crossing detection (Signal Processing)
3. Case Control Strategy
4. Co-ordination Logic
5. Output Logic
The switching operation also undergoes a circuit breaker learning mode which confirms the
integrity of the wiring, the predicted time stamps and co-ordination logic between breaker
learning logic (a separate function code) and strategy switching logic.

Technical Manual
Control
8.3.3 Function block GUID-E2DD5003-2878-40CD-9915-C0FC4006FE42 v1
SSCPOW
BLOCK STRANGL1
U3P* STRANGL2
I3P* STRANGL3
BLOCKALL OPCMDL1
BLKSYNSW OPCMDL2
BLOCKLOG OPCMDL3
CMDOPEN CLCMDL1
CMDCLOSE CLCMDL2
CMDOPENG CLCMDL3
CMDCLOSEG OPCMDINP
BLKOPOPR CLCMDINP
BLKCLOPR CRDSSMCL1
DELTAT1L1 CRDSSMCL2
DELTAT1L2 CRDSSMCL3
DELTAT1L3 CRDTSMCL1
DELTAT2L1 CRDTSMCL2
DELTAT2L2 CRDTSMCL3
DELTAT2L3 DLTOPL1
DELTAT3L1 DLTOPL2
DELTAT3L2 DLTOPL3
DELTAT3L3 DLTCLL1
DELTAT6L1 DLTCLL2
DELTAT6L2 DLTCLL3
DELTAT6L3 OPBYPASS
DELTAT7L1 CLBYPASS
DELTAT7L2 BLKOPL1
DELTAT7L3 BLKOPL2
CRDMCTSL1 BLKOPL3
CRDMCTSL2 BLKCLL1
CRDMCTSL3 BLKCLL2
CRDBCTSX BLKCLL3
CRDACSSL1 STRDPOW
CRDACSSL2 TIMEEXED
CRDACSSL3 BLKLOGOUT
CRDBLSSX LOCCNTRL
INNOOPL1 POWCAPL1
INNCOPL1 POWCAPL2
INPRIOPL1 POWCAPL3
INNOOPL2 SWTPOSL1
INNCOPL2 SWTPOSL2
INPRIOPL2 SWTPOSL3
INNOOPL3 OPLOGMODE
INNCOPL3 OPLOGTRIG
INPRIOPL3 CNTRLDEL
INNOCLL1 RSTOUT
INNCCLL1 RSTFPOUT
INPRICLL1 OPERCNTL1
INNOCLL2 OPERCNTL2
INNCCLL2 OPERCNTL3
INPRICLL2 CLOPRGNL
INNOCLL3 OPOPRGNL
INNCCLL3 REFSIGLOS
INPRICLL3 UNCONTSWT
CNOPCMDL1 COPSIGLOS
CNOPCMDL2 QCLOSE
CNOPCMDL3 QOPEN
CNCLCMDL1 DRTRIG
CNCLCMDL2 CBOPCAPL1
CNCLCMDL3 CBOPCAPL2
RESET CBOPCAPL3
RESETFP EMERTRIP
CBSTSCFL1
CBSTSCFL2
CBSTSCFL3
CBTSMODE
ELCERRGL1
ELCERRGL2
ELCERRGL3
CBOPCAPIN
CMPLOSIN
LOCCNTLIN
VOLTCHA*
VOLTCHB*
VOLTCHC*
CURRCHA*
CURRCHB*
CURRCHC*
Figure 47: Function block

Technical Manual
Control
8.3.4 Signals
PID-3896-INPUTSIGNALS v3
Table 84: SSCPOW Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block input for blocking binary outputs
U3P GROUP - Three phase voltage input
SIGNAL
I3P GROUP - Three phase current input
SIGNAL
VoltCHA GROUP - VoltCHA
SIGNAL
VoltCHB GROUP - VoltCHB
SIGNAL
VoltCHC GROUP - VoltCHC
SIGNAL
CurrCHA GROUP - Current ChannelA
SIGNAL
CurrCHB GROUP - Current ChannelB
SIGNAL
CurrCHC GROUP - Current ChannelC
SIGNAL
BLOCKALL BOOLEAN 0 Block input for blocking all switching operations
BLKSYNSW BOOLEAN 0 Block input for blocking all synchronous switching operations
BLOCKLOG BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operation log triggering
BLKOPOPR BOOLEAN 0 Block input for blocking open operations
BLKCLOPR BOOLEAN 0 Block input for blocking close operations
CNOPCMDL1 BOOLEAN 0 Cancel open command from PIO board for unsuccessful open
command operation for phaseL1
CNCLCMDL1 BOOLEAN 0 Cancel close command from PIO board for unsuccessful close
CMDOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open command input
CMDCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close command input
CMDOPENG BOOLEAN 0 Open command GOOSE input
CMDCLOSEG BOOLEAN 0 Close command GOOSE input
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset input to clear all outputs except initial finger print
records
RESETFP BOOLEAN 0 Reset input to clear all outputs including initial finger print
open/close records outputs
CBTSMODE BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker test mode status indication
CMPLOSIN BOOLEAN 0 Loss of compensation input signal
CRDBCTSX INTEGER 0 Co-ordination input from CBCOMP to SSCPOW

Technical Manual
Control

CRDBLSSX INTEGER 0 Co-ordination input from CBLEARN to SSCPOW
CRDACSSL1 INTEGER 0 Co-ordination input for phaseL1 from ACBMSCBR to SSCPOW
CRDMCTSL1 INTEGER 0 Co-ordination input for phaseL1 from MONCOMP to SSCPOW
OPRCNTL1 INTEGER 0 Operation count input for phase L1
CBSTSCFL1 INTEGER 0 Circuit breaker position input from ACBMSCBR for phaseL1
ELCERRGL1 INTEGER 0 Electircal range error from MONALM to generate operation
log mode for phaseL1
CBOPCAPIN INTEGER 0 Cicruit breaker operating capability input from MONALM
LOCCNTLIN BOOLEAN 0 Local/remote control indication input signal
INPRIOPL1 REAL 0.0 Time to operate main contact for phaseL1 open operation
INPRICLL1 REAL 0.0 Time to operate main contact for phaseL1 close operation
DELTAT1L1 REAL 0.0 Electrical switching correction delay from switching instant
for phaseL1
for phaseL2
for phaseL3
DELTAT2L1 REAL 0.0 Switching compensation delay from switching instant for
phaseL1
phaseL2
phaseL3
DELTAT3L1 REAL 0.0 Adaptive switching correction delay for restrike and prestrike
for phaseL1
for phaseL2
for phaseL3
DELTAT6L1 REAL 0.0 Switching strategy delay from switching instant for handling
mechanical scatter for phaseL1

Technical Manual
Control

DELTAT7L1 REAL 0.0 Switching delay for open opers if restrikes/reignition
detected as per user set value for phaseL1
PID-3896-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3
Table 85: SSCPOW Output signals

OPCMDL1 BOOLEAN Time activated control open synchronous switching
command for phaseL1
command for phaseL2
command for phaseL3
CLCMDL1 BOOLEAN Time activated control close synchronous switching
command for phaseL1
command for phaseL2
command for phaseL3
OPCMDINP BOOLEAN Open command input received to the function latched output
CLCMDINP BOOLEAN Close command input received to the function latched output
EMERTRIP BOOLEAN Emergency trip indication for immediate trip operation
OPBYPASS BOOLEAN Bypassing openingswitching criteria when no valid strategy
selected or controlledswitching disabled
CLBYPASS BOOLEAN Bypassing closingswitching criteria when no valid strategy
selected or controlledswitching disabled
DRTRIG BOOLEAN Trigger to disturbance record
OPLOGTRIG BOOLEAN Trigger input to operation log
OPLOGMODE INTEGER Mode output from SSCPOW to operation log
RSTOUT BOOLEAN Reset output to clear all outputs except initial finger print
records
RSTFPOUT BOOLEAN Reset output to clear all outputs including initial finger print
open/close records outputs
BLKLOGOUT BOOLEAN Block signal for operation log
BLKOPL1 BOOLEAN Block opening command for phaseL1
BLKCLL1 BOOLEAN Block closing command for phaseL1
STRDPOW BOOLEAN Indication of point on wave controlling start

Technical Manual
Control

TIMEEXED BOOLEAN Indication for maximum allowed time for operation exceeded
LOCCNTRL BOOLEAN Local control behaviour
CLOPRGNL BOOLEAN Close command general output
OPOPRGNL BOOLEAN Open command general output
REFSIGLOS BOOLEAN Loss of reference signal indication output
UNCONTSWT BOOLEAN Uncontrolled switching indication output
COPSIGLOS BOOLEAN Loss of any enabled compensation signal indication output
QCLOSE BOOLEAN Close command query used to request for corrections from
other functions
QOPEN BOOLEAN Open command query used to request for corrections from
other functions
DRCLTIML1 BOOLEAN Synchronous close command time of phaseL1 for disturbance
recording
recording
recording
DROPTIML1 BOOLEAN Synchronous open command time of phaseL1 for disturbance
recording
recording
recording
CBOPCAPL1 INTEGER Circuit breaker operating capability for phaseL1
OPRCNTL1 INTEGER Operation count output for phase L1
SWTPOSL1 INTEGER Switch position indication for phaseL1
POWCAPL1 INTEGER Point on wave switching capability indication for phaseL1
CRDSSACL1 INTEGER Co-ordination output from SSCPOW to ACBMSCBR for
phaseL1
phaseL2
phaseL3
CRDSSMCL1 INTEGER Co-ordination output from SSCPOW to MONCOMP for
phaseL1
CRDSSMCL2 INTEGER Co-ordination output from SSCPOW to MONCOMP for phase
L2
CRDSSMCL3 INTEGER Co-ordination output from SSCPOW to MONCOMP for
phaseL3

Technical Manual
Control

CRDTSMCL1 INTEGER Co-ordination output from SSCPOW to MONCOMP for
phaseL1
phaseL2
phaseL3
CNTRLDEL REAL Controller delay output
DLTOPL1 REAL Difference time from first command input to open control
switching command for phaseL1
switching command for phase L2
switching command for phaseL3
DLTCLL1 REAL Difference time from first command input to close
synchronous switching command for phaseL1
STRANGL1 REAL Strategy switching angle for phaseL1
8.3.5 Settings
Table 86: SSCPOW Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode Off / On
On
CntrldOperType Close - - Close Switching operation(s) to be
Open controlled
Open & Close
UConnType One phase star - - One phase star Connection type of reference voltage
Three phase star transformer
One phase delta
Three phase delta
UConnPh L1/L1-L2 - - L1/L1-L2 Connected phase of voltage if single
L2/L2-L3 phase connection of voltage is
L3/L3-L1 selected in uConnType
OpenRefI Voltage - - Voltage Reference selection for opening
Current operations to be either voltage or
current
UDead 5.00 - 80.00 %UB 1.00 20.00 Dead voltage setting
IDead 5.00 - 80.00 %IB 1.00 20.00 Dead current setting

Technical Manual
Control

LoadType Capacitor - - Capacitor Load type of this function for
Reactor selecting opening and closing
Power strategy
transformer
Transmissionline/
Cable
User defined
Coupled Reactor
Coupled
transformer
Grounding Star grounded - - Star grounded Type of grounding for switched load
Ungrounded/ valid only if load type is selected as
Delta Capacitor or Reactor
Impedance
grounded
ImpRatio 0.0 - 19.9 - 0.1 0.0 Impedance ratio of grounding in case
of impedance grounded
RefSignalLossAlm Disable - - Disable Enable or disable selection for
Enable reference signal lost alarm indication
CompSigLossAlm Disable - - Disable Compensation signal loss alarm
Enable option
ContDelayExdAlm Disable - - Disable Enable or disable selection for
Enable maximum controller delay exceeded
alarm indication
UncontSwitchAlm Disable - - Disable Uncontrolled switching alarm option
Enable
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Global selection for function groups
Table 87: SSCPOW Non group settings (advanced)

PhFixSelectClose Disable - - Disable Fixed phase selection for closing
L2 operation
PhFixSelectOpen Disable - - Disable Fixed phase selection for opening
L2 operation
NumOfHalfCycle 2 - 16 - 1 10 Number of half cycles to be
considered for half cycle average time
period evaluation
MaxContDelay 45.00 - 200.00 ms 1.00 50.00 Maximum controller delay set for
controller delay value exceeded alarm
indication
ByPassMode Disable - - Disable By pass open or close operations
Close overrules CntrldOperType
Open
Open & Close
LeadTargetOpen 0.0 - 3600.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Opening target setting in degrees
(relative to positive zero crossing) for
lead phase
FirstFollowOpen 0.0 - 3600.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Opening target setting in degrees
(relative to LeadTargetOpen) for first
following phase
SecondFollowOpen 0.0 - 3600.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Opening target setting in degrees
(relative to LeadTargetOpen) for
second following phase
LeadTargetClose 0.0 - 3600.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Closing target setting in degrees
(relative to positive zero crossing) for
lead phase

Technical Manual
Control

FirstFollowClose 0.0 - 3600.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Closing target setting in degrees
(relative to LeadTargetOpen) for first
following phase
SecondFollowClose 0.0 - 3600.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Closing target setting in degrees
(relative to LeadTargetOpen) for
second following phase
CmdOffStatus Disable - - Disable Setting to enable or disable selection
Enable of time to switch off command and
current time
CmdOffTime 100.0 - 2000.0 ms 1.0 100.0 Command off time setting to provide
time to switch off command
ContingencyMode Block open&close - - Bypass Contingency mode selection for
Bypass open&close uncontrolled switching
open&close
Blockopen-
Bypassclose
Bypassopen-
Blockclose
POWCapSet N/A - - N/A Point of wave capability of a circuit
None breaker selection
Close
Open
Close&Open

Technical Manual
Control
8.3.6 Operation principle GUID-740CEE93-142B-4C7C-8A45-902FDD84D69F v2
Input Application
Switching (5.3) Output Logic Output
Strategy(static) ACBMSCBR Application (5.4)
Setting (5.1) Switching
Strategy(dynamic)
Case Command
handling (0)
Query Logic
(1)
(2)
Input
Signal Co-ordination
Processing (3) Logic
Setting (5.2) (5.5)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Figure 48: Strategy switching block diagram

Technical Manual
Control
coorASSTS
deltaT1L1 Selection deltaT1L1
deltaT1L2
Criteria deltaT1L2
Logic
deltaT1L3 deltaT1L3
deltaT2L1 deltaT2L1
deltaT2L2
Selection deltaT2L2 openL3commandL1
Criteria
deltaT2L3 Logic deltaT2L3 openL3commandL2
openL3commandL3
deltaSummation Operating
closeL3commandL1
time
deltaT3L1 deltaT3L1 tpHalfCycle Logic closeL3commandL2
deltaT3L2
Selection deltaT3L2 cbCloseTime closeL3commandL3
Criteria
deltaT3L3 Logic deltaT3L3 cbOpenTime
Summation
Logic
deltaT4L1 deltaT4L1

Criteria
deltaT4L3 Logic deltaT4L3
deltaT6L1 deltaT4L1

Criteria
deltaT6L3 Logic deltaT4L3
Figure 49: Delta summation
8.3.6.1 System application and switching pattern detection (Static application

switching strategy) GUID-BC5FC6CB-39F4-4CE3-8FC6-F1B39C4C2836 v1
Different loads and their grounding methods require different switching strategy. There are
nine parameters determining the strategy opening or closing angles.
1. Load type (capacitive or inductive)

2. Load configuration (Star grounded/Star ungrounded/Delta)
3. Phase sequence (Positive/Negative)
4. Operation type (Open/Close)
5. Lead operating phase
6. Reference triggering phase for strategy calculation
7. Phase reference trigger (Positive/Negative)
8. Polarity sensitivity for closing (Positive/Negative/Any)
9. Switching phase
The parameters 1...4 and 8 are handled in the static application switching strategy and the
other parameters are handled in the case control strategy.
8.3.6.2 Source selection and zero-crossing detection GUID-9A34518B-0F95-40A7-A346-9595F8F07B3F v1
The point-on-wave control systems require the input source to be freely selectable. The three
phase-to-earth voltage inputs for closing operation and three phase-to-earth current inputs
for opening operation are required. However, for practical purposes, all three-phase voltages
may not be available at the control kiosk or phase-to-phase voltages may be available. Hence,

Technical Manual
Control
it becomes important to be able to adapt to the inputs being provided and derive the required
signals out of the available signals, by referring to phase to ground voltages phase to phase
voltages positive zero crossing can be derived which is represented in Figure 55 and
appropriate phase voltages and phase to phase voltages are represented in Figure 49. Also,
current inputs at times might not be significant in quantity to be considered for analysis
purpose, at such times, falling back on voltage signals might be a better choice. Due to the
above mentioned points, there is a requirement to choose, reconstruct and analyze different
inputs available to achieve the desired outputs for zero crossing detection.
Once the signal source is selected, the zero crossings are detected and the time stamp is
calculated. This is based on the sample number and the time stamp information of the initial
sample made available.
1 2 . i i+1 i+2 i+3 . . n-1 n
Time Stamp = x Latest Sample

First Sample
IEC12000074-1-vsd
Figure 50: Zero crossing sample information
U1/U12/I1 ( X Channel ID
uConnType A
uConnPh U2/U23/I2 ( Y Channel ID

B
openRef
U3/U31/I3 ( Z Channel ID
C
U1
U2
Reference Co-ordination Reference
U3 Selection
I1
I2
I3
No Reference Signal L1/L2/L3 T4L1

X - Channel ID
A T4L2
AFL_DATE_TIME T4X
Y- Channel ID
B T4L3
AFL_DATE_TIME T4Y
Z – Channel ID
C
Zero Crossing AFL_DATE_TIME T4Z
RMS U3PN Zero Crossing 3-
Detection
Phase Evaluation
Algorithm
RMS I3P
tpHalfCycle
tp Half Cycle
Co-ordination ZC
avgNumOfHalfCycle
IEC12000075-1-vsd
Figure 51: Reference selection and zero-crossing detection block diagram

As shown in Figure 48, signal processing block is divided into four functional blocks as shown
in Figure 51.

Technical Manual
Control
• Reference selection block

• Zero-crossing detection block
• Zero-crossing 3-phase evaluation block
• tp half-cycle block
Internal signal flow between four of the functional blocks is shown in Figure 51. Also, signal
information handshaking is performed using coordination signals between functional blocks
to maintain synchronous data transfer.
Reference selection logic GUID-91FCE7B8-695A-4695-826C-EDD01D8FDE6C v1

The reference selection logic is shown in Figure 52. Based on the setting selected for the
reference signal (Voltage/Current), the logic enables the reference signals to pass by after
checking for the signal amplitude compared to the dead values. If the level comparison fails,
the signal cannot be used as reference signal. The setting selection information of uConnType
and uConnPh is passed through the internal coordination signal (coorRSZC3E) to zero-
crossing 3-phase evaluation logic.
openRef
AND
NOT
AND
IL1 RMS
a
a>b
b
IDead
Open Reference Success
OR
IL2 RMS
a
a>b
b
IL3 RMS
a
a>b
b
AND
UL1 RMS
a
a>b Close Reference Success
b
AND
UDead
UL2 RMS
a
a>b
b
UL3 RMS
a
a>b
b
PutSamples_A
IL1 CHID U1/U12/I1 X Channel ID
T
NoOfValues ChannelID
UL1 CHID
T
0.0 U NewSampleValue F
U2/U23/I2 Y Channel ID
channelIdIn F
IL2 CHID T
UL2 CHID
T F
1 IL3 CHID U3/U31/I3 Z Channel ID
F T
UL3 CHID
T F
Bit coorRSZC3E
Pack
uConnType Code
uConnPh
IEC12000076-1-vsd
Figure 52: Reference selection logic
Zero-crossing detection logic GUID-CF26C862-69E5-4249-AE1D-5C52FC6F2B6E v1
Referring to Figure 50, a zero-crossing is detected between the ith and (i+1)th samples in the
frame received. Given that the information from the base software (BSW) is available for the
time stamp of the first sample, which is shown as x, the zero-crossing time can be calculated.
æ ValueSOld ö
Tzc = x + Ts gç ÷
è ValueSOld - ValueSNew ø

Technical Manual
Control
m
å (Tzcj +1 - Tzcj )
1
TPhalfcycle =
m j =0
Where
Ts Sampling time period
TPhalfcycle half-cycle time period (averaged)
m Number of half cycles to be considered for averaging half cycle time period
Tzc Time for zero crossing
ValueSOld Previous sample value

ValueSNew Present sample value
Zero-crossing detection algorithm logic is shown in Figure 53. This logical diagram describes
the evaluation of zero-crossing time with and without polarity sensitivity. However, in this
function the zero-crossing reference is used for target-switching correction. The information
about the polarity sensitivity is detected in the algorithm latest zero-crossing time evaluated,
which is positive zero crossing or negative zero crossing.
GetSamples_A
XChannelID noOfSamples
NumberOfSamplesInTask LOOP
channelID
NewSampleValue sampleValue
a
zeroVal a>b
0 U b
1
positiveZC
AND
-1 delayedSampleValue
Z a
a<=b
0.0 b
Init =
trigZC
OR
a
a<b
b
negativeZC
AND
a
a=>b
b
sampleTimeInterface
T t1
microSeconds
125.0 U
F
-1 T t0
Z
0.0 F
Init = V1
T
F
T V0
F
tz t 0 Vo (t1 t 0) / (V 1 V 0) tzX
Z-1
Init= 0.0 T t4ZL1
Z-1 F
Init= 0.0
Z-1
Z-1
Init= 0.0
Init= 0.0
Z-1
Init= 0.0
GetSamples_A
YChannelID
channelID NumberOfSamplesInTask
sampleValue
NewSampleValue
tzY
2
Similar logic as the ‘XChannelID’ t4ZL2
GetSamples_A
ZChannelID NumberOfSamplesInTask
channelID
sampleValue
NewSampleValue
tzZ
3
Similar logic as the ‘XChannelID’ t4ZL3
Figure 53: Logical representation of the zero-crossing
Half-cycle evaluation GUID-DD0DF090-6F1F-463D-8B52-ECEE8F0C6604 v2

The half-cycle time period evaluation is based on the latest zero-crossing time detected using
the presented algorithm. If zero-crossing trigger is detected by zero-crossing time blocking, it
is recorded to a buffer. Based on the length of the buffer, the defined tpHalfCycle is evaluated
as shown in Figure 54.

Technical Manual
Control
Length of the buffer = no. of half cycles
trigZC
tz X,Y,Z tp Half Cycle Buffer
Sum of the buffer values

= tp HalfCycle
Length of the buffer
IEC12000077-1-vsd
Figure 54: Representation of half-cycle time period evaluation
Zero-crossing 3-phase evaluation GUID-B56EF703-CA2F-4E80-8EBC-F11B549C75B6 v2

Zero-crossing information is evaluated for all three phases if their phase-to-earth values are
available. If the phase-to-earth signal values are not available, the actual values are evaluated
by adding or subtracting an appropriate value to form the zero-crossing time values as shown
in Figure 55 in sync with the coordination signal coorRSZC3E.
coorRSZC3E
Note: *Opening strategy will change for current selection

IEC12000078
Figure 55: Zero-crossing 3-phase evaluation

Technical Manual
Control
1.5
1
U1-N
0.5 U2-N
U3-N
0
U1-U2
U2-U3
-0.5
U3-U1
-1
-1.5
-2
0° 60° 120° 180° 240° 300° 360°
Figure 56: Waveform patterns
8.3.6.3 Case Control Strategy GUID-45E5216A-F56D-4B74-9DA8-DC801D4B5D45 v2
The case control strategy consists of ten sub blocks.
General logic Dynamic application switching strategy

Case command control
Query logic BC open query
BC close query
BC close response and ACBMSCBR voltage-based open query
ACBMSCBR voltage-based open response and ACBOM current-based open query
ACBMSCBR current-based open response and ACBOM voltage close query
ACBMSCBR voltage-based close response and delta T5 open query
delta T5 open response and delta T5 close query
delta T5 close response
Dynamic application switching strategy determines the parameter 5,6,7 and 9 of system
application and switching pattern detection section. The selection of the correct parameters
determines the switching strategy.
The Case Command Control block defines the operational procedure for bypass command,
synchronous switching command, cancel command and command turn off logic. Figure 57
shows the overall block diagram of the case command handling logic.
The bypass command block defines the operational procedure for the ByPassMode setting
either in open or closed condition. The synchronous switching command block sends out the
open or close command at a defined time stamp corresponding to the strategy selected. On
receiving the cancel command from PIO, this block issues the correct retrigger commands for
open or closed operation.
In case of command control logic, the command turn-off block puts off the closed or open
operation command bit low after the predicted future time.
The sub blocks 1...8 of Figure 48 are the query blocks which puts the query in one task time and
receives the response in the next task time.

Technical Manual
Control
By-pass Sync. Switching

Cancel command
command command
Close Open Close Open Close Open
Command Turn-off logic
Close Open
IEC12000079-1-vsd
Figure 57: Block diagram representation of case command handling logic
Cancel Command Handling Block

Cancel command handling block receives six input cancel commands from the PIO. Depending
on the execution of control operation, either open or close cancel commands generated by PIO
is received as the feedback signal to start the cancel command handling logic internally. Based
on the cancelOperMode setting, cancel command handling logic executes the operational
condition when cancel commands, that is, abort operation, try once and try twice are received
from PIO.
Abort operation
Abort operation executes the emergency trip to give out the three phases open commands.
Try once
Try once operation executes command re-try once to give out the controlled switching
operation. If cancel commands are received again to the cancel command handling block then,
emergency trip is executed to give out the three phases open commands.
Try twice
Try twice operation executes command re-try once to give out the controlled switching
operation. If cancel commands are received to the function then this logic re-tries one more
time to execute the controlled switching. If cancel commands are received again to the cancel
command handling block then, emergency trip is executed to give out the three phases open
commands.
Contingency conditions
During non-operational conditions existing such as unstable CB characteristics or reference
signal missing for execution of controlled switching based on the contingency mode selection
two operations are possible.
• Block commands
• Uncontrolled switching
Uncontrolled switching
Based on the load selected, uncontrolled switching operation leads to the switching
commands with out any control strategy. This operating condition will be indicated using a
unCntSwitching signal to the user to understand due to non-operational conditions
uncontrolled switching happened to the input command received to the function.
Block commands

Technical Manual
Control
Based on the selection of contingency mode the output switching commands can be blocked
irrespective of the operation type selected, when the non-operational conditions exists to
execute the controlled switching.
Bypass Mode
When user selects the bypass mode, the input commands received to the function is executed
with out any controlled switching strategies.
Block sync switching

When blocking of controlled switching is enabled, uncontrolled switching is indicated stating
that the controlled switching strategy is handled when the input command is received to this
function.
CB test mode
The function can also operate in circuit breaker learning mode. This mode confirms the
integrity of the wiring and prediction of time stamps of the function. This mode acts with co-
ordination of the breaker learning function. It accepts the coorBLSSX input signal and
CBTestMode inputs from breaker learning function to undergo the learning procedure.
CBTestMode gives an indication for circuit breaker learning mode to this function and the
coorBLSSX input presents the required output to be operated on.
coorBLSSX is a six-bit code, with each bit being either 0 or 1. The first three bits from the LSB
side gives the input for open command for the three phases and the rest three bits from MSB
side gives the input for close command for the three phases.
25 24 23 22 21 20
B Phase Y Phase R Phase B Phase Y Phase R Phase
close close close open open open
GUID-1AD197B9-D0F1-4635-9143-D8A043BD946E V1 EN-US
Figure 58: CB test mode

The coorBLSSX input conveys the strategy switching function the operation to be carried on.
If the value of coorBLSSX is 7, which means the first three inputs from the LSB side are high, it
conveys that it is a emergency trip condition for which all the CBs are operated simultaneously.
TIMEEXED
TIMEEXED is an IEC 61850 mandatory data object. SSCPOW generates this signal.
• Criteria or conditions for activating this signal: Whenever the contDelayExceeded setting
is enabled and the controller exceeds the specified maxContDelay setting time, the
TIMEEXED alarm is initiated. This condition arises when the IED takes a longer time to
respond to a controlled switching command.
• Activation Time: This signal remains active for 5 milliseconds, after which time it is
automatically reset.

Technical Manual
132
General calculation
Section 9 General calculation
9.1 Analog scaling ANSCAL GUID-B152E247-16D6-4D05-B85B-40A1D8756AE7 v1
9.1.1 Identification GUID-513EA31D-9E2F-456B-BA7A-2527E136D059 v1
Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device
number
Analog scaling ANSCAL - -
9.1.2 Functionality GUID-80971F0E-5815-4412-BF76-6CEF76E44AE8 v1
The Analog scaling ANSCAL function transforms an input signal, for example, from a
monitoring function or input interface, either through linear or non-linear scaling or
interpolation between known relational values for further use. ANSCAL function is divided into
three parts:
• Limit module: limits the input value to either LowLimit or HighLimit whenever the input
value falls below or exceeds the set limits.
• Chart function: scales the output value based on linear interpolation and constant
extrapolation.
• Equation function: evaluates the output as a function of the input based on the constants
declared in Equation 25.
y = ax m + bx n + c + d .e f × x
IECEQUATION-0091 V1 EN-US (Equation 25)
Where
x is the input
y is the output
a, b, c, d, e, f, m and n are constants
9.1.3 Function block GUID-0E692849-9DB6-48A4-9967-85F52FC33A24 v1
ANSCAL
BLOCK WARNING
BLKFUNC ANGSCALE
INSENSTS
INPUT

Technical Manual
General calculation
9.1.4 Signals
Table 88: ANSCAL Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BLKFUNC BOOLEAN 0 Block function
INSENSTS BOOLEAN 0 Input sensor status not healthy
INPUT REAL 0.0 Input signal
Table 89: ANSCAL Output signals

WARNING BOOLEAN Warning signal for out of range output.
ANGSCALE GROUP SIGNAL Group output containing scaled value and alarm
GUID-D34D4C65-22B1-424C-B9C0-412C2B8485EF v1
Table 90: Breakdown of ANSCAL group signal

OPSIGNAL REAL Analog output after conversion
ALARM BOOLEAN Combined alarm signal, TRUE (1) if any of the following conditions is
detected:
• Faulty sensor
• Settings for curve point input values in Chart mode are out of
sequence
• INPUT value is lower than LowLimit or higher than HighLimit
• BLKFUNC input is 1
SENSTSOUT BOOLEAN Sensor status output for IEC 61850 reporting purpose:
TRUE (1) – Sensor status is unhealthy
FALSE (0) – Sensor status is healthy
9.1.5 Settings
Table 91: ANSCAL Non group settings (basic)

On
FnType Chart - - Chart Functional mode selection
Equation
LowLimit -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 -1.0 Input signal lower limiting value
HighLimit -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 1.0 Input signal higher limiting value
LimitScaleVal Limit value - - Limit value Select output to be limited to scale
Limit value w/o value or default value in case the input
alm value is out of range
Default value

Technical Manual
General calculation

DefValue -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 0.000 Default value to be shown in output in
case of sensor status not healthy,
block, or input signal out of range (if
selected)
a -9999.999 - - 0.001 0.000 Constant a in equation output = ax^m
9999.999 + bx^n + c + d*e^(f*x)
b -9999.999 - - 0.001 0.000 Constant b in equation output = ax^m
9999.999 + bx^n + c + d*e^(f*x)
c -9999.999 - - 0.001 0.000 Constant c in equation output = ax^m
9999.999 + bx^n + c + d*e^(f*x)
d -9999.999 - - 0.001 0.000 Constant d in equation output = ax^m
9999.999 + bx^n + c + d*e^(f*x)
e -10.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Constant e in equation output = ax^m
+ bx^n + c + d*e^(f*x)
f -10.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 1.000 Constant f in equation output = ax^m
+ bx^n + c + d*e^(f*x)
m -10.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 1.000 Constant m in equation output =
ax^m + bx^n + c + d*e^(f*x)
n -10.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 1.000 Constant n in equation output = ax^m
+ bx^n + c + d*e^(f*x)
CurvePoints 2-8 - 1 2 Number of curve points to be
considered for interpolation
X1 -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Input value for curve point 1
Y1 -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Output value for curve point 1
9.1.6 Operation principle GUID-D7923CEE-68D3-4567-8672-7DB82CC7AC71 v1
Analog scaling ANSCAL function transforms an input signal, for example, from a monitoring
function or input interface, either through linear or non-linear scaling or interpolation between
known relational values for further use.
The overall functionality is defined in the logic diagram as shown in Figure 60. The limit
module limits the input value, whenever the input value falls below or exceeds the set limits.
The chart and equation function blocks scale the output value based on either linear

Technical Manual
General calculation
interpolation and constant extrapolation or as a function of the input based on the constants
declared. Use FnType setting to choose between Chart mode and Equation mode.
AnalogScaling_A
functionType limitScaleValue = defaultValue
NOT
block AND AND
NOT
inpSenSts NOT
OR
alarm
input Limit AND
NOT
Module block
input
curvePoints defaultValue output
inVal1 Analog Scaling output
T
lowLimit F
inVal2
highLimit
inVal3
limitScaleValue 200 blockFunc
inVal4
OR warning
block AND
inVal5 NOT
150
inVal6
inVal7 sensorStatusOut
output
block NOT
AND
inVal8 100
outVal1
outVal2 50
outVal3
outVal4
error
0
outVal5 0 20 40 60 80 100
outVal6 input
outVal7
outVal8
NOT
AND
a
b output
c
d y a. xm b.xn c d .e f . x
e
f
m
n
Figure 60: Functional overview of ANSCAL
9.1.6.1 Limit module GUID-8EF2E0E7-E719-45B2-9844-74CC7483E7FA v1
The limit module limits the input value to the range between the low limit and the high limit
values specified by the settings LowLimit and HighLimit. The ALARM output is set to high
whenever the input falls below the LowLimit or exceeds the HighLimit value and the output
value from limit module is restricted to LowLimit or HighLimit value respectively.
LimitScaleVal setting enables the user a choice to limit the output to scaled value or default
value as defined by setting DefValue, in case the input value exceeds the range defined by
LowLimit and HighLimit.
9.1.6.2 Chart function GUID-2AD060DE-E15D-4B93-95C4-3AF700B702B1 v1
Set FnType to Chart mode to enable this functionality. In this mode, the output is evaluated
based on linear interpolation and constant extrapolation. The function has eight settable
input/output relation values. These input and output values are specified by the settings
{X1,Y1} and {X2,Y2} up to {X8,Y8}. Set CurvePoints to select the required number of input and
output relations based on the functionality. The functionality provides linear interpolation
between the points and constant extrapolation beyond the defined points. The minimum
setting points required to define a linear relationship is 2 and is defined to be the minimum
value for CurvePoints.

Technical Manual
General calculation
The setting points shall be set in such a manner that X2 is greater than X1, X3 is
greater than X2 and so on till X8 is greater than X7. The settings of LowLimit
and HighLimit limit the input values. Hence the setting of X1 below LowLimit
results in output value for a limited proportional input value of LowLimit. Same
is the case for the last selected curve points based on the setting CurvePoints.
For example, if the input value is lower than X1 , the output is set to Y1. For every setting n for
CurvePoints defined, the output is set to Yn if the input is greater than Xn. For every input
value greater than X1 and less than Xn, the output is calculated according to the following
conditions:
Maximum incremental value of i starting from 2 till maximum of n (n ≤ 8):
Xi such that INPUT ≥ Xi and
Xi +1 such that INPUT < Xi+1
OUTPUT = Yi + (( INPUT - X i ) × (Yi +1 - Yi )) / ( X i +1 - X i )

The WARNING output goes high whenever the input signal is outside the compensation range
but still within the supervision limits. See Table 91.
Range of INPUT signal OPSIGNAL WARNING ALARM

INPUT < LowLimit Y1 or DefValue (as selected by 0 1
LimitScaleVal)
LowLimit ≤ INPUT < X1 Y1 1 0
X1 ≤ INPUT ≤ Xn scaled value 0 0
Xn < INPUT ≤ HighLimit Yn 1 0
INPUT > HighLimit Yn or DefValue (as selected by 0 1
LimitScaleVal)
9.1.6.3 Equation function GUID-4A294515-E959-4956-8364-A6D6728A59B7 v1
Set FnType to Equation mode to enable this functionality. In this mode, the output is
calculated as a function of the input based on the constants declared in equation 27:
y = ax m + bx n + c + d × e f × x
Where,
a,b,c,d,e,f,m and n = Constants (settings)
x = Input value
y = Output value
If x is large and m, n, e are not set to small, the output will overflow. Similarly, if
x can be negative then m and n must be natural numbers.
In equation mode, the WARNING output goes high when large output value numbers, typically
above 8388607 (absolute), are rounded to the last decimal point.

Technical Manual
General calculation
9.2 Double point input status time monitoring DPISTTIM GUID-7D43CC6A-D4C6-4812-BF8D-87E4ABED0D55 v1
9.2.1 Identification GUID-26CEB250-137A-469E-9FC9-3131E79B5200 v1
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identification identification number
Double point input status DPISTTIM - -
time monitoring
9.2.2 Functionality GUID-69D61F41-58D4-41FC-B487-405B9F43869D v1
The Double point indication status times DPISTTIM function computes the status times of a
double point indication (DPI) by counting the times since the last status changeovers. The
inputs for this function are two boolean signals of a DPI. The outputs provide the time either in
milliseconds, seconds, minutes, or hours from the last status changeover. DPISTTIM function
can be used for computing the idle times, that is, time since the last open and close operations
of a switch.
9.2.3 Function block GUID-084A5974-6295-4BFF-8ECD-A572351F0114 v1
DPISTTIM
BLOCK OPNTIME
BLKFUNC CLSDTIME
NC* ALMSTS
NO* CNTWRN
RSTTIMS
IEC12000032-1-vsd
Figure 61: DPISTTIM function block
9.2.4 Signals
Table 92: DPISTTIM Input signals

NC BOOLEAN 0 Status input information of NC contact in DPI
NO BOOLEAN 0 Status input information of NO contact in DPI
RSTTIMS BOOLEAN 0 Reset position timers to zero
Table 93: DPISTTIM Output signals

OPNTIME REAL Time count from previous closed status
CLSDTIME REAL Time count from previous open status
ALMSTS BOOLEAN Alarm for invalid status of input NO and input NC
CNTWRN BOOLEAN Warning for output having alarm stage since last update

Technical Manual
General calculation
9.2.5 Settings
Table 94: DPISTTIM Non group settings (basic)

On
TimeToAlm 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 0.000 Time setting to declare invalid or
faulty status alarm
ModeStsCntSenErr Reset to default - - Reset to default Setting mode for status counters
Freeze counters during sensor error condition
Keep counting
DefValue -999999.0 - - 1.0 0.0 Default value to be set upon reset
999999.0 depending on the errStsCountMode
TimeScale milliSeconds - - milliSeconds Setting for output times scale
Seconds selection
Minutes
Hours
9.2.6 Operation principle GUID-C6669B23-377E-4B59-86F4-F6CD8AC81AFF v1
The Double point indication status times DPISTTIM function computes the status times of a
double point indication (DPI) by counting the times since the last status changeovers. The
inputs for this function are two boolean signals of a DPI. DPISTTIM function is intended for
computing the idle times (that is, time since the last open and close operations) of a switch.
The function interprets DPI input combinations as switch status according to Table 95.
Table 95: Input status combination in DPISTTIM

NO NC Status
0 0 Invalid
0 1 Open
1 0 Closed
1 1 Invalid
Invalid input status combinations will generate an alarm or warning if applied for longer than a
grace period defined by TimeToAlm. ALMSTS directly indicates detection of an invalid input
status. CNTWRN indicates that an invalid condition has been detected even though the
outputs show valid time count values; it will be reset on a valid status transition.
The outputs provide the elapsed time from the last status changeover in the unit specified by
TimeScale (milliseconds, seconds, minutes, or hours). OPNTIME gives the time since the last
closed → open transition; CLSDTIME gives the time since the last open → closed transition.
A rising edge (0 to 1 change) on the RSTTIMS input will reset both OPNTIME and CLSDTIME to
0.0. The setting ModeStsCntSenErr controls the behavior of the internal counters and the
outputs when an invalid input status is detected for longer than TimeToAlm.
• If ‘Reset to default’ is selected then both counters will be reset to DefValue.

• If ‘Freeze counters’ is selected the counter outputs are frozen at the current values.
However, internally the counters continue as per the previous valid input status. If the
input status is restored to the same valid status, the outputs are re-activated to show the

Technical Manual
General calculation
updated counter values. If the input status is restored to the opposite valid status then
the counters behave as during a regular change between valid statuses.
• If ‘Keep counting’ is selected the counters continue counting the last valid status.
Table 96 summarizes the behavior of the DPISTTIM function block.
Table 96: DPISTTIM truth table

Input Previous input ModeStsCntSen Input status OPNTIME CLSDTIME ALMSTS CNTWR
status status Err before N
previous
invalid
Open Closed (Any) - Time count 0.0 0 0
from last
valid closed
→ open
status
change
Invalid Freeze Open Time count 0 1
counters from last
valid closed
Keep counting → open
status
change
Freeze Closed Time count 0 1
counters from last
invalid →
Keep counting open
status
change
Reset to (Any) Time count 0 0
default from last
invalid →
open
status
change
Closed Open (Any) - 0.0 Time count 0 0
from last
valid open →
closed status
change
Invalid Freeze Open Time count 0 1
counters from last
invalid →
Keep counting closed status
change
Freeze Closed Time count 0 1
counters from last
valid open →
Keep counting closed status
change
Reset to (Any) Time count 0 0
default from last
invalid →
closed status
change

Technical Manual
General calculation
Input Previous input ModeStsCntSen Input status OPNTIME CLSDTIME ALMSTS CNTWR
status status Err before N
previous
invalid
Invalid Open Freeze - OPNTIME 0.0 1 1
counters value
frozen at
the time of
detecting
invalid
status
Closed - 0.0 CLSDTIME 1 1
value frozen
at the time
of detecting
invalid
status
Open Keep counting - Time count 0.0 1 1
from last
valid closed
→ open
status
change
Closed - 0.0 Time count 1 1
from last
valid open →
closed status
change
(Any) Reset to - DefValue DefValue 1 0
default
Once started, the counters will internally continue the count as per the previous valid input
status even through a power cycle of the IED.
9.3 Binary status to analog conversion BINSTSAN GUID-DA82632E-9AA4-48AA-B156-7D9B47B69F62 v1
9.3.1 Identification GUID-24C267F0-E961-4524-B6F5-0AE7A24A1804 v1

Binary status signal to analog BINSTSAN - -
conversion
9.3.2 Functionality GUID-78A21286-3731-40C3-9733-1064149C4A0C v1
The binary status signal to analog conversion BINSTSAN function evaluates the equivalent
analog value for a combination of eight binary input signals that show the status levels of
analog quantities. The output signal value is used for further processing in other functions.
There are three modes which can be used to calculate output signals:

Technical Manual
General calculation
• 1 of n: only one of the inputs can be set to high. If more than one input is high, an error is
detected and the output value is set to the default output.
• Incremental: inputs can go high sequentially and the output value is a sum of the scaled
input values. If the inputs are not going high sequentially, an error is detected as the
inputs are invalid and the output value is set to the default output.
• Summation: one or more inputs are high in a random order and the output is the
cumulative sum of the scaled input values.
At least one input must be high for a valid output. Else, NOINP signal is set to
TRUE and the output value is set to the default output.
9.3.3 Function block GUID-6AAE3296-50DA-44D9-998F-E6BA6487CCE7 v1
BINSTSAN
BLOCK NOINP
BLKFUNC ERROR
INPUT1 ANALOUT
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
9.3.4 Signals
Table 97: BINSTSAN Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1 status
Table 98: BINSTSAN Output signals

NOINP BOOLEAN Signal for input not detected
ERROR BOOLEAN Signal for indicating wrong combination of inputs detected
ANALOUT REAL Analog output after conversion

Technical Manual
General calculation
9.3.5 Settings
Table 99: BINSTSAN Non group settings (basic)

On
Mode 1 of n - - 1 of n Mode selection
Incremental
Summation
DefValue -999999.999 - - 0.001 0.000 Default Value
999999.999
InputScale1 -999999.999 - - 0.001 0.000 Equivalent output for input status 1
999999.999
999999.999
999999.999
999999.999
999999.999
999999.999
999999.999
999999.999
9.3.6 Operation principle GUID-5109DC7C-CA16-46C3-B376-F57F820ECDB7 v1
The binary status signal to analog conversion BINSTSAN function evaluates the equivalent
analog value for a combination of eight binary input signals that shows the status levels of
analog quantities. The output signal value is used for further processing in other functions.
The overall functionality is defined in the logic diagram as shown in Figure 63.

Technical Manual
General calculation
BLKFUNC
NOINP
BLOCK
INPUT1
ERROR
INPUT2
INPUT3
ANALOUT
INPUT4
Logic
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
InputScale2
InputScale3
InputScale5
InputScale1
InputScale4
InputScale6
InputScale7
InputScale8
Mode
Figure 63: Functional overview of BINSTSAN

BINSTSAN functionality is explained using an example, where the status switches of an analog
source are connected to BINSTSAN function and is configured for input scaling a shown in
Table 100.
If the output value exceeds 8388607, an error is detected and the ERROR
output is set to TRUE.
Table 100: BINSTSAN example settings

Input InputScale
1 5
2 10
3 20
4 40
5 80
6 160
7 320
8 640
9.3.6.1 Calculating output values using 1 of n mode GUID-29B09528-C9BE-43A2-9964-79C2385B0F55 v1
Set Mode to 1 of n to enable this functionality. In this mode, only one of the inputs can go high
at any given time. If more than one input goes high, an error is detected and the ERROR output
is set TRUE. If none of the inputs are high, the input is not detected and the NOINP output is
set to TRUE. The output is set to the default output if ERROR and/or NOINP outputs are TRUE.
The output evaluated as per the setting of input mode is as shown in Table 101.

Technical Manual
General calculation
Table 101: BINSTSAN setting mode 1 of n
Input Status
Mode - 1 of n
1 1 0 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0 0
4 0 0 0 0 1
5 0 0 1 0 0
6 0 0 0 0 0
7 0 0 0 0 0
8 0 0 0 1 1
Output 5 10 80 640 DefValue
9.3.6.2 Calculating output values using incremental mode GUID-A61587EE-8BBB-487E-BB3C-FDD692FDC160 v1
Set Mode to Incremental to enable this functionality. In this mode, inputs are set to high
sequentially starting with INPUT1, and the output value is a sum of the scaled input values. If
the inputs are not set to high sequentially, an error is detected as the inputs are invalid and the
ERROR output is set TRUE. If none of the inputs are high, the input is not detected and the
NOINP output is set to TRUE. The output is set to the default output if ERROR and/or NOINP
outputs are TRUE. The output evaluated as per the setting of input mode is as shown in Table
102.
Table 102: BINSTSAN setting mode Incremental
Input Status
Mode - Incremental
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 0 1 1 1 1
3 0 0 1 1 0
4 0 0 1 1 1
5 0 0 1 1 1
6 0 0 1 1 1
7 0 0 1 1 1
8 0 0 0 1 1
Output 5 15 635 1275 DefValue
9.3.6.3 Calculating output values using summation mode GUID-61946494-15BC-49D6-9C21-7BA84AA0E6A6 v1
Set Mode to Summation to enable this functionality. In this mode, one or more inputs can be
high in a random order and the output is the cumulative sum of the scaled input values. If none
of the inputs are high, the input is not detected and the NOINP output is set to TRUE. The
output is set to the default output if ERROR and/or NOINP outputs are TRUE. The output
evaluated as per the setting of input mode is as shown in Table 103.

Technical Manual
General calculation
Table 103: BINSTSAN setting mode Summation
Input Status
Mode - Summation
1 1 0 1 0 1
2 0 1 1 0 1
3 0 0 0 0 0
4 0 0 0 0 1
5 0 0 0 0 1
6 0 0 0 0 1
7 0 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 1 1
Output 5 10 15 640 1255

Technical Manual
Logic
Section 10 Logic
10.1 Configurable logic blocks
10.1.1 Standard configurable logic blocks
10.1.1.1 Functionality D0E6709T201305151403 v2
A number of logic blocks and timers are available for the user to adapt the configuration to the
specific application needs.
• OR function block. Each block has 6 inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.
• INVERTER function blocks that inverts the input signal.
• PULSETIMER function block outputs a pulse of settable duration, triggered by a positive-

going edge on its input.
• GATE function block passes a signal from the input to the output, depending on its
setting.
• XOR function block. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.
• LOOPDELAY function block is used to delay the input signal one execution cycle.
• TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input signal,
with settable time delay.
• AND function block. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is inverted
• SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting
controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state it was, after a power
interruption. The SET input has priority if both SET and RESET inputs are active
simultaneously.
• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting
controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state it was, after a power
interruption. The RESET input has priority if both SET and RESET are active
simultaneously.
10.1.1.2 OR function block
Identification D0E6881T201305151403 v1

Technical Manual
Logic

OR Function block OR - -
Functionality D0E7110T201305151403 v1
The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The
OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output
signal is 1 if at least one input signal is 1.
Function block D0E6788T201305151403 v1
OR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
D0E13099T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 64: OR function block
Signals D0E7308T201305151403 v1
Table 104: OR Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
D0E7309T201305151403 v1
Table 105: OR Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal
Settings D0E6904T201305151403 v1
10.1.1.3 Inverter function block INVERTER

Inverter function block INVERTER - -

Technical Manual
Logic
INVERTER
INPUT OUT
D0E13096T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 65: INVERTER function block
Signals D0E7277T201305151403 v1
Table 106: INVERTER Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal
D0E7278T201305151403 v1
Table 107: INVERTER Output signals

Settings D0E6904T201305151403 v1
10.1.1.4 PULSETIMER function block

PULSETIMER function block PULSETIMER - -
Triggered by a positive-going edge (logical 0 to 1 transition) on its input, PULSETIMER outputs
a pulse of settable duration. While the output is on, further transitions on the input signal will
be ignored.
PULSETIMER
INPUT OUT
D0E13108T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 66: PULSETIMER function block
Signals D0E7315T201305151403 v1
Table 108: PULSETIMER Input signals

D0E7316T201305151403 v1

Technical Manual
Logic
Table 109: PULSETIMER Output signals

Settings D0E7317T201305151403 v1
Table 110: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)

t 0.000 - s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length
90000.000
10.1.1.5 Controllable gate function block GATE

Controllable gate function block GATE - -
The GATE function block is used for controlling if a signal should pass from the input to the
output or not, depending on the setting.
GATE
INPUT OUT
D0E13120T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 67: GATE function block
Signals D0E7274T201305151403 v1
Table 111: GATE Input signals

D0E7275T201305151403 v1
Table 112: GATE Output signals

Settings D0E7276T201305151403 v1
Table 113: GATE Group settings (basic)

On

Technical Manual
Logic
10.1.1.6 Exclusive OR function block XOR

Exclusive OR function block XOR - -
The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output
signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same.
XOR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
D0E13111T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 68: XOR function block
Signals D0E7313T201305151403 v1
Table 114: XOR Input signals

D0E7314T201305151403 v1
Table 115: XOR Output signals

Settings D0E6904T201305151403 v1
10.1.1.7 Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY D0E6905T201305151403 v1
D0E6906T201305151403 v1

Logic loop delay function block LOOPDELAY - -
D0E6907T201305151403 v1
The Logic loop delay function block (LOOPDELAY) function is used to delay the input signal
one execution cycle.

Technical Manual
Logic
LOOPDELAY
INPUT OUT
D0E13123T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 69: LOOPDELAY function block
Signals D0E7279T201305151403 v1
Table 116: LOOPDELAY Input signals

D0E7307T201305151403 v1
Table 117: LOOPDELAY Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output signal, signal is delayed one execution cycle
Settings D0E6908T201305151403 v1
10.1.1.8 Timer function block TIMERSET

Timer function block TIMERSET - -
The function block TIMERSET has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input
signal. The timer has a settable time delay (t).
Input
t t
On
Off
t t
time
D0E12352T201305151403-1-en.vsd
D0E12352T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 70: TIMERSET Status diagram

Technical Manual
Logic
TIMERSET
INPUT ON
OFF
D0E13105T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 71: TIMERSET function block
Signals D0E7310T201305151403 v1
Table 118: TIMERSET Input signals

D0E7311T201305151403 v1
Table 119: TIMERSET Output signals

ON BOOLEAN Output signal, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output signal, drop-out delayed
Settings D0E7312T201305151403 v1
Table 120: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)

On
t 0.000 - s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n
90000.000
10.1.1.9 AND function block

AND function block AND - -
The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The
AND function block has four inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The
output signal is 1 if all input signals are 1.
Default value on all four inputs are logical 1 which makes it possible for the user to just use the
required number of inputs and leave the rest un-connected. The output OUT has a default
value 0 initially, which suppresses one cycle pulse if the function has been put in the wrong
execution order.

Technical Manual
Logic
AND
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
D0E13102T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 72: AND function block
Signals D0E7261T201305151403 v1
Table 121: AND Input signals

D0E7262T201305151403 v1
Table 122: AND Output signals

Settings D0E6904T201305151403 v1
10.1.1.10 Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY

Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY - -
The Set-Reset function SRMEMORY is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an output
from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one is
inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return to
the state it had before or if it will be reset. For a Set-Reset flip-flop, SET input has higher
priority over RESET input.

Technical Manual
Logic
Table 123: Truth table for the Set-Reset (SRMEMORY) function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT
1 0 1 0
0 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
SRMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT
D0E13114T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 73: SRMEMORY function block
Signals D0E7304T201305151403 v1
Table 124: SRMEMORY Input signals

SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset
D0E7305T201305151403 v1
Table 125: SRMEMORY Output signals

Settings D0E7306T201305151403 v1
Table 126: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory
On function
10.1.1.11 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY

Reset-set with memory function RSMEMORY - -
block

Technical Manual
Logic
The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory that can
reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY function block has two
outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power
interruption will return to the state it had before or if it will be reset. For a Reset-Set flip-flop,
RESET input has higher priority over SET input.
Table 127: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block

RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1
RSMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT
D0E13117T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 74: RSMEMORY function block
Signals D0E7298T201305151403 v1
Table 128: RSMEMORY Input signals

SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset
D0E7299T201305151403 v1
Table 129: RSMEMORY Output signals

Settings D0E7300T201305151403 v1
Table 130: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory
On function

Technical Manual
Logic
D0E7189T201305151403 v1
Table 131: Configurable logic blocks

Logic block Quantity Range or value Accuracy
with cycle
time
5 ms 20 ms 100 ms
AND 60 60 160 - -
OR 60 60 160 - -
XOR 10 10 20 - -
INVERTER 30 30 80 - -
SRMEMORY 10 10 20 - -
RSMEMORY 10 10 20 - -
GATE 10 10 20 - -
PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms for
20 ms cycle time
TIMERSET 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms for
20 ms cycle time
LOOPDELAY 10 10 20
10.2 Fixed signals FXDSIGN
D0E7202T201305151403 v1

Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -
The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in
the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other function blocks to a
certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer, floating point, string types of
signals are available.
FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF
IEC09000037.vsd
D0E13012T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 75: FXDSIGN function block

Technical Manual
Logic
10.2.4 Signals
D0E7259T201305151403 v1
Table 132: FXDSIGN Output signals

OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off
10.2.5 Settings
D0E7260T201305151403 v1
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).
There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
• OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value

• ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
• INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
• INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
• INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
• REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value
• STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value
• ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
• GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value
10.3 Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I
D0E5597T201305151403 v1

Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -
10.3.2 FunctionalityBoolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I D0E5278T201305151403 v1
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical)
signals into an integer.

Technical Manual
Logic
B16I
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
D0E11281T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 76: B16I function block
10.3.4 Signals
D0E5610T201305151403 v1
Table 133: B16I Input signals

IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
D0E5612T201305151403 v1
Table 134: B16I Output signals

OUT INTEGER Output value

Technical Manual
Logic
10.3.5 Settings D0E4075T201305151403 v1
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600)
10.3.6 Monitored data

D0E5611T201305151403 v1
Table 135: B16I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16 binary

(logical) signals into an integer, with IN1 mapped to the least significant bit. The BLOCK input
will freeze the output at the last value.
10.4 Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node

representation B16IFCVI
D0E5598T201305151403 v1

Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16IFCVI - -
with logic node representation
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function B16IFCVI is used to
transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. The block input will freeze the
output at the last value.

Technical Manual
Logic
B16IFCVI
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
D0E11388T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 77: B16IFCVI function block
10.4.4 Signals
D0E5723T201305151403 v1
Table 136: B16IFCVI Input signals

D0E5725T201305151403 v1
Table 137: B16IFCVI Output signals

OUT INTEGER Output value

Technical Manual
Logic
10.4.5 Settings D0E4076T201305151403 v1
Manager (PCM600)

D0E5724T201305151403 v1
Table 138: B16IFCVI Monitored data

OUT INTEGER - - Output value
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function (B16IFCVI) is used to
transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. The BLOCK input will freeze the
output at the last value.
10.5 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A
D0E5574T201305151403 v1

Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A - -
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16A is used to transform an integer into a set of 16
binary (logical) signals.
IB16A
BLOCK OUT1
INP OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
D0E11284T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 78: IB16A function block

Technical Manual
Logic
10.5.4 Signals
D0E5613T201305151403 v1
Table 139: IB16A Input signals

INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input
D0E5614T201305151403 v1
Table 140: IB16A Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
10.5.5 Settings D0E4794T201305151403 v1
Manager (PCM600)
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16A) is used to transform an integer into a set of
16 binary (logical) signals, with the least significant bit mapped to OUT1. IB16A function is
designed for receiving the integer input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs
at the last value.

Technical Manual
Logic
10.6 Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation IB16FCVB
D0E5575T201305151403 v1
Function description IEC 61850 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16FCVB - -
with logic node representation
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function IB16FCVB is used to
transform an integer to 16 binary (logic) signals.
IB16FCVB function can receive remote values over IEC61850 when the operator position input
PSTO is in position remote. The block input will freeze the output at the last value.
IB16FCVB
BLOCK OUT1
PSTO OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
D0E11385T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 79: IB16FCVB function block
10.6.4 Signals
D0E5615T201305151403 v1
Table 141: IB16FCVB Input signals

PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection

Technical Manual
Logic
D0E5616T201305151403 v1
Table 142: IB16FCVB Output signals

10.6.5 Settings D0E4077T201305151403 v1
Manager (PCM600)
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function (IB16FCVB) is used to
transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. IB16FCVB function can receive an
integer from a station computer – for example, over IEC 61850. The BLOCK input will freeze the
logical outputs at the last value.
The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer number can be
written to the block while in “Remote”. If PSTO is in ”Off” or ”Local”, then no change is applied
to the outputs.

Technical Manual
166
Monitoring
Section 11 Monitoring
11.1 Measurements
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting to
the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for example, via IEC 61850.
The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power, reactive power,
currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient production, transmission
and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the system operator fast and easy overview
of the present status of the power system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and
commissioning of protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and
connection of instrument transformers (CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic
comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper
operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify
proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function.
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual hardware
(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit, low limit,
high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, that is, the
measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise in
the inputs. There are no interconnections regarding any settings or parameters, neither
between functions nor between signals within each function.
Zero clampings are handled by ZeroDb for each signal separately for each of the functions. For
example, the zero clamping of U12 is handled by ULZeroDb in VMMXU, zero clamping of I1 is
handled by ILZeroDb in CMMXU.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when
change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the
last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based on
periodic reporting.
The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:
• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

• PF: power factor
• U: phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
• I: phase current amplitude
• F: power system frequency
The output values are displayed in the local HMI under Main menu/Tests/Function status/
Monitoring/CVMMXN/Outputs
The measuring functions CMMXU, VNMMXU and VMMXU provide physical quantities:
• I: phase currents (amplitude and angle) (CMMXU)

• U: voltages (phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) (VMMXU,
VNMMXU)

Technical Manual
Monitoring
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of
rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware, (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:
• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, amplitude and angle)

• U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, amplitude and angle).
The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental

frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage signals. The
measured power quantities are available either, as instantaneously calculated quantities or,
averaged values over a period of time (low pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.
11.1.2 Measurements CVMMXN
11.1.2.1 Identification
D0E5622T201305151403 v1

Measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f
D0E12769T201305151403 V1 EN-
US
11.1.2.2 Function block D0E5617T201305151403 v1
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the
logic configuration made in PCM600.
CVMMXN
I3P* S
U3P* S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE
IEC08000222.vsd
D0E12944T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 80: CVMMXN function block

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.1.2.3 Signals
D0E5935T201305151403 v1
Table 143: CVMMXN Input signals

I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
D0E5936T201305151403 v1
Table 144: CVMMXN Output signals

S REAL Apparent power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent power range
P_INST REAL Active power
P REAL Active power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER Active power range
Q_INST REAL Reactive power
Q REAL Reactive power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive power range
PF REAL Power factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER Power factor range
ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage
U REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE INTEGER Calcuated voltage range
I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range
F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.1.2.4 Settings
D0E5937T201305151403 v1
Table 145: CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

On
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - L1, L2, L3 Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
PowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 - 0.001 1.000 Amplitude factor to scale power
calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle compensation for phase shift
between measured I & U
k 0.00 - 1.00 - 0.01 0.00 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement
SLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
SMax 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
SRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
PMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
PRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
QMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
QMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
QRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PFMin -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value
PFMax -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Maximum value
PFRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UMin 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UMax 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
URepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IMin 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase

Technical Manual
Monitoring

IRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
FrMin 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
FrMax 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value
FrRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Table 146: CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

SDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
SHiHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
PHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range
(common for all limits)
PDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
PZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
PHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
PLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
PLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range
QDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
QZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
QHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
QHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
QLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
QLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range
UGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of Ubase
PFDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of Ibase
PFHiHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.800 High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -0.800 Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)

Technical Manual
Monitoring

PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range
UDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
UZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
UHiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
ULowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
ULowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
ULimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range
IDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
IZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
IHiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
ILowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range
FrDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
FrHiHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 65.000 High High limit (physical value)
FrHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 63.000 High limit (physical value)
FrLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 47.000 Low limit (physical value)
FrLowLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage
at 5% of Ur
at 30% of Ur
at 100% of Ur
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current
at 5% of Ir
at 30% of Ir
at 100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of
Ir
Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100%
of Ir

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.1.2.5 Monitored data

D0E5962T201305151403 v1
Table 147: CVMMXN Monitored data

S REAL - MVA Apparent power magnitude of
deadband value
P REAL - MW Active power magnitude of deadband
value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power magnitude of
deadband value
PF REAL - - Power factor magnitude of deadband
value
U REAL - kV Calculated voltage magnitude of
deadband value
I REAL - A Calculated current magnitude of
deadband value
F REAL - Hz System frequency magnitude of
deadband value
11.1.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU
D0E5963T201305151403 v1

Phase current measurement CMMXU -
D0E12771T201305151403 V1 EN-
US
CMMXU
I3P IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL
D0E12953T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 81: CMMXU function block

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.1.3.3 Signals
D0E5971T201305151403 v1
Table 148: CMMXU Input signals

SIGNAL
D0E5972T201305151403 v1
Table 149: CMMXU Output signals

IL1 REAL IL1 Amplitude
IL1RANG INTEGER IL1 Amplitude range
IL1ANGL REAL IL1 Angle
11.1.3.4 Settings
D0E5973T201305151403 v1
Table 150: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

On
Value groups
ILDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
ILMax 0 - 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value
ILRepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
ILAngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
Table 151: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

ILZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
ILHiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1200 High High limit (physical value)
ILHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1100 High limit (physical value)
ILLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
ILLowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)

Technical Manual
Monitoring

ILMin 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value
ILLimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
at 5% of Ir
at 30% of Ir
at 100% of Ir
Ir
Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100%
of Ir

D0E5985T201305151403 v1
Table 152: CMMXU Monitored data

IL1 REAL - A IL1 Amplitude
IL1ANGL REAL - deg IL1 Angle
11.1.4 Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU
D0E5979T201305151403 v1

Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -
D0E12775T201305151403 V1 EN-
US

Technical Manual
Monitoring
VMMXU
U3P* UL12
UL12RANG
UL12ANGL
UL23
UL23RANG
UL23ANGL
UL31
UL31RANG
UL31ANGL
D0E12947T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 82: VMMXU function block
11.1.4.3 Signals
D0E5986T201305151403 v1
Table 153: VMMXU Input signals

SIGNAL
D0E5988T201305151403 v1
Table 154: VMMXU Output signals

UL12 REAL UL12 Amplitude
UL12RANG INTEGER UL12 Amplitude range
UL12ANGL REAL UL12 Angle
UL31RANG INTEGER UL31Amplitude range
11.1.4.4 Settings
D0E5989T201305151403 v2
Table 155: VMMXU Non group settings (basic)

On
Value groups
ULDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
ULMax 0 - 4000000 V 1 170000 Maximum value
ULRepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
ULAngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Table 156: VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

ULZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
ULHiHiLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 160000 High High limit (physical value)
ULHiLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 150000 High limit (physical value)
ULLowLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 125000 Low limit (physical value)
ULLowLowLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 115000 Low Low limit (physical value)
ULMin 0 - 4000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
ULLimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is

D0E5987T201305151403 v1
Table 157: VMMXU Monitored data

UL12 REAL - kV UL12 Amplitude
UL12ANGL REAL - deg UL12 Angle
11.1.5 Current sequence component measurement CMSQI
D0E5982T201305151403 v1

Current sequence component CMSQI -
measurement
I1, I2, I0
D0E12777T201305151403 V1 EN-
US

Technical Manual
Monitoring
CMSQI
I3P* 3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL
D0E12941T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 83: CMSQI function block
11.1.5.3 Signals
D0E5990T201305151403 v1
Table 158: CMSQI Input signals

SIGNAL
D0E6040T201305151403 v1
Table 159: CMSQI Output signals

3I0 REAL 3I0 Amplitude
3I0RANG INTEGER 3I0 Amplitude range
3I0ANGL REAL 3I0 Angle
I1 REAL I1 Amplitude
I1RANG INTEGER I1Amplitude range
I1ANGL REAL I1 Angle
I2 REAL I2 Amplitude
I2RANG INTEGER I2 Amplitude range
I2ANGL REAL I2Angle
11.1.5.4 Settings
D0E6041T201305151403 v1
Table 160: CMSQI Non group settings (basic)

On
3I0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
3I0Min 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value
3I0Max 0 - 500000 A 1 3300 Maximum value
3I0RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is

Technical Manual
Monitoring

3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
I1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
I1Min 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value
I1Max 0 - 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value
I1RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
I2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
I2Min 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value
I2Max 0 - 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value
I2RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
Table 161: CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
3I0HiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 3600 High High limit (physical value)
3I0HiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 3300 High limit (physical value)
3I0LowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
3I0LowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
I1HiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1200 High High limit (physical value)
I1HiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1100 High limit (physical value)
I1LowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
I1LowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
I2HiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1200 High High limit (physical value)
I2HiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1100 High limit (physical value)
I2LowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
I2LowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)

Technical Manual
Monitoring

D0E5991T201305151403 v1
Table 162: CMSQI Monitored data

3I0 REAL - A 3I0 Amplitude
3I0ANGL REAL - deg 3I0 Angle
I1 REAL - A I1 Amplitude
I1ANGL REAL - deg I1 Angle
I2 REAL - A I2 Amplitude
I2ANGL REAL - deg I2Angle
11.1.6 Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI
D0E6005T201305151403 v1

Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI -
U1, U2, U0
D0E12773T201305151403 V1 EN-
US
VMSQI
U3P* 3U0
3U0RANG
3U0ANGL
U1
U1RANG
U1ANGL
U2
U2RANG
U2ANGL
D0E12950T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 84: VMSQI function block
11.1.6.3 Signals
D0E6042T201305151403 v1
Table 163: VMSQI Input signals

SIGNAL

Technical Manual
Monitoring
D0E6044T201305151403 v1
Table 164: VMSQI Output signals

3U0 REAL 3U0 Amplitude
3U0RANG INTEGER 3U0 Amplitude range
3U0ANGL REAL 3U0 Angle
U1 REAL U1 Amplitude
U1RANG INTEGER U1 Amplitude range
U1ANGL REAL U1 Angle
U2 REAL U2 Amplitude
U2RANG INTEGER U2 Amplitude range
U2ANGL REAL U2 Angle
11.1.6.4 Settings
D0E6045T201305151403 v1
Table 165: VMSQI Non group settings (basic)

On
3U0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
3U0Min 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
3U0Max 0 - 2000000 V 1 318000 Maximum value
3U0RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
3U0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
3U0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
U1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
U1Min 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
U1Max 0 - 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value
U1RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
U2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
U2Min 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
U2Max 0 - 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value

Technical Manual
Monitoring

U2RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
U2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
Table 166: VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

3U0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
3U0HiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 288000 High High limit (physical value)
3U0HiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 258000 High limit (physical value)
3U0LowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 213000 Low limit (physical value)
3U0LowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 198000 Low Low limit (physical value)
U1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
U1HiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 96000 High High limit (physical value)
U1HiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 86000 High limit (physical value)
U1LowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 71000 Low limit (physical value)
U1LowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 66000 Low Low limit (physical value)
U1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
U2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
U2HiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 96000 High High limit (physical value)
U2HiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 86000 High limit (physical value)
U2LowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 71000 Low limit (physical value)
U2LowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 66000 Low Low limit (physical value)

D0E6043T201305151403 v1
Table 167: VMSQI Monitored data

3U0 REAL - kV 3U0 Amplitude
3U0ANGL REAL - deg 3U0 Angle
U1 REAL - kV U1 Amplitude
U1ANGL REAL - deg U1 Angle
U2 REAL - kV U2 Amplitude
U2ANGL REAL - deg U2 Angle

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.1.7 Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU
D0E6008T201305151403 v1

Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -
D0E12775T201305151403 V1 EN-
US
VNMMXU
U3P* UL1
UL1RANG
UL1ANGL
UL2
UL2RANG
UL2ANGL
UL3
UL3RANG
UL3ANGL
D0E12956T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 85: VNMMXU function block
11.1.7.3 Signals
D0E6046T201305151403 v1
Table 168: VNMMXU Input signals

SIGNAL
D0E6048T201305151403 v1
Table 169: VNMMXU Output signals

UL1 REAL UL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL1ANGL REAL UL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.1.7.4 Settings
D0E6049T201305151403 v2
Table 170: VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
Value groups
UDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
UMax 0 - 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value
URepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
ULimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
UAngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
Table 171: VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

UZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
UHiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 96000 High High limit (physical value)
UHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 86000 High limit (physical value)
ULowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 71000 Low limit (physical value)
ULowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 66000 Low Low limit (physical value)
UMin 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value

D0E6047T201305151403 v1
Table 172: VNMMXU Monitored data

UL1 REAL - kV UL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
UL1ANGL REAL - deg UL1 Angle, magnitude of reported
value
UL2 REAL - kV UL2 Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
value
UL3 REAL - kV UL3 Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
value

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.1.8.1 Measurement supervision D0E6028T201305151403 v1
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further
process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks. The
number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and built-in
options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
• Locally by means of the local HMI

• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
• Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report function
Phase angle reference D0E6271T201305151403 v1

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General setting
parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference. The PhaseAngleRef is set in local HMI under:
Configuration/Analog modules/Reference channel service values.
Zero point clamping D0E6117T201305151403 v1

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise in the
input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general setting (XZeroDb where X
equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this
measurement supervision zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping
used for the measurement values within CVMMXN.
Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity D0E6118T201305151403 v1

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function block by
means of four defined operating thresholds, see Figure 86. The monitoring has two different
modes of operating:
• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or High-high
limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim) or
Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
X_RANGE is illustrated in Figure 86.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0 t
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
en05000657.vsd
D0E11991T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 86: Presentation of operating limits

Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output
signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit
exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may be connected to a
measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement supervision as binary
signals.
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to Figure 86.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the
operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring channel
separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.
Actual value of the measured quantity D0E6125T201305151403 v1

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement
is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting of the value to the
higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modes
are available:
• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)
Cyclic reporting D0E6126T201305151403 v1

The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting (XRepTyp).
The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or integral dead-band
reporting.
In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when measured
value passes any of the defined threshold limits.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Y
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4
Y1 Y5
t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)
t
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Value 5
en05000500.vsd
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt
D0E12000T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 87: Periodic reporting
Amplitude dead-band supervision D0E6129T201305151403 v1

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is larger
than the ±ΔY pre-defined limits that are set by user (UDbRepIn), then the measuring channel
reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the information flow to a minimum
necessary. Figure 88 shows an example with the amplitude dead-band supervision. The
picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time
interval of one execution cycle from each other.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Value Reported
Y

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 DY
DY
Y2 DY
DY
DY
DY
Y1
99000529.vsd
D0E12009T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 88: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set around it.
The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the ±ΔY
set limits.
Integral dead-band reporting D0E6136T201305151403 v1

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit
(XDbRepInt), Figure 89, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band supervision is
shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated
with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
The last value reported, Y1 in Figure 89 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A
difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is
multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integral
values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is
reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3,
Y4 and Y5).
The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with small
variations that can last for relatively long periods.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
(1st) Value
Value Reported Y5
A Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported
t
99000530.vsd
D0E12012T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 89: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision
11.1.8.2 Measurements CVMMXN
Mode of operation D0E6143T201305151403 v1

The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage
input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and calculate
above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs
connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a parameter setting, which one of the
nine available measuring modes shall be used within the function. Available options are
summarized in the following table:
Set value Formula used for complex, Formula used for voltage Comment
for three-phase power calculation and current magnitude
parameter calculation
“Mode”
1 L1, L2, L3 Used when three phase-to-
* * *
S = U L1 × I L1 + U L 2 × I L 2 + U L 3 × I L 3 U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3 earth voltages are available
D0E11755T201305151403 V1 EN-US
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3
D0E11757T201305151403 V1 EN-US
2 Arone Used when three two

S = U L1 L 2 × I L*1 - U L 2 L 3 × I L* 3 U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2 phase-to-phase voltages
are available
(Equation 28)
D0E11759T201305151403 V1 EN-US
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2
D0E11761T201305151403 V1 EN-US (Equation
29)
3 PosSeq Used when only
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq
*
U = 3 × U PosSeq symmetrical three phase
power shall be measured
(Equation 30)
D0E11763T201305151403 V1 EN-US
I = I PosSeq
31)

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Set value Formula used for complex, Formula used for voltage Comment
for three-phase power calculation and current magnitude
parameter calculation
“Mode”
4 L1L2 Used when only UL1L2
S = U L1 L 2 × ( I L*1 - I L* 2 ) U = U L1 L 2 phase-to-phase voltage is
available
(Equation 32)
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2
D0E11896T201305151403 V1 EN-US

33)
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L* 2 - I L* 3 ) U = U L2 L3 phase-to-phase voltage is
available
(Equation
I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2
D0E11900T201305151403 V1 EN-US
34)
35)
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L* 3 - I L*1 ) U = U L 3 L1 phase-to-phase voltage is
available
(Equation 36)
I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2
D0E11904T201305151403 V1 EN-US

37)
7 L1 Used when only UL1 phase-
S = 3 × U L1 × I L*1 U = 3 × U L1 to-earth voltage is
available
(Equation 38)
I = I L1
D0E11908T201305151403 V1 EN-US

39)
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L* 2 U = 3 × U L2 to-earth voltage is
available
(Equation 40)
I = IL2
D0E11912T201305151403 V1 EN-US

41)
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L* 3 U = 3 × U L3 to-earth voltage is
available
(Equation 42)
I = I L3
D0E11916T201305151403 V1 EN-US

43)
* means complex conjugated value
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the measurement
function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes that is, from 3 to 9 it
calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully
symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are
calculated in accordance with the following formulas:
P = Re( S )
D0E11920T201305151403 V1 EN-US (Equation 44)

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Q = Im( S )
S = S = P2 + Q2
PF = cosj = P
S
Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function are
provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage phasors. Binary
output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary
output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is leading the voltage phasor.
Each analogue output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output
signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
Calibration of analog inputs D0E6257T201305151403 v1

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to get class
0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant
and linear in between, see example in Figure 90.
D0E12329T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 90: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the
amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Low pass filtering D0E6228T201305151403 v1

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to
introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I and power
factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured
quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
X = k × X Old + (1 - k ) × X Calculated
where:
X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle
XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle
k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately
given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k is set to value
bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be determined separately
for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.
Zero point clamping D0E6231T201305151403 v1

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not
present, the amplitude level for current and voltage measurement is forced to zero. When
either current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for
power (P, Q & S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement
supervision functionality, included in the CVMMXN function, is using these values the zero
clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero point
clamping within measurement supervision, see section "Measurement supervision").
Compensation facility D0E6236T201305151403 v1

In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete measurement
chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is possible to perform on
site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by setting the complex constant
which is then internally used within the function to multiply the calculated complex apparent
power S. This constant is set as amplitude (setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value
1.000) and angle (setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values
for these two parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated
value (complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating
range (for example, around rated power) can be done at site. However, to perform this
calibration it is necessary to have an external power meter with high accuracy class available.
Directionality D0E6237T201305151403 v1
CTStartPoint defines if the CTs earthing point is located towards or from the protected object
under observation. If everything is properly set power is always measured towards protection
object.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Busbar
IED
P Q
Protected
Object
D0E12357T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 91: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow
from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values when they
flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of the power
transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have actually opposite
directional convention for active and reactive power measurements. This can be easily
achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the
active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object
towards the busbar.
Frequency D0E6242T201305151403 v1
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained from the
pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output.
11.1.8.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU D0E6243T201305151403 v1
The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-phase current
input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can be
calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs and
IEC 61850. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated
current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see
Figure 90.
Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitude output
has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The supervision output signal is an
integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.1.8.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXU D0E6252T201305151403 v1
The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool
to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comes to class 0.5
calibrations, see above.
The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs
and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ULxy_RANG). The
supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement
supervision".
11.1.8.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI D0E6266T201305151403 v1
The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or voltage

(VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other than X_RANG, are
calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate the signals. Input
signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred to corresponding output.
Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs
(voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a corresponding
supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".
11.1.9 Technical data

D0E6038T201305151403 v1
Table 173: CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (0.1-1.5) ×Ur ± 0.5% of Ur at U£Ur
± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Connected current (0.2-4.0) × Ir ± 0.5% of Ir at I £ Ir

± 0.5% of I at I > Ir
Active power, P 0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur ± 1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir ± 1.0% of S at S > Sr
Reactive power, Q 0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur ± 1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir ± 1.0% of S at S > Sr
Apparent power, S 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur ± 1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir ± 1.0% of S at S > Sr
Apparent power, S Three cos phi = 1 ± 0.5% of S at S > Sr

phase settings ± 0.5% of Sr at S ≤ Sr
Power factor, cos (φ) 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur < 0.02
0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir
11.2 Event Counter CNTGGIO
11.2.1 Identification D0E6278T201305151403 v1

Event counter CNTGGIO -
D0E12340T201305151403
EN-US V1

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Event counter CNTGGIO has six counters which are used for storing the number of times each
counter input has been activated.
CNTGGIO
BLOCK VALUE1
COUNTER1 VALUE2
COUNTER2 VALUE3
COUNTER3 VALUE4
COUNTER4 VALUE5
COUNTER5 VALUE6
COUNTER6
RESET
D0E12378T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 92: CNTGGIO function block
11.2.4 Signals
D0E6534T201305151403 v1
Table 174: CNTGGIO Input signals

COUNTER1 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 1
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function
D0E6536T201305151403 v1
Table 175: CNTGGIO Output signals

VALUE1 INTEGER Output of counter 1
11.2.5 Settings
D0E6537T201305151403 v1
Table 176: CNTGGIO Group settings (basic)

On

Technical Manual
Monitoring

D0E6535T201305151403 v1
Table 177: CNTGGIO Monitored data

VALUE1 INTEGER - - Output of counter 1

D0E6272T201305151403 v1
Event counter CNTGGIO comprises six independent counters. Each counter is incremented
upon activation (0 to 1 transition) of its corresponding COUNTER input. The updated count
number is presented at its VALUE output.
All counter values are stored in flash memory once per hour, to preserve the information
against power loss.
To prevent loss of counter values, always wait for minimum one hour from the
last counter event to powering off the IED.
Activation (0 to 1 transition) of the RESET input resets all six counters to 0, which takes
precedence over any simultaneous COUNTER input activation. Continuous 1 on the RESET
input has no effect.
When the BLOCK input is 1 all counters are blocked, that is, they do not react to changes on
their inputs. This takes precedence over any simultaneous COUNTER input activation.
However, RESET will still work even with active BLOCK.
11.2.7.1 Reporting D0E6273T201305151403 v1
The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI.
Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI or through a binary input.
Reading of content can also be performed remotely, for example from a IEC 61850 client. The
value can also be presented as a measuring value on the local HMI graphical display.

D0E6288T201305151403 v1
Table 178: CNTGGIO technical data

Counter value 0-100000 -
Max. count up speed 10 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.3 Disturbance report
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary
system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the disturbance report
functionality.
Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all selected
analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a, maximum of 40 analog
and 96 binary signals.
The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:
• Event list
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder
The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration,

starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.
A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR function blocks,

which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected signals from start of pre-fault
time to the end of post-fault time will be included in the recording.
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade format as a
reader file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The same applies to all events,
which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local HMI is used to get information about
the recordings. The disturbance report files may be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis
using the disturbance handling tool.
11.3.2 Disturbance report DRPRDRE D0E7504T201305151403 v1
D0E7581T201305151403 v1

Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -
11.3.2.2 Function block

D0E7476T201305151403 v1
DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED
D0E13244T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 93: DRPRDRE function block

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.3.2.3 Signals
D0E7764T201305151403 v1
Table 179: DRPRDRE Output signals

DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used
11.3.2.4 Settings
D0E7765T201305151403 v1
Table 180: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)

On
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 9.90 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig Off - - Off Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not
On (Off)
MaxNoStoreRec 10 - 100 - 1 100 Maximum number of stored
disturbances
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest Off - - Off Operation mode during test mode
On

D0E7766T201305151403 v1
Table 181: DRPRDRE Monitored data

MemoryUsed INTEGER - % Memory usage (0-100%)
UnTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 1
activated
OvTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 1
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated

Technical Manual
Monitoring

activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated

Technical Manual
Monitoring

activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated

Technical Manual
Monitoring

activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
FaultNumber INTEGER - - Disturbance fault number

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.3.3 Analog input signals AxRADR D0E7518T201305151403 v1
D0E7495T201305151403 v1

Analog input signals A1RADR - -

D0E7479T201305151403 v1
A1RADR
^GRPINPUT1
^GRPINPUT2
^GRPINPUT3
^GRPINPUT4
^GRPINPUT5
^GRPINPUT6
^GRPINPUT7
^GRPINPUT8
^GRPINPUT9
^GRPINPUT10
D0E13250T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 94: A1RADR function block, analog inputs, example for A1RADR, A2RADR and
A3RADR
11.3.3.3 Signals
A1RADR - A3RADR Input signals D0E7498T201305151403 v1

Tables for input signals for A1RADR, A2RADR and A3RADR are similar except for GRPINPUT
number.
• A1RADR, GRPINPUT1 - GRPINPUT10

D0E7756T201305151403 v1
Table 182: A1RADR Input signals

GRPINPUT1 GROUP - Group signal for input 1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

Technical Manual
Monitoring

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
11.3.3.4 Settings
A1RADR - A3RADR Settings D0E7500T201305151403 v1

Setting tables for A1RADR, A2RADR and A3RADR are similar except for channel numbers.
• A1RADR, channel01 - channel10

D0E7757T201305151403 v1
Table 183: A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Operation01 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 1
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog
channel 1 (IEC-60870-5-103)
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 2 (IEC-60870-5-103)

Technical Manual
Monitoring

(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 3 (IEC-60870-5-103)
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 4 (IEC-60870-5-103)
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 5 (IEC-60870-5-103)
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 6 (IEC-60870-5-103)
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 7 (IEC-60870-5-103)
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 8 (IEC-60870-5-103)
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 9 (IEC-60870-5-103)
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel10 (IEC-60870-5-103)
Table 184: A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 1
UnderTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 1 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel
1 in % of signal
OverTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog
OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1
in % of signal
2 in % of signal

Technical Manual
Monitoring

in % of signal
3 in % of signal
OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 3
in % of signal
4 in % of signal
in % of signal
5 in % of signal
in % of signal
6 in % of signal
in % of signal
7 in % of signal
in % of signal

Technical Manual
Monitoring

8 in % of signal
in % of signal
9 in % of signal
in % of signal
10 in % of signal
OverTrigLe10 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel
10 in % of signal
11.3.4 Analog input signals A4RADR D0E7521T201305151403 v1
D0E7497T201305151403 v1


D0E7485T201305151403 v1
A4RADR
ÎNPUT31
ÎNPUT32
ÎNPUT33
ÎNPUT34
ÎNPUT35
ÎNPUT36
ÎNPUT37
ÎNPUT38
ÎNPUT39
ÎNPUT40
D0E13681T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 95: A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Channels 31-40 are not shown in LHMI. They are used for internally calculated
analog signals.
11.3.4.3 Signals
D0E7758T201305151403 v1
Table 185: A4RADR Input signals

INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31
11.3.4.4 Settings
D0E7759T201305151403 v1
Table 186: A4RADR Non group settings (basic)

Operation31 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 31 (IEC-60870-5-103)

Technical Manual
Monitoring

(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 32 (IEC-60870-5-103)
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 33 (IEC-60870-5-103)
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 34 (IEC-60870-5-103)
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 35 (IEC-60870-5-103)
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 36 (IEC-60870-5-103)
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 37 (IEC-60870-5-103)
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 38 (IEC-60870-5-103)
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel 39 (IEC-60870-5-103)
(IEC-60870-5-103)
channel40 (IEC-60870-5-103)
Table 187: A4RADR Non group settings (advanced)

31 in % of signal
31 in % of signal

Technical Manual
Monitoring

32 in % of signal
32 in % of signal
33 in % of signal
OverTrigLe33 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 33
in % of signal
34 in % of signal
34 in % of signal
35 in % of signal
35 in % of signal
36 in % of signal
36 in % of signal
37 in % of signal
37 in % of signal

Technical Manual
Monitoring

38 in % of signal
38 in % of signal
39 in % of signal
39 in % of signal
40 in % of signal
40 in % of signal
11.3.5 Binary input signals BxRBDR
D0E7496T201305151403 v1

Binary input signals B1RBDR - -

Technical Manual
Monitoring

D0E7491T201305151403 v1
B1RBDR
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
D0E13684T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 96: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR - B6RBDR
11.3.5.3 Signals
B1RBDR - B6RBDR Input signals D0E7499T201305151403 v1

Tables for input signals for B1RBDR - B6RBDR are all similar except for INPUT and description
number.
• B1RBDR, INPUT1 - INPUT16

D0E7760T201305151403 v1
Table 188: B1RBDR Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.3.5.4 Settings
B1RBDR - B6RBDR Settings D0E7501T201305151403 v1

Setting tables for B1RBDR - B6RBDR are all similar except for binary channel and description
numbers.
• B1RBDR, channel1 - channel16

D0E7761T201305151403 v1
Table 189: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

TrigDR01 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED01 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On

Technical Manual
Monitoring

Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On

Technical Manual
Monitoring

Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 4
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103)

Technical Manual
Monitoring

(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103)
Table 190: B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 1
IndicationMa01 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 1
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show

Technical Manual
Monitoring

Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show

D0E7548T201305151403 v1
Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the operator,
analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the system.
The functions included in the disturbance report are:
• Event list
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder
Figure 97 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and function
blocks. Event list , Event recorder and Indications uses information from the binary input
function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder uses analog information from the analog input
function blocks (AxRADR). Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from both
AxRADR and BxRBDR.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
A1-4RADR Disturbance Report
A4RADR DRPRDRE
Analog signals
Trip value rec
B1-6RBDR Disturbance
recorder
Binary signals B6RBDR

Event list
Event recorder
Indications
D0E13213T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 97: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each with
the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function is working
continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time, and so on. All
information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This implies
that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report will get an
identification number in the interval from 0-999.
Disturbance report
Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100
General dist. Trip Event Disturbance

Indications Event list
information values recordings recording
en05000161.vsd
D0E12745T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 98: Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when the
memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one. The total
recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling frequency, number
of analog and binary channels and recording time. In a 50 Hz system it is possible to record
100 where the maximum recording time is 0.7 seconds. The memory limit does not affect the
rest of the disturbance report (Event list, Event recorder, Indications and Trip value recorder).
The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of recordings to
less than 100.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This might cause
disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.
11.3.6.1 Disturbance information D0E7544T201305151403 v1
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, and the trip values are available on
the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the user must use a PC and - either the
PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be
connected to the IED front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).
11.3.6.2 Indications D0E7561T201305151403 v1
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the
disturbance (not time-tagged), see Indication section for detailed information.
11.3.6.3 Event recorder D0E7562T201305151403 v1
The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have occurred
during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or PCM600, see Event
recorder section for detailed information.
11.3.6.4 Event list D0E7545T201305151403 v1
The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list information is
continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The oldest data is
overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or PCM600, see Event list
section for detailed information.
11.3.6.5 Trip value recorder D0E7563T201305151403 v1
The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and during
the fault, see Trip value recorder section for detailed information.
11.3.6.6 Disturbance recorder D0E7564T201305151403 v1
Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the fault,
see Disturbance recorder section for detailed information.
11.3.6.7 Time tagging D0E7547T201305151403 v1
The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time tagging
within the disturbance report
11.3.6.8 Recording times D0E7565T201305151403 v1
Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a settable time
frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. Disturbance recorder,
event recorder and indication function register disturbance data and events during
tRecording, the total recording time.
The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

Technical Manual
Monitoring
tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on

which criterion stops the current disturbance recording
Trig point
TimeLimit
PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT
1 2 3
en05000487.vsd
D0E12748T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 99: The recording times definition
PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate time
of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid
trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated
triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not
reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording
and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use the setting
TimeLimit to set this time.
11.3.6.9 Analog signals GUID-3DA6D334-9EA6-450A-8ABF-3DE80E914463 v1
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and
triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for external
analog signals from analog input modules via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI). The last
10 channels may be connected to internally calculated analog signals available as function
block output signals (phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).

Technical Manual
Monitoring
SMAI A1RADR
GRPNAME AI3P A2RADR
AI1NAME AI1 GRPINPUT1 A3RADR
External analog
AI2NAME AI2 GRPINPUT2
signals
AIN GRPINPUT5
GRPINPUT6
...
A4RADR
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
Internal analog signals INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
...
INPUT40
en05000653-2.vsd
Figure 100: Analog input function blocks
The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after configuration)
available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the SMAI function block. The
information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate (4000 and 4800 Hz).
Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycle time of the specific function. If
a function is running at lower speed than the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use
the latest updated sample until a new updated sample is available.
Application configuration tool (ACT) is used for analog configuration of the Disturbance
report.
The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases where only
the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the information available as
a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AIN-output). In situations
where AI4-input is used as an input signal the corresponding information is available on the
non-calculated output (AI4) on the SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR
accordingly.
For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the disturbance
recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation
is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger conditions. The same
applies for the current signals.
If Operation = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph. However,
Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The input channel can still be
used to trig the disturbance recorder.
If Operation = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the entire
disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.3.6.10 Binary signals D0E7538T201305151403 v1
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The signals can be
selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected to be
recorded when:
• the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

• the signal is connected to the input of the function block
Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation = Off).
A binary signal can be selected to activate the yellow (START) and red (TRIP) LED on the local
HMI (SetLED = Off/Start/Trip/Start and Trip).
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance
recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers. The
indications are also selected from these 96 signals with local HMI IndicationMask=Show/Hide.
11.3.6.11 Trigger signals D0E7539T201305151403 v1
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which runs
continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance
report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there is no
disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance of choosing the
right signals as trigger conditions.
A trigger can be of type:
• Manual trigger
• Binary-signal trigger
• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)
Manual trigger D0E7540T201305151403 v1

A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via station bus
(IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is generated. This feature
is especially useful for testing.
Binary-signal trigger D0E7541T201305151403 v1

Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger
( Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger from a
logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the disturbance report.
Analog-signal trigger D0E7542T201305151403 v1

All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the
disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp, OverTrigLe and
UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the
absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above the
threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a greater
than (>) sign with the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent
trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is
separately performed for each channel.
This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC
offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms
for a 50 Hz network.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.
11.3.6.12 Post Retrigger D0E7543T201305151403 v1
Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition during a
recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However, under certain
circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault recording, for instance by
automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.
In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig = On)
during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and, during a
period, run in parallel with the initial recording.
When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not start until
the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig occurs during
the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a new complete
recording will be started.
Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.

D0E7590T201305151403 v1
Table 191: DRPRDRE technical data

Current recording - ± 1,0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
± 1,0% of I at I > Ir
Voltage recording - ± 1,0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
± 1,0% of U at U > Ur
Pre-fault time (0.05–3.00) s -

Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–8.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 0.25 ms
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 96 -
Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value 30 -
recorder per recording
Maximum number of indications in a disturbance 96 -
report
Maximum number of events in the Event recording 150 -
per recording
Maximum number of events in the Event list 1000, first in - first out -
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording 70 seconds (100 recordings) -
time and maximum number of channels, typical at 50 Hz, 50 seconds (100
value) recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 4.0 kHz at 50 Hz -
4.8 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.4 Indications D0E7474T201305151403 v1
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in
the secondary system it is important to know, for example binary signals that have changed
status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short perspective to get
information via the local HMI in a straightforward way.
There are three LEDs on the local HMI (green, yellow and red), which will display status
information about the IED and the Disturbance recorder function (triggered).
The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the
Disturbance recorder function that have changed status during a disturbance.
The Indications function has no function block of it’s own.
11.4.3 Signals
11.4.3.1 Input signals D0E7577T201305151403 v1
The Indications function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance report function.
The LED indications display this information:
Green LED:
Steady light In Service

Flashing light Internal fail
Dark No power supply
Yellow LED:
Function controlled by SetLEDn setting in Disturbance report function.
Red LED:
Function controlled by SetLEDn setting in Disturbance report function.
Indication list:
The possible indication signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance report
function and disturbance recorder.
The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording period of
the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic one or state
changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of indications. Signals are not
time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list of indications the:

Technical Manual
Monitoring
• the signal must be connected to binary input BxRBDR function block

• the DRPRDRE parameter Operation must be set On
• the DRPRDRE must be trigged (binary or analog)
• the input signal must change state from logical 0 to 1 during the recording time.
Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when setting the binary
inputs.
The name of the binary signal that appears in the Indication function is the user-defined name
assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in disturbance recorder function,
indications and event recorder function.
11.4.5 Technical data D0E7470T201305151403 v1
D0E7591T201305151403 v1

Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications presented for single 96
disturbance
Maximum number of recorded disturbances 100
11.5 Event recorder D0E7473T201305151403 v1
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system is vital, for example, time-tagged events logged during disturbances. This
information is used for different purposes in the short term (for example corrective actions)
and in the long term (for example functional analysis).
The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance recorder
function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.
The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.
The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtrade
file).
The Event recorder has no function block of it’s own.
11.5.3 Signals
The Event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance report
function.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event recorder logs
every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can be generated by both
internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the
main processor module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly in each I/O
module. The events are collected during the total recording time (pre-, post-fault and limit
time), and are stored in the disturbance report flash memory at the end of each recording.
In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = On and a new trig signal appears during
post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the user-defined
name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the disturbance recorder
function , indications and event recorder function.
The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information and managed via
the local HMI or PCM600.
Events can not be read from the IED if more than one user is accessing the IED
simultaneously.
D0E7903T201305151403 v1

Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in disturbance report 150
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time
synchronizing
11.6 Event list D0E7578T201305151403 v1
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring the system from an overview perspective
and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.
The event list logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance recorder function. The
list may contain up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.
The Event list has no function block of it’s own.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.6.3 Signals
The Event list logs the same binary input signals as configured for the Disturbance report
function.
When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status, the event
list function stores input name, status and time in the event list in chronological order. The list
can contain up to 1000 events from both internal logic signals and binary input channels. If the
list is full, the oldest event is overwritten when a new event arrives.
The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the local
HMI.
The event list function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder function, which is
only active during a disturbance.
The name of the binary signal that appears in the event recording is the user-defined name
assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the disturbance recorder
function , indications and the event recorder function .
The event list is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report information .
D0E7902T201305151403 v1

Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in the list 1000
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time synchronizing
11.7 Trip value recorder D0E7579T201305151403 v1
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for the
disturbance evaluation.
The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals connected to
the Disturbance recorder function. The result is magnitude and phase angle before and during
the fault for each analog input signal.
The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.
The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtrade
file).

Technical Manual
Monitoring
The Trip value recorder has no function block of it’s own.
11.7.3 Signals
The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to A1RADR to A3RADR
(not A4RADR).
Trip value recorder calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault amplitudes as well as the
phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The parameter ZeroAngleRef points out
which input signal is used as the angle reference.
When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception is
searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The channel
search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest number.
When a starting point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of the complex
values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The estimation uses
samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using the Recursive Least
Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after the fault sample and uses
samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of the signals.
If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used as the
start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one cycle before
the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-fault and fault values.
The name of the analog signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function is the user-
defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the Disturbance
recorder function .
The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information and can be
viewed in PCM600 or via the local HMI.
D0E7914T201305151403 v1

Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 30
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
11.8 Disturbance recorder D0E7580T201305151403 v1
The Disturbance recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information about
disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behavior and related

Technical Manual
Monitoring
primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Recorded information is
used for different purposes in the short perspective (for example corrective actions) and long
perspective (for example functional analysis).
The Disturbance recorder acquires sampled data from selected analog- and binary signals
connected to the Disturbance recorder function (maximum 40 analog and 96 binary signals).
The binary signals available are the same as for the event recorder function.
The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation of
protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection functions. Up to
9,9 seconds of data before the trigger instant can be saved in the disturbance file.
The disturbance recorder information for up to 100 disturbances are saved in the IED and the
local HMI is used to view the list of recordings.
The Disturbance recorder has no function block of it’s own.
11.8.3 Signals
D0E7892T201305151403 v1
See Disturbance report for input and output signals.
11.8.4 Settings D0E7891T201305151403 v1
See Disturbance report for settings.
D0E7568T201305151403 v1
Disturbance recording is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals. The binary
signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals generated by the
functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input channels from the
Transformer Input Module (TRM) through the Signal Matrix Analog Input (SMAI) and some
internally derived analog signals.
Disturbance recorder collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic buffer.
The pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will continuously be
overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is determined by
the set pre-fault recording time.
Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and the data
storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long as the fault
condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the post-fault time and it can
be set in the disturbance report.
The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory, intended
for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the oldest recording is
overwritten. Up to the last 100 recordings are stored in the IED.
The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance recording. A
recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from analog inputs (over-/
underlevel trig).
A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for all
functions within the disturbance report functionality.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.8.5.1 Memory and storage D0E7569T201305151403 v1
The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of recordings to
less than 100.
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This might cause
disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.
When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.
This post-recording processing comprises:
• Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals
• Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance handling tool (part of PCM 600)
• Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy
• Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)
The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation.
The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are divided into
three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT).
The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the disturbance,
that is, information from the Disturbance report sub-functions. The Disturbance handling tool
use this information and present the recording in a user-friendly way.
General:
• Station name, object name and unit name

• Date and time for the trig of the disturbance
• Record number
• Sampling rate
• Time synchronization source
• Recording times
• Activated trig signal
• Active setting group
Analog:
• Signal names for selected analog channels

• Information, for example, trig on analog inputs
• Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating
• Over- or Undertrig: level and operation
• Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig
• CT direction
Binary:
• Signal names
• Status of binary input signals
The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpret the data
file. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency, channel info etc.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel for each
sample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence number and time
stamp for each set of samples.
GUID-2B7AA22F-7D13-4448-AA8D-5CB86A615551 v1
Table 196: Disturbance report DRPRDRE technical data

Current recording - ± 1,0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
± 1,0% of I at I > Ir
Voltage recording - ± 1,0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
± 1,0% of U at U > Ur
Pre-fault time (0.05–3.00) s -

Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–8.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 0.25 ms See time
synchronization
technical data
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 96 -
Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value 30 -
recorder per recording
Maximum number of indications in a disturbance 96 -
report
Maximum number of events in the Event recording 150 -
per recording
Maximum number of events in the Event list 1000, first in - first out -
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording 70 seconds (100 recordings) -
time and maximum number of channels, typical at 50 Hz, 50 seconds (100
value) recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 4.0 kHz at 50 Hz -
4.8 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

SPGGIO
D0E7991T201305151403 v1

IEC 61850 generic communication SPGGIO - -
I/O functions

Technical Manual
Monitoring
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO is used to send one single logical
signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.
SPGGIO
BLOCK
ÎN
IEC09000237_en_1.vsd
D0E13075T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 101: SPGGIO function block
11.9.4 Signals
D0E8288T201305151403 v1
Table 197: SPGGIO Input signals

IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status
11.9.5 Settings
D0E8289T201305151403 v1
Upon receiving a signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (SPGGIO)
function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests this
signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be used to define which function block in which
equipment or system should receive this information.
11.10 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16

inputs SP16GGIO
D0E7992T201305151403 v1

IEC 61850 generic communication SP16GGIO - -
I/O functions 16 inputs

Technical Manual
Monitoring
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs SP16GGIO function is used to send
up to 16 logical signals to other systems or equipment in the substation.
SP16GGIO
BLOCK
ÎN1
ÎN2
ÎN3
ÎN4
ÎN5
ÎN6
ÎN7
ÎN8
ÎN9
ÎN10
ÎN11
ÎN12
ÎN13
ÎN14
ÎN15
ÎN16
D0E13078T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 102: SP16GGIO function block
11.10.4 Signals
D0E8357T201305151403 v1
Table 198: SP16GGIO Input signals

IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.10.5 Settings
D0E8359T201305151403 v1
11.10.6 MonitoredData
D0E8358T201305151403 v1
Table 199: SP16GGIO Monitored data

OUT1 GROUP - - Output 1 status
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
OUTOR GROUP - - Output status logic OR gate for input
SIGNAL 1 to 16
Upon receiving signals at its inputs, IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs
(SP16GGIO) function will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that
requests this signals. To be able to get the signal, one must use other tools, described in the
Engineering manual and define which function block in which equipment or system should
receive this information.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
There are also 16 output signals that show the input status for each input as well as an OR type
output combined for all 16 input signals. These output signals are handled in PST.

MVGGIO
D0E7993T201305151403 v1

IEC61850 generic communication MVGGIO - -
I/O functions
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function is used to send the
instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the substation. It
can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to
permit measurement supervision on that value.
MVGGIO
BLOCK ^VALUE
ÎN RANGE
11.11.4 Signals
D0E8313T201305151403 v1
Table 200: MVGGIO Input signals

IN REAL 0 Analog input value
D0E8315T201305151403 v1
Table 201: MVGGIO Output signals

VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER Range

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.11.5 Settings
D0E8316T201305151403 v1
Table 202: MVGGIO Non group settings (basic)

BasePrefix micro - - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
MV db 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
MV hhLim -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with the
5000.00 base prefix (multiplication factor)
MV hLim -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the base
5000.00 prefix (multiplication factor)
MV lLim -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 -800.00 Low limit multiplied with the base
5000.00 prefix (multiplication factor)
MV llLim -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 -900.00 Low Low limit multiplied with the
MV min -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 -1000.00 Minimum value multiplied with the
MV max -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 1000.00 Maximum value multiplied with the
MV dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range

D0E8314T201305151403 v1
Table 203: MVGGIO Monitored data

VALUE REAL - - Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - Range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions
(MVGGIO) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. In the
same time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the value, to other IEC 61850 clients in the
substation.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.12 Measured value expander block MVEXP
D0E6783T201305151403 v1

Measured value expander block MVEXP - -
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU),
current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and VMSQI) and IEC 61850
generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) are provided with measurement supervision
functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. Similarly, the multilevel threshold alarm generation
MONALM supervises measured or calculated analog values against the same kind of range
thresholds.
The measured value expander block MVEXP translates the integer output signal from the
measuring functions to 5 binary signals: below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above
high limit or above high-high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the
configurable logic or for alarming purpose.
MVEXP
RANGE* HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW
D0E13063T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 103: MVEXP function block
11.12.4 Signals D0E6784T201305151403 v1
D0E7322T201305151403 v1
Table 204: MVEXP Input signals

RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range

Technical Manual
Monitoring
D0E7323T201305151403 v1
Table 205: MVEXP Output signals

HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit
11.12.5 Settings
D0E6910T201305151403 v1
GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define (IBase),
(UBase) and (SBase).
The input signal must be connected to a range output of MONALM or of a measuring function
block (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGGIO). The function block
converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according to Table 206. Only one
binary output can be active (high) at any time.
Table 206: Input integer value converted to binary output signals

Measured supervised below low- between low‐ between low between above high-high limit
value is: low limit low and low and high limit high-high
Output: limit and high limit
LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High
11.13 Operation log GUID-7406E8A3-F03D-4C8E-82B0-1DAEFE891A82 v1
Operation log is a database for storing operational data related to a trigger event. It can be
used, for example, storing the set values associated with a switching operation of the circuit
breaker or an alarm status activation, or for storing a set of values every few hours using a
periodic trigger.
Stored operation records can be viewed on the LHMI or through WHMI. Furthermore, graphical
summaries can be created in the Trend views of WHMI. This information can be used in the
short term (for example, corrective actions) and in the long term (for example, functional
analysis).
Two types of records are supported:

Technical Manual
Monitoring
• Operation records for storing current data.

• Fingerprint records for storing initial data obtained during commissioning. These are
intended as a reference for analysis of changes over time.
11.13.1 Operation log function OPERLOG GUID-28821793-FB0B-4123-ABC1-B20AD1B12A1F v1
11.13.1.1 Identification GUID-13A76ABE-97DE-4028-ADA6-BA93E0BDCFE7 v1

Operation log OPERLOG - -
11.13.1.2 Functionality GUID-7B1B9614-B739-4E1E-B95E-39BE5AA5F516 v2
OPERLOG initiates storing of an operation record in the IED upon activation of a binary trigger.
The stored information includes time stamp, operation type, and mode associated with the
trigger, along with up to eight connected real-value inputs. These inputs can be calculated
values from another function or measured process data.
OPERLOG is designed primarily to record data pertinent to controlled switching operations or

condition monitoring of power circuit breakers. Thus it supports classification of the recorded
values according to process signal categories.
The number of operation records for each instance can be configured. Once the maximum
number of records for an instance is exceeded, the oldest record is overwritten by the new
record.
11.13.1.3 Function block GUID-1F30715D-5487-46BF-A85F-7E287EE11F2D v1
OPERLOG
BLOCKIN BLOCKED
TRIG_IN TRIG_OUT
MODE
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
Figure 104: OPERLOG function block
11.13.1.4 Signals
Table 207: OPERLOG Input signals

BLOCKIN BOOLEAN 0 Block operation log data storage
TRIG_IN BOOLEAN 0 Trigger input to log operation log data
MODE INTEGER 0 Input for determining the operation log modes
INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Input signal 1

Technical Manual
Monitoring

Table 208: OPERLOG Output signals

BLOCKED BOOLEAN Operation log blocked output
TRIG_OUT BOOLEAN Trigger output to connect operation log function in daisy
chain
11.13.1.5 Settings
Table 209: OPERLOG Non group settings (basic)

Type NA - - OC opening Operation log instance type
OC opening
CB switching
Drive starts 24h
Drive runtime
SF6 gas
Cond temp
TrgModOpn Do not log - - Log with values Trigger option for logging data for
Log without open
values
Log with values
TrgModCls Do not log - - Log with values Trigger option for logging data for
Log without close
values
Log with values
TsSrcSel Signal Time - - Signal Time For selecting the input which will be
System Time used for triggering the timestamp
Input1Group NA - - Accuracy Group selection for INPUT1
Accuracy
CB times
CB switching
Ambient
Drive energy
Additional
Last open cur
Elec error

Technical Manual
Monitoring

Accuracy
CB times
CB switching
Ambient
Drive energy
Additional
Last open cur
Elec error
Accuracy
CB times
CB switching
Ambient
Drive energy
Additional
Last open cur
Elec error
Accuracy
CB times
CB switching
Ambient
Drive energy
Additional
Last open cur
Elec error
Accuracy
CB times
CB switching
Ambient
Drive energy
Additional
Last open cur
Elec error
Accuracy
CB times
CB switching
Ambient
Drive energy
Additional
Last open cur
Elec error
Accuracy
CB times
CB switching
Ambient
Drive energy
Additional
Last open cur
Elec error
Accuracy
CB times
CB switching
Ambient
Drive energy
Additional
Last open cur
Elec error

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Table 210: OPERLOG Non group settings (advanced)

MaxRecords 100 - 20000 - 100 100 Maximum number of records
GUID-296B605A-6AC6-4674-984A-420665879F0B v2
It is recommended not to increaseMaxRecords beyond the default value in the

pre-configuration of Switchsync PWC600, otherwise performance of the user
interface may be affected.
11.13.1.6 Operation principle GUID-DE562824-4B6D-4824-9F4A-1774CD8D6C6E v2
OPERLOG function performs a trigger based data transfer to the operation log database for
the connected inputs. Figure 105 shows the operation log module.
Memory
Supervision
Trigger memory
Overall Oplog
Supervision to
MaxRec
generate an event
Read
operation log
data
Storing operation log
data
WHMI
Operation log
database
Figure 105: Operation log system overview
• This function saves records of input values to a persistent memory (flash) based on a
trigger. The connected input values can be calculated data from different functions or
measured process data.
• The records that are logged by the operation log component can be viewed in LHMI and
WHMI as common data or phase segregated data. If the signal connected has an
associated unit, it will also be displayed.
• The memory supervision component MONMEMSUP monitors the overall memory
consumed by all operation log components instantiated in the IED. Even though there is a
provision for setting maximum records for every instance of operation log, it is the
memory supervision which finally checks the IED capacity. If the size of the database
exceeds the available memory of 40MB, the newest record will overwrite the oldest one.
One record created by one instance of OPLOG will consume approximately 80 Byte of
data, irrespective of the number of input channels connected to that component.
• By a specific triggering option, a stored operation record can be marked as “fingerprint
record”. Fingerprint records are retained during normal clearing of the operation log
database, neither will they be overwritten in case of memory overrun. The number of
fingerprint records is limited to 50 (settable); storing another fingerprint record after
reaching this limit will overwrite the oldest fingerprint record.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
A mechanism for limiting the number of write operations per time period is
implemented in the IED, to prevent the flash memory from wearing out. As a
consequence, it may take up an hour to save new operation records
permanently in the database. If the auxiliary power is interrupted before new
data are saved, these data are lost. The time of flash saving is neither indicated
on the IED nor can it be influenced by the user.
Triggering GUID-9D993A77-AC86-412C-B2C6-50DB0DA06A29 v1
Storing of an operation record is triggered by the input signal TRIG_IN going high. TRIG_IN is
primarily a binary signal. Depending on the application, it may be augmented by additional
data to form a composite signal.
If the application is to store operation data of the circuit breaker along with the time stamp
and operation type, a composite trigger signal should be applied comprising the following
information.
• Time stamp provided by the application, for example, the time when a command has been
received
• Circuit breaker operation type (Close or Open)
• Whether the data should be stored as fingerprint record
In the Switchsync PWC600 pre-configuration, the OPLOGTRIG output of SSCPOW provides

such a composite trigger signal. TsSrcSel should be set to “Signal Time” to assure correct
storing of the application generated time stamp.
In an application for periodic process monitoring (for example, maximum temperature

attained in a day), where measured data are stored immediately on triggering, a simple binary
(Boolean) signal can be used to trigger OPERLOG. In this case, TsSrcSel should be set to
“System Time”, to generate the time stamp from the IED’s system time when TRIG_IN was
activated. In this case, the CB operation type (Close or Open) will be stored as “not applicable”.
Processing of trigger signals can be further controlled by the TrgModOpn (for open operation)
and TrgModCls (for close operation) parameters. The options are:
• Do not log: A trigger signal for the respective operation (Close or Open) will not store an
operation record.
• Log without values: Operation record will include only the operation type (Close or Open)
and the time stamp.
• Log with values: Operation record will include operation type (Close or Open), time stamp,
and the values at the connected inputs.
Grouping and categorizing operation data GUID-CCD13914-71C3-40B8-9D3C-889DAF3D640F v1

To enable grouped and categorized presentation of logged data in LHMI or WHMI, two
settings and one input are provided. One instance of OPERLOG allows to connect maximum
eight real-value inputs; if more than eight values are to be logged with the same trigger signal,
additional function block instances are required. To logically group these instances together in
the database, Type should be set to the same value.
If, within one Type of OPERLOG, a client such as trend graph page in WHMI is configured to
show the values of selected inputs only, the InputxGroup settings allow this segregation. They
should be set according to the class of monitored process data, for example, “Accuracy” (of
controlled switching operations) or “Ambient” (temperature).
The input signal MODE, which is stored together with the other input data, provides dynamic
categorization (at runtime). It is intended to give a status evaluation of each switching
operation at a glance. This mode information is further explained in the User Manual, section
IED Operation.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Configuring instances in ACT GUID-0F13DEE4-647F-4178-A349-7AB7060D8D60 v1

Operation log instances can be configured to store phase segregated values such as operation
times of the three circuit breaker poles, or phase independent values such as ambient
temperature.
Do not connect more than three components in a daisy chain.
For phase independent signals, configure OPERLOG as individual instance(s). An example of

possible trigger connections is shown in Figure 106.
Primary 1 Secondary 1 Secondary 2
OPERLOG OPERLOG OPERLOG
Instance 1 Instance 2 Instance 3
Primary 2 Secondary 3 Secondary 4

Trigger
Individual 1 Individual 2 Individual 3
IEC12000047-1-EN.vsd
Figure 106: Trigger connections for operation log instances

Configure the instances in ACT such that
• Individual instances do not have any input or output daisy chain connection to any other
operation log component.
• Primary instances have only output daisy chain connection to the secondary operation log
component.
• Secondary instances have input daisy chain connection to a primary or secondary
operation log component and possibly an output daisy chain connection to another
secondary instance.
With one or more operation records already stored in the database, changes in
OPERLOG related ACT configuration or in OPERLOG parameters may lead to
wrong reporting on LHMI or WHMI.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
To prevent wrong reporting after configuration changes, the following procedure should be
observed:
1. Download the operation log database through WHMI.

2. Write configuration changes to the IED.
3. Clear all operation records and fingerprint records in the IED.
11.14 Clear operation log data CLROPLOG GUID-ADBC66A4-5A91-467F-908E-F5A74A51BD82 v1
11.14.1 Identification GUID-204E26D4-69DE-4BAD-95B6-47D27BA18255 v1

Clear operation log data CLROPLOG - -
11.14.2 Functionality GUID-AA314E67-2D36-45DE-BF8E-5C7F460B31A5 v1
The CLROPLOG function enables deletion of either operation records or fingerprint records
from the operation log database.
Two separate binary inputs for initiating deletion of records are provided. Activating one of
these inputs will clear all records of the corresponding type from the database.
Clearing records cannot be undone.
Permanent storage of the emptied database is subject to the same flash

memory write cycle as storing new records, see above.
11.14.3 Function block GUID-1EBECCA2-9F2B-4203-9950-173AFF6E5265 v1
CLROPLOG
CLROPLOG
CLRFPRCD
11.14.4 Signals
Table 211: CLROPLOG Input signals

CLROPLOG BOOLEAN 0 Input for clearing the operation log data
CLRFPRCD BOOLEAN 0 Input for clearing the finger print records

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.14.5 Settings GUID-7DE3F81C-84B1-4503-BF1D-582000C760CC v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or in Protection and Control
11.15 Compensation of circuit breaker switching times

CBCOMP GUID-338790CD-B1E2-46FB-999C-E8DF65ABB542 v1
11.15.1 Identification GUID-BDAEAFD0-D623-4DC3-B56E-5DE83A69B9AA v1
Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Compensation of CBCOMP — —
circuit breaker
switching times
11.15.2 Functionality GUID-596AE73E-CFE2-4AB2-9115-0903949FD910 v2
To achieve accurate controlled switching, a point-on-wave controller needs to take into

account the estimated operating times of the circuit breaker. Depending on the design,
mechanical closing and opening times may be affected by variations in external conditions
such as:
• Control voltage
• Temperature
• Drive energy
• Idle time (that is, time elapsed since last circuit breaker operation)
Each quantity that is measured can be converted into a compensation value (that is, deviation
in milliseconds from the nominal operating time) – in PWC600 this is done by the ANSCAL
function block.
The compensation of circuit breaker switching times (CBCOMP) function provides combined
compensation by adding up all available individual compensation values for each CB pole. The
resulting total compensation values (one per pole) take into account the quantity and health
status of sensors and the CB operation type (closing or opening). In controlled switching, this
is used to optimize prediction of the circuit breaker operating times for precise switching
instants. CBCOMP has pre-defined inputs for the compensation values of the external
parameters listed above. Furthermore, it provides two groups of spare inputs, which may be
used to compensate additional measured quantities.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.15.3 Function block GUID-5C7DF1D3-B00E-42D4-BE05-E8D084711412 v1
CBCOMP
QCLOSE DELTAT2L1
QOPEN DELTAT2L2
IDCLL1 DELTAT2L3
IDCLL2 COORBCTS
IDCLL3 ALMSTS
IDCLIL1 LOSCOPSG
IDCLIL2
IDCLIL3
IDOPL1
IDOPL2
IDOPL3
IDOPIL1
IDOPIL2
IDOPIL3
CVCLT
CVOPT
TMPCLL1
TMPCLL2
TMPCLL3
TMPOPL1
TMPOPL2
TMPOPL3
PRCLL1
PRCLL2
PRCLL3
PROPL1
PROPL2
PROPL3
SP1CLL1
SP1CLL2
SP1CLL3
SP1OPL1
SP1OPL2
SP1OPL3
SP2CLL1
SP2CLL2
SP2CLL3
SP2OPL1
SP2OPL2
SP2OPL3
SR1CLL1
SR1CLL2
SR1CLL3
SR1OPL1
SR1OPL2
SR1OPL3
SR2CLL1
SR2CLL2
SR2CLL3
SR2OPL1
SR2OPL2
SR2OPL3
IDCLALL1
IDCLALL2
IDCLALL3
IDOPALL1
IDOPALL2
IDOPALL3
Figure 108: CBCOMP Function block
11.15.4 Signals
Table 212: CBCOMP Input signals

QCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker close query
QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open query
IDCLL1 GROUP - Idle closed time for phase L1
SIGNAL

Technical Manual
Monitoring

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
IDCLIL1 GROUP - Idle closed time current input for phase L1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
IDOPL1 GROUP - Idle open time for phase L1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
IDOPIL1 GROUP - Idle open time current input for phase L1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
CVCLT GROUP - Control voltage close time
SIGNAL
CVOPT GROUP - Control voltage open time
SIGNAL
TMPCLL1 GROUP - Temperature close time phase L1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
TMPOPL1 GROUP - Temperature open time phase L1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
PRCLL1 GROUP - Drive pressure close time phase L1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
PROPL1 GROUP - Drive pressure open time phase L1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SP1CLL1 GROUP - Spring charge analog input close time phase L1
SIGNAL

Technical Manual
Monitoring

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SP1OPL1 GROUP - Spring charge analog input open time phase L1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SP2CLL1 GROUP - Spring charge binary input close time phase L1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SP2OPL1 GROUP - Spring charge binary input open time phase L1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SR1CLL1 GROUP - Spare1 close time phase L1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SR1OPL1 GROUP - Spare1 open time phase L1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
IDCLALL1 BOOLEAN 0 Idle closed time correction alarm for phase L1
IDOPALL1 BOOLEAN 0 Idle open time correction alarm for phase L1

Technical Manual
Monitoring
GUID-7C9AD51B-4E0C-4568-A013-B5E7AC8BEE67 v1
Table 213: Breakdown of input group signals

OPSIGNAL REAL Closing/Opening time correction value
ALARM BOOLEAN Sensor value out of supervision range, or faulty sensor. See ANSCAL for more
details.
SENSTSOUT BOOLEAN Sensor is faulty, or communication lost. This signal is used for IEC 61850
purpose only.
The alarm conditions from the individual input channels are bit packed in ALMSTS as follows:
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7

Idle Control Temperature Drive Spring charge 1 Spring Spare Spare 2
time voltage pressure (analog) charge 2 1
(binary)
The sensor status, if it exists for any of the monitored quantities, is represented by LOSCOPSG
and mapped to IEC 61850 data objects.
Table 214: CBCOMP Output signals

DELTAT2L1 REAL Switching correction delay from ideal switching instant for
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
COORBCTS INTEGER Co-ordination input to SSCPOW
ALMSTS INTEGER Alarming status of input(s) detected for compensation
This signal is integer because of bit packed information of
different alarms generated sent as integer output.
LOSCOPSG BOOLEAN Loss of enabled compensation signal indication output
11.15.5 Settings
Table 215: CBCOMP Non group settings (basic)

On
IdleTimeInpSel Current Input - - Status Input Idle time input selection for status
Status Input and current
IdleCompModeSel Disable O&C - - Disable O&C Idle time compensation input mode
EnableO&C3Sens selection for 3sensor and 1sensor
or
Enable C3Sensor
Enable O3Sensor

Technical Manual
Monitoring

IdleTimeErrInpOpt All Healthy - - All Healthy Idle time compensation computation
Only one faulty selection based on input health status
Atleast one
healthy
CntrlVoltCompModeSel Disable O&C - - Disable O&C Control voltage compensation input
EnableO&C1Senso mode selection for 1sensor
r
Enable C1Sensor
Enable O1Sensor
TempCompModeSel Disable O&C - - Disable O&C Temperature compensation input
EnableO&C3Sens mode selection for 3sensor and
or 1sensor
EnableO&C1Senso
r
Enable C3Sensor
Enable C1Sensor
Enable O3Sensor
Enable O1Sensor
TempErrInpOpt All Healthy - - All Healthy Temperature compensation
Only one faulty computation selection based on input
Atleast one health status
healthy
PresCompModeSel Disable O&C - - Disable O&C Drive pressure compensation input
EnableO&C3Sens mode selection for 3sensor and
or 1sensor
EnableO&C1Senso
r
Enable C3Sensor
Enable C1Sensor
Enable O3Sensor
Enable O1Sensor
PresErrInpOpt All Healthy - - All Healthy Drive pressure compensation
Only one faulty computation selection based on input
Atleast one health status
healthy
Spr1CompModeSel Disable O&C - - Disable O&C Spring charge compensation analog
EnableO&C3Sens input mode selection for 3sensor and
or 1sensor
EnableO&C1Senso
r
Enable C3Sensor
Enable C1Sensor
Enable O3Sensor
Enable O1Sensor
Spr1ErrInpOpt All Healthy - - All Healthy Spring charge analog input
Only one faulty compensation computation selection
Atleast one based on input health status
healthy
Spr2CompModeSel Disable O&C - - Disable O&C Spring charge compensation binary
EnableO&C3Sens input mode selection for 3sensor and
or 1sensor
EnableO&C1Senso
r
Enable C3Sensor
Enable C1Sensor
Enable O3Sensor
Enable O1Sensor
Spr2ErrInpOpt All Healthy - - All Healthy Spring charge binary input
Only one faulty compensation computation selection
Atleast one based on input health status
healthy

Technical Manual
Monitoring

Spare1CompModeSel Disable O&C - - Disable O&C Spare1 compensation input mode
or
EnableO&C1Senso
r
Enable C3Sensor
Enable C1Sensor
Enable O3Sensor
Enable O1Sensor
Spare1ErrInpOpt All Healthy - - All Healthy Spare1 compensation computation
Atleast one
healthy
Spare2CompModeSel Disable O&C - - Disable O&C Spare2 compensation input mode
or
EnableO&C1Senso
r
Enable C3Sensor
Enable C1Sensor
Enable O3Sensor
Enable O1Sensor
Spare2ErrInpOpt All Healthy - - All Healthy Spare2 compensation computation
Atleast one
healthy

PID-3002-MONITOREDDATA v2
Table 216: CBCOMP Monitored data

DELTAT2L1 REAL - ms Switching correction delay from ideal
switching instant for phase L1
11.15.7 Operation principle GUID-7AA751F1-8726-48D9-BE07-072A5A905CDD v1
In order to optimize the predicted circuit breaker switching times, analog parameters such as
idle time, control voltage, ambient temperature, drive pressure, and spring charge can be
monitored periodically through appropriate sensors. In a typical application, ANSCAL converts
each sensor signal to a compensation value (that is, time deviation from nominal operating
time), which is then supplied to CBCOMP. All associated compensation values are added to
yield three total compensation values DELTAT2Lx, one per phase. See Figure 109.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
QCLOSE / QOPEN
Close/Open time correction

values for phase L1
Alarms for time correction

for phase L1 Phase L1 DELTAT2L1
compensation
Sensor status indications
for phase L1

values for phase L2

compensation
for phase L2

values for phase L3

compensation

for phase L3
Figure 109: CBCOMP internal data processing

The number of available sensors and their respective health status are taken into account for
the calculations. Each compensation scheme can be configured to provide compensation for
Open operations, Close operations, or both. For each parameter to be compensated, CBCOMP
features a dedicated group of compensation values inputs, as explained in Table 217.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Table 217: Compensation signal inputs for measured parameters

Measured parameter Quantity of inputs for closing Remarks
time and opening time
compensation
Idle time, based on 3+3 Mechanical status is derived from CB auxiliary
mechanical status contacts
Idle time, based on 3+3 CB status is detected as closed if current is flowing
primary current (I > IDead) and open otherwise
signals
Control voltage 1+1 Control voltage is measured from IED’s power
supply input
Temperature 3+3 Requires external acquisition device, supplying
measured values via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages
Drive pressure 3+3 Requires external acquisition device, supplying
measured values via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages
Spring charge, 3+3 Requires external acquisition device, supplying
analog measurement measured values via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages
Spring charge, based 3+3 For example, obtained from spring limit switches
on binary range indicating OCO-block or CO-block conditions
indication signals
Spare 1 3+3 For user defined sensor signals. Requires external
acquisition device, supplying measured values via
IEC 61850 GOOSE messages
Spare 2 3+3 For user defined sensor signals. Requires external
acquisition device, supplying measured values via
IEC 61850 GOOSE messages
Only one of the idle time compensation channels, viz. status based or current based, is used
for calculating the final compensation value. The selection is made by the IdleTimeInpSel
setting.
11.15.7.1 Compensation mode GUID-61A1575E-523A-4D9E-AEE3-16C60D0F621B v1
Depending on the number of sensors available for a given parameter, and on the circuit
breaker operations to be controlled (or compensation characteristics available), the respective
value for CompModeSel defines the compensation mode applied to that parameter. See Table
218. In Switchsync PWC600, this selection can be made automatically by SST.
Table 218: Compensation mode for each parameter

Number of sensors Compensate closing times Compensate opening times CompModeSel setting
0 - - Disable O&C
(Any) No No Disable O&C
1 Yes No Enable C1Sensor
1 NO Yes Enable O1Sensor
1 Yes Yes EnableO&C1Sensor
3 (one per CB pole) Yes No Enable C3Sensor
3 (one per CB pole) No Yes Enable O3Sensor
3 (one per CB pole) Yes Yes EnableO&C3Sensor

Technical Manual
Monitoring
With three sensors enabled, individual compensation values are processed for each CB pole.
With only a single sensor input enabled, the compensation value on the input for breaker pole
L1 is used for all three poles.
11.15.7.2 Sensor status GUID-C6447FBC-1F8E-4785-9F0B-D409BEAE0B5C v1
Only accurate measured values from the sensors are useful in optimizing controlled switching
performance. In case of a faulty sensor, wrong output values may even deteriorate the result.
As part of the input group signals, CBCOMP accepts health status information of each sensor,
where logical 1 indicates a missing or faulty sensor. Any ‘unhealthy’ condition indication on an
enabled sensor input activates the LOSCOPSG output. Unacceptable numbers of faulty
sensors, which do not meet the criterion defined by the ErrInpOpt setting, activate the
ALMSTS output. Furthermore, the sensor failure information can be used for selecting a
fallback strategy. This assumes that operating conditions for three adjacent circuit breaker
poles would generally be similar. The strategies also depend on the ErrInpOpt setting for each
measured parameter, see Table 219.
Table 219: Processing of compensation values in dependence on sensor status

CompModeSel ErrInpOpt Number of Compensation Compensation value ALMSTS bit for
setting setting faulty value processed processed in phases the channel
sensors in phases with with faulty sensor
healthy sensor
…1 Sensor (Any) 0 Input value - 0
1 0.0 0.0 1
…3 Sensor (Any) 0 Input value - 0
All healthy 1, 2 or 3 0.0 0.0 1
Only one faulty 1 Input value Average of input 0
values in phases
with healthy sensor
2 or 3 0.0 0.0 1
Atleast one 1 Input value Average of input 0
healthy values in phases
with healthy sensor
2 Input value Input value in phase 0
with healthy sensor
3 0.0 0.0 1
11.16 Monitoring and compensation CB parameters

MONCOMP GUID-70383BBF-0533-46F7-96B1-E7B9344D9B62 v1
11.16.1 Identification GUID-A55491C9-845B-46AE-A5F0-4EE4F4385D52 v1

Monitoring and MONCOMP - -
compensation of circuit
breaker parameters

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.16.2 Functionality GUID-25DA8AAE-2068-49B7-8AA6-D44CD69E87AB v1
Monitoring and compensation of circuit breaker MONCOMP function provides an overall

compensation for different operating and controlling parameters which can be monitored and
adapted for better accuracy such as, Pre-strike, Re-ignition and mechanical operating time for
PWC600’s synchronous switching functionality. MONCOMP provides single or three phase
compensation modes, predicted correction times, deviation from the fingerprint values and
drift from the fingerprint values.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.16.3 Function block GUID-64B0CE90-61E9-4837-B5BC-FE7FCD8A4D4F v1
MONCOMP
BLOCK DELTAT1X
BLOCKFUNC DELTAT3X
OPNCMDIX DELTAT7X
CLSCMDIX COORMCTSX
OPNCMDOX PMCORTMX
CLSCMDOX PELORTMX
RESET PPRESTRAX
RESETFP PARCTMX
DELTAT1X AMCORTMX
DELTAT3X AELORTMX
DELTAT7X APRESTRAX
ELORTMX AARCTMX
MCORTMX AIMCDX
CONVELX AMCMVX
PRESTRAX AVPMCOTOX
ARCTMX AVPELOTOX
ITMCDLX AVAELOTOX
MCMOVTMX AVAMCOTOX
CBSTSX AVACVOX
RTKCTX AVAIMDOX
RTKCTALX AVAMCMTOX
COORPSMCX AVAARGTX
COORRSMCX AVPMCOTCX
COORSSMCX AVPELOTCX
COORTSMCX AVPPSAX
AVAELOTCX
AVAMCOTCX
AVACVCX
AVAPSAX
AVAIMDCX
AVAMCMTCX
DVPMCOTX
DVPELOTX
DVPPSAX
DVAELOTX
DVAMCOTX
DVACVX
DVAPSAX
DVAIMDX
DVAMCMVX
DVAARGTX
DFPMCOTOX
DFPELOTOX
DFAELOTOX
DFAMCOTOX
DFACVOX
DFAIMDOX
DFAMCMVOX
DFAARGTX
DFPMCOTCX
DFPELOTCX
DFPPSAX
DFAELOTCX
DFAMCOTCX
DFACVCX
DFAPSAX
DFAIMDCX
DFAMCMVCX
ERMCORTX
ERELORTX
ERPSAX
ERARGTIMX
CBSTSCFX
ACVX
RTKCTOX
RTKCTALOX
ALARMX
IEC12000060-1.vsd

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.16.4 Signals
Table 220: MONCOMP Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of binary outputs
BLOCKFUNC BOOLEAN 0 Block functionality to block execution of this function and
populate outputs with default values
OPNCMDIX BOOLEAN 0 CB open command input to function for starting Evaluation
for phase L1/L2/L3
CLSCMDIX BOOLEAN 0 CB close command input to function for starting Evaluation
for phase L1/L2/L3
OPNCMDOX BOOLEAN 0 CB open command output from StrategySwitching function
for triggering Evaluation for phase L1/L2/L3
CLSCMDOX BOOLEAN 0 CB close command output from StrategySwitching function
for triggering Evaluation for phase L1/L2/L3
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset input to clear all outputs except initial finger print
records
RESETFP BOOLEAN 0 Reset input to clear all outputs including initial finger print
records
DELTAT1X REAL 0.0 Electrical adjustment for RDDS or RRDS related correction for
phase L1/L2/L3
DELTAT3X REAL 0.0 Adaptive target correction based on previous operation
success for phase L1/L2/L3
DELTAT7X REAL 0.0 Re-Ignitions/Re-Strike arcing time extension for phase
L1/L2/L3
ELORTMX REAL 0.0 Circuit breaker electrical operating time for phase L1/L2/L3
MCORTMX REAL 0.0 Circuit breaker mechanical operating time for phase L1/L2/L3
CONVELX REAL 0.0 Calculated contact velocity for phase L1/L2/L3
PRESTRAX REAL 0.0 Angle of prestrike from previous voltage zero phase L1/L2/L3
ARCTMX REAL 0.0 Arcing time duration of CB for phase L1/L2/L3
ITMCDLX REAL 0.0 Initial mechanical movement delay observed for phase
L1/L2/L3
MCMOVTMX REAL 0.0 Total mechanical movement time observed for phase
L1/L2/L3
CBSTSX INTEGER 0 Circuit breaker position derived from mechanical and
electrical status for phase L1/L2/L3
RTKCTX INTEGER 0 Re-strike count input for phase L1/L2/L3
RTKCTALX BOOLEAN 0 Re-strike count alarm input for phase L1/L2/L3
COORPSMCX INTEGER 0 Co-ordination input 1 from ACBOM function for phase
L1/L2/L3
COORRSMCX INTEGER 0 Co-ordination input 2 from ACBOM function for phase
L1/L2/L3
COORSSMCX INTEGER 0 Co-ordination input 1 from strategy switching function for
phase L1/L2/L3
COORTSMCX INTEGER 0 Co-ordination input 2 from strategy switching function for
phase L1/L2/L3

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Table 221: MONCOMP Output signals

DELTAT1X REAL Electrical correction delay from switching instant for phase
L1/L2/L3
DELTAT3X REAL Adaptive switching compensation delay for opening or
closing operation of phase L1/L2/L3
DELTAT7X REAL Time correction for avoiding Re-strike/Re-ignition (to extend
arcing time) of phase L1/L2/L3
COORMCTSX INTEGER Co-ordination signal output from monitoring compensation
to strategy switching for phase L1/L2/L3
PMCORTMX REAL Predicted mechanical operation time for phase L1/L2/L3
PELORTMX REAL Predicted electrical operation time for phase L1/L2/L3
PPRESTRAX REAL Predicted pre strike angle for phase L1/L2/L3
PARCTMX REAL Predicted arcing time for phase L1/L2/L3
AMCORTMX REAL Actual mechanical operation time for phase L1/L2/L3
AELORTMX REAL Actual electrical operation time for phase L1/L2/L3
APRESTRAX REAL Actual pre strike angle for phase L1/L2/L3
AARCTMX REAL Actual arcing time for phase L1/L2/L3
AIMCDX REAL Actual Initial mechanical movement delay observed for phase
L1/L2/L3
AMCMVX REAL Actual total mechanical movement time observed for phase
L1/L2/L3
AVPMCOTOX REAL Predicted mechanical operating time average from initial
fingerprint open opers for phase L1/L2/L3
AVPELOTOX REAL Predicted electrical operating time average from initial
AVAELOTOX REAL Derived average electrical operating time from initial
AVAMCOTOX REAL Derived average mechanical operating time from initial
AVACVOX REAL Derived average contact velocity from initial fingerprint open
opers for phase L1/L2/L3
AVAIMDOX REAL Average Initial mechanical movement delay from initial
AVAMCMTOX REAL Average total mechanical movement time from initial
AVAARGTX REAL Average arcing time from initial fingerprint open opers for
phase L1/L2/L3
AVPMCOTCX REAL Predicted mechanical operating time average from initial
fingerprint close opers for phase L1/L2/L3
AVPELOTCX REAL Predicted electrical operating time average from initial
AVPPSAX REAL Predicted average pre strike angle from initial fingerprint
close opers for phase L1/L2/L3
AVAELOTCX REAL Derived average electrical operating time from initial
AVAMCOTCX REAL Derived average mechanical operating time from initial
AVACVCX REAL Derived average contact velocity from initial fingerprint close

Technical Manual
Monitoring

AVAPSAX REAL Average Pre strike angle from initial fingerprint operations
for phase L1/L2/L3
AVAIMDCX REAL Average Initial mechanical movement delay from initial
AVAMCMTCX REAL Average total mechanical movement time from initial
DVPMCOTX REAL Deviation of predicted mechanical operating time from initial
fingerprint opers for phase L1/L2/L3
DVPELOTX REAL Deviation of Predicted electrical operating time from initial
DVPPSAX REAL Deviation of predicted pre strike angle from initial fingerprint
DVAELOTX REAL Deviation of derived electrical operating time from initial
DVAMCOTX REAL Deviation of derived mechanical operating time from initial
DVACVX REAL Deviation of derived contact velocity from initial fingerprint
DVAPSAX REAL Deviation of pre strike angle from initial fingerprint opers for
phase L1/L2/L3
DVAIMDX REAL Deviation of initial mechanical movement delay from initial
DVAMCMVX REAL Deviation of total mechanical movement time from initial
DVAARGTX REAL Deviation of arcing time from initial fingerprint opers for
phase L1/L2/L3
AMCMVCX REAL Actual total mechanical movement time observed from close
operation for phase L1/L2/L3
AMCMVOX REAL Actual total mechanical movement time observed from open
operation for phase L1/L2/L3
ERELOTCX REAL Error of actual value from predicted value of electrical
operation time in close operation for phase
ERELOTOX REAL Error of actual value from predicted value of electrical
operation time in open operation for phase
ERMCOTCX REAL Error of actual value from predicted value of mechanical
operation time in close operation for phase
AMCOTMCX REAL Actual mechanical operation time from close operation for
phase L1/L2/L3
AIMCDCX REAL Actual Initial mechanical movement delay observed from
closing operation for phase L1/L2/L3
AIMCDOX REAL Actual Initial mechanical movement delay observed from
open operation for phase L1/L2/L3
ACVOX REAL Actual contact velocity from open operation for phase
L1/L2/L3
ACVCX REAL Actual contact velocity from close operation for phase
L1/L2/L3
ERMCOTOX REAL Error of actual value from predicted value of mechanical
operation time in open operation for phase
AMCOTMOX REAL Actual mechanical operation time from open operation for
phase L1/L2/L3
ERMCORTX REAL Error of actual value from predicted value of mechanical
operation time for phase L1/L2/L3

Technical Manual
Monitoring

ERELORTX REAL Error of actual value from predicted value of electrical
operation time for phase L1/L2/L3
ERPSAX REAL Error of actual value from predicted value of pre strike angle
for phase L1/L2/L3
ERARGTIMX REAL Error of actual value from predicted value of arcing time for
phase L1/L2/L3
CBSTSCFX BOOLEAN Indicates conflict in circuit breaker position for phase
L1/L2/L3
RTKCTOX INTEGER Re-strike count output for phase L1/L2/L3
RTKCTALOX BOOLEAN Re-strike count alarm output for phase L1/L2/L3
ALARMX BOOLEAN Indication of conflict of open/close operations for phase
L1/L2/L3
ACVX REAL Actual contact velocity for phase L1/L2/L3
11.16.5 Settings
Table 222: MONCOMP Non group settings (basic)

On
Table 223: MONCOMP Non group settings (advanced)

InitialRecords 2 - 50 - 2 20 Number of initial finger print records
OptCombEqual CombinedTotalRc - - CombinedTotalR Option for combined total number of
rds crds initial records or equal number of
EqualOpnClsRcrd open & close initial records
s

Table 224: MONCOMP Monitored data

PMCORTMX REAL - ms Predicted mechanical operation time
for phase L1/L2/L3
PELORTMX REAL - ms Predicted electrical operation time for
phase L1/L2/L3
PPRESTRAX REAL - deg Predicted pre strike angle for phase
L1/L2/L3
PARCTMX REAL - ms Predicted arcing time for phase
L1/L2/L3
AMCORTMX REAL - ms Actual mechanical operation time for
phase L1/L2/L3
AELORTMX REAL - ms Actual electrical operation time for
phase L1/L2/L3

Technical Manual
Monitoring

APRESTRAX REAL - deg Actual pre strike angle for phase
L1/L2/L3
AARCTMX REAL - ms Actual arcing time for phase L1/L2/L3
AIMCDX REAL - ms Actual Initial mechanical movement
delay observed for phase L1/L2/L3
AMCMVX REAL - ms Actual total mechanical movement
time observed for phase L1/L2/L3
AVPMCOTOX REAL - ms Predicted mechanical operating time
average from initial fingerprint open
AVPELOTOX REAL - ms Predicted electrical operating time
average from initial fingerprint open
AVAELOTOX REAL - ms Derived average electrical operating
time from initial fingerprint open
AVAMCOTOX REAL - ms Derived average mechanical operating
AVACVOX REAL - m/s Derived average contact velocity from
initial fingerprint open opers for
phase L1/L2/L3
AVAIMDOX REAL - ms Average Initial mechanical movement
delay from initial fingerprint open
AVAMCMTOX REAL - ms Average total mechanical movement
AVAARGTX REAL - ms Average arcing time from initial
fingerprint open opers for phase
L1/L2/L3
AVPMCOTCX REAL - ms Predicted mechanical operating time
average from initial fingerprint close
AVPELOTCX REAL - ms Predicted electrical operating time
average from initial fingerprint close
AVPPSAX REAL - deg Predicted average pre strike angle
from initial fingerprint close opers for
phase L1/L2/L3
AVAELOTCX REAL - ms Derived average electrical operating
time from initial fingerprint close
AVAMCOTCX REAL - ms Derived average mechanical operating
AVACVCX REAL - m/s Derived average contact velocity from
initial fingerprint close opers for
phase L1/L2/L3
AVAPSAX REAL - deg Average Pre strike angle from initial
fingerprint operations for phase
L1/L2/L3
AVAIMDCX REAL - ms Average Initial mechanical movement
delay from initial fingerprint close

Technical Manual
Monitoring

AVAMCMTCX REAL - ms Average total mechanical movement
DVPMCOTX REAL - ms Deviation of predicted mechanical
operating time from initial fingerprint
DVPELOTX REAL - ms Deviation of Predicted electrical
DVPPSAX REAL - deg Deviation of predicted pre strike angle
from initial fingerprint opers for
phase L1/L2/L3
DVAELOTX REAL - ms Deviation of derived electrical
DVAMCOTX REAL - ms Deviation of derived mechanical
DVACVX REAL - m/s Deviation of derived contact velocity
from initial fingerprint opers for
phase L1/L2/L3
DVAPSAX REAL - deg Deviation of pre strike angle from
initial fingerprint opers for phase
L1/L2/L3
DVAIMDX REAL - ms Deviation of initial mechanical
movement delay from initial
DVAMCMVX REAL - ms Deviation of total mechanical
movement time from initial
DVAARGTX REAL - ms Deviation of arcing time from initial
DFPMCOTOX REAL - ms Average drift of predicted mech oper
DFPELOTOX REAL - ms Average drift of predicted elec oper
opers for phaseL1/L2/L3
DFAELOTOX REAL - ms Average drift in deviation of elec oper
DFAMCOTOX REAL - ms Average drift of mechanical oper time
from initial fingerprint open opers for
phase L1/L2/L3
DFACVOX REAL - m/s Average drift in deviation of contact
velocity from initial fingerprint open
opers for phaseL1/L2/L3
DFAIMDOX REAL - ms Average drift of initial mech
fingerprint open opers for phase
L1/L2/L3
DFAMCMVOX REAL - ms Average drift of total mech movement
DFAARGTX REAL - ms Average drift in deviation of arcing

Technical Manual
Monitoring

DFPMCOTCX REAL - ms Average drift of predicted mech oper
DFPELOTCX REAL - ms Average drift of predicted elec oper
DFPPSAX REAL - deg Average drift of predicted prestrike
angle from initial fingerprint close
DFAELOTCX REAL - ms Average drift of electrical operating
DFAMCOTCX REAL - ms Average drift of mechanical oper time
from initial fingerprint close opers for
phase L1/L2/L3
DFACVCX REAL - m/s Average drift of derived contact
velocity from initial fingerprint close
DFAPSAX REAL - deg Average drift of pre strike angle from
initial fingerprint opers for phase
L1/L2/L3
DFAIMDCX REAL - ms Average drift of initial mech
fingerprint close opers for phase
L1/L2/L3
DFAMCMVCX REAL - ms Average drift of total mech movement
ERMCORTX REAL - ms Error of actual value from predicted
value of mechanical operation time for
phase L1/L2/L3
ERELORTX REAL - ms Error of actual value from predicted
value of electrical operation time for
phase L1/L2/L3
ERPSAX REAL - deg Error of actual value from predicted
value of pre strike angle for phase
L1/L2/L3
ERARGTIMX REAL - ms Error of actual value from predicted
value of arcing time for phase
L1/L2/L3
RTKCTOX INTEGER - - Re-strike count output for phase
L1/L2/L3
ACVX REAL - m/s Actual contact velocity for phase
L1/L2/L3
11.16.7 Operation principle GUID-EE092D58-0302-4181-9F9E-13D08035AD7D v1
The overall operation of the function is explained using the functional module diagram.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Error Errors
Coor inputs Evaluation
Delta values
Command inputs
Command outputs Coor output
Trigger
Predicted/Actual values Coordination Predicted values
Logic
Common inputs Actual values
Open specific values Fingerprint Trigger

Trigger Trigger
Close specific values
Fingerprint Predicted Average
Trigger reset Average Actual Average
Coor reset
Deviation
Predicted Deviation
from Average
Actual Deviation
Drift Average Predicted Drift Average

Actual Drift Average
Figure 111: Functional module diagram
11.16.7.1 Coordination logic GUID-487CD3F7-D62A-456F-BD8E-1AB0EEE46920 v1
The coordination logic block describes the adaptive switching times compensation for the
systematic variation of circuit breaker operating time. Based on the received coordination
inputs from other functions such as, StrategySwitching (coorSSMC), Pre-strike (coorPSMC),
Re-strike (coorRSMC), correction times are considered for open or close operations. Electrical
correction and mechanical correction times are considered for evaluating overall
compensation for the circuit breaker operating time, ideal RRDS (Rate of Raise of Dielectric
Strength) related correction for opening operations (Re-strike/Re-ignition) correction time
and ideal RDDS (Rate of Decay of Dielectric Strength) related correction for closing operations
(Pre-strike) correction time. Both Pre-strike and Re-ignition/Re-srtike correction times
adaptively vary to provide the overall compensation for the varying circuit breaker operating
time. Summation of deltaT1XR, deltaT1XP is considered as deltaT1X, summation of deltaT3XR,
deltaT3XP is considered as deltaT3X and deltaT7XR is considered as deltaT7X.
Figure 112: Coordination signal flow diagram
The coordination signal flow used in PWC600 shown in Figure 112 is based on the concepts of
subscriber/publisher. This ensures that in no conditions (both open, close command going
high or wrong ACT connections) the command operation compensation or correction
evaluation result in wrong operation. The difference from the subscriber/publisher concept to
the adaptation here is, the additional triggering permit signal is required along with the
subscriber. Consider an example, when an open command is received and which resets in a

Technical Manual
Monitoring
few milliseconds (>5ms required as per PWC requirements) and a close command input is high
or both go high together, then the functionality blocks compensation and allows a reduced
accuracy switching or ideally possible switching is performed.
Open/close command input is received by all the function blocks as shown in Figure 112.
Coordination signal contains various information which is exchanged between function blocks
to execute the evaluations synchronously with each other. Any discrepancy (for example,
mismatch of command input status between functions) is reported as an alarm to the user. All
the coordination signals from other function blocks is reported to Monitoring Compensation
(MONCOMP) function to check for operation values reporting. Coordination signal logic flow
diagram in MonitoringCompensation which describes coordination signal bit wise control is
shown in Figure 112. Predicted values (PredictedValue) and actual values (ActualValue) are
filtered out from input value received from Pre-strike and Re-strike functions according to the
status of the coordination signal. During close operation, parameters related to the open
operation have no relevance and vice-versa for open operation to close operation parameters.
Hence, when a variable has no relevance, that is, it is not applicable for database management,
a very high positive value is logged which can be filtered off later. However, if an operation
fails or particular parameter could not be evaluated during an operation before the time out, a
zero value cannot be stored as for some parameters it might mean an ideal operation.
SSMCBit0 = Open
SSMCBit1 = Close
SSMCBit2 = OpenByPass
COORSSMC SSMCBit3 = CloseByPass
SSMCBit23 = TestOpen MCTSBit0 = Open
SSMCBit24 = TestClose MCTSBit1 = Close
TSMCBit8
MCTSBit2 = OpenBypass
MCTSBit3 = CloseBypass
MCTSBit4 = ExternalOpen
MCTSBit5 = ExternalClose
MCTSBit10 = Trigger
N/A
MCTSBit11 = ReducedAccOpen
COORMCTS
PSMCBit0 = Open Data Values
PSMCBit1 = Close MCTSBit12 = ReducedAccClose
of Close
PSMCBit4 = ExternalOpen MCTSBit21 = OpenCancel
PSMCBit5 = ExternalClose MCTSBit22 = CloseCancel
Latch
PSMCBit6 = CalcReadyOpen MCTSBit23 = TestOpen
PSMCBit7 = CalcReadyClose MCTSBit24 = TestClose
PSMCBit11 = ReducedAccOpen MCTSBit30 = CBUnstable
PSMCBit6
PSMCBit12 = ReducedAccClose
COORPSMC PSMCBit21 = OpenCancel
PSMCBit25
PSMCBit22 = CloseCancel SSTSBit21

PSMCBit23 = TestOpen Predicted
PSMCBit24 = TestClose Data Values
PSMCBit25 = PredOpen SSTSBit29 For Open
PSMCBit26 = PredClose
RSMCBit6 Latch
PSMCBit27 = ActualOpen RSMCBit25
PSMCBit28 = ActualClose
Predicted/Actual TrigBCOpen
SSMCBit0 Data Types
SSMCBit2 for Open
PSMCBit6
RSMCBit0 PSMCBit27
PSMCBit0
PSMCBit0 = Open OpenCmdIn
PSMCBit1 = Close OpenCmdOut TrigO

COOR RSMCBit4
PSMCBit4 = ExternalOpen DATA PSMCBit4 RSMCBit21
XOR
PSMCBit5 = ExternalClose MCTSBit4

MCTSBit11 PSMCBit21
PSMCBit6 = CalcReadyOpen RSMCBit11 SSTSBit29 RSMCBit6
PSMCBit7 = CalcReadyClose PSMCBit11 RSMCBit27 SSMCBit29
PSMCBit11 = ReducedAccOpen Normal
PSMCBit12 = ReducedAccClose RSMCBit23 Data Types
COORRSMC PSMCBit21 = OpenCancel PSMCBit23 TSMCBit8 for Open
PSMCBit22 = CloseCancel
PSMCBit23 = TestOpen
Actual
PSMCBit24 = TestClose TrigO
Trigger MCTSBit10 Data Values
PSMCBit25 = PredOpen TrigC
PSMCBit26 = PredClose For Open LEGEND
PSMCBit27 = ActualOpen
PSMCBit21
PSMCBit28 = ActualClose MCTSBit21
RSMCBit21
PSMCBit22
MCTSBit22 COOR
RSMCBit22 Latch Input
TSMCBit 8 = TriggerReset Normal

RSMCBit0
COORTSMC TSMCBit 9 = COORReset SSMCBit0 MCTSBit0 Data Types
PSMCBit0 for Open/Close
RSMCBit1
SSMCBit1 MCTSBit1
PSMCBit1
Actual
Data Values Direct
For Close
RSMCBit2
SSMCBit2 MCTSBit2
Data
PSMCBit2
Normal
RSMCBit3 Data Types
SSMCBit3 MCTSBit3
PSMCBit3
PSMCBit7 for Close
PSMCBit28
Input
RSMCBit23 TrigC
SSMCBit23 MCTSBit23 Data
PSMCBit23
RSMCBit22
RSMCBit7 PSMCBit22
RSMCBit24 RSMCBit28
SSMCBit24 MCTSBit24 SSMCBit29
OpenCmdIn OpenCmdIn PSMCBit24 Predicted/Actual
OpenCmdIn = OpenCmdIn
CloseCmdIn CloseCmdIn Data Types TrigBCClose
CloseCmdIn = CloseCmdIn SSMCBit1 Stored
for Close
SSMCBit3 Data
PSMCBit7
RSMCBit1 PSMCBit26
TSMCBit9
PSMCBit1
OpenCmdIn SSTSBit22 Predicted
OpenCmdOut Data Values
OpenCmdOut = OpenCmdOut RSMCBit5 For Close
OpenCmdOut CloseCmdOut = CloseCmdOut OpenCmdOut PSMCBit5 SSTSBit29
Intermediate
XOR
MCTSBit5
CloseCmdOut CloseCmdOut MCTSBit12
RSMCBit12
SSTSBit29
RSMCBit7 Data
PSMCBit12 RSMCBit26
RSMCBit24
PSMCBit24
N/A
Data Values COOR
of Open
Output
Latch
IEC12000073-1.vsd
Figure 113: Co-ordination signal logical flow diagram in MonitoringCompensation
11.16.7.2 Fingerprint average logic GUID-6D6F4F61-1FDB-44B7-9DB0-62FB1F69F4A7 v1
The fingerprint average logic block describes the evaluation of initial fingerprint operations,
average of correction times for various operating and controlling parameters such as,
mechanical opening/closing time, electrical opening/closing time and Pre-striking angle.
Actual values of operating/controlling parameters and predicted values of operating/
controlling parameters is fed from ACBMSCBR (Advanced Circuit Breaker Operation
Monitoring) functions. This block selects the actual/predicted values based on coordination
signal inputs received from ACBMSCBR functions. Cumulative average of actual and predicted
parameters is evaluated to monitor the variation of actual and predicted values for initial
fingerprint records. Figure 114 depicts the flow of cumulative average computation for both
predicted and actual operating/controlling parameters for initial fingerprint operations.
Computed average for different controlling/operating parameters of CB is used to evaluate
deviation of actual/predicted values from the initial fingerprint operations.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Input Quantity Close
Input Quantity Open
Trigger Open/Close
Option – Combined/Equal
Average Open
Open Records count Average
Fingerprint
Calculation Logic Average Close
Number of Initial Records records count Max Records Close Records count
setting evaluation Fingerprint
Records count Trigger Deviation Open
Trigger Deviation Close
I EC12000063-1-vsd
Figure 114: Fingerprint average block diagram
Equations representing the calculation of number of records, trigger open/close for average
computation and average computation for open/close operation are as follows:
max Records = NOT ( optCombEqual ) ⋅ 20 + optCombEqual ⋅ ( initial Re cords ) / 2

open Re cordsCount = MIN max Records ⋅ MAX ( ((( open Re cordsCount + 1) ⋅ TriggerOpen ) ⋅ open Re cordsCount ))
close Re cordsCount = MIN max Records ⋅ MAX ( ((( close Re cordsCount + 1) ⋅ TriggerClose ) ⋅ close Re cordsCount ))
open Re cordsCount = MIN ( open Re cordsCount ⋅ ( initial Re cords − close Re cordsCount ) )

close Re cordsCount = MIN ( close Re cordsCount ⋅ ( initial Re cords − open Re cordsCount ) )

aveCalcTrigOpen = open Re cordsCount − open Re cordsCountOld

æ ( averageOpen ) × ( openrecordsCount - 1) + inputQuantityOpen ö

averageOpen = ç ÷ × avgCalcTrigOpen + averageopenCount × NOT ( avgCalcTrigOpen )
è open Re cordsCount ø
open Re cordsCountOld = open Re cordsCount

aveCalcTrigClose = close Re cordsCount − close Re cordsCountOld

æ ( averageClose ) × ( close Re cordsCount - 1) + inputQuantityClose ö

averageClose = ç ÷ × aveCalcTrigClose + averageOpenCount × NOT ( aveCalcTrigClose )
è close Re cordsCount ø
close Re cordsCountOld = close Re cordsCount

11.16.7.3 Deviation from average logic GUID-92C024B6-932D-42B6-9BCD-19893C67CE0C v1
The deviation from average logic block describes the deviation of correction times for various
operating and controlling parameters such as, mechanical opening/closing time, electrical
opening/closing time and Pre-striking angle. Predicted/actual average values of operating/
controlling parameters and actual/predicted values of operating/controlling parameters,
differes in the deviation from respective actual/predicted parameters. Figure 115 depicts the

Technical Manual
Monitoring
calculation of deviation of actual/predicted values from average of initial fingerprint

operations of different operating/controlling parameters of CB. Computed deviation values
are used to evaluate drift of actual/predicted values from the initial fingerprint operations.
predAveMechTimeX
predAveElecTimeX
predAvePreStrikeAngleX
actAveElecTimeX
actAveMechTimeX
actAveContactVelocityX
actAvePreStrikeAngleX
predDevMechTimeX
actAveInitialMechDelayX
predDevElecTimeX
actAveMechMovementTimeX predDevPreStrikeAngleX
actDevElecTimeX
predMechTimeX
Deviation Value= actDevMechTimeX
predElecTimeX Actual/Predcited value – actDevPreStrikeAngleX
Average value actDevContactVelocityX
predPreStrikeAngleX
actDevInitialMechDelayX
predInitialMechDelayX
actDevMechMovementTimeX
predMechMovementTimeX
actMechTimeX
actElecTimeX
actPreStrikeAngleX
actContactVelocityX
actInitialMechDelayX
actMechMovementTimeX
IEC12000064-1-vsd
Figure 115: Deviation from average block diagram
11.16.7.4 Drift average logic GUID-E8019CE4-C4DD-4EE6-B20D-45C6F13BC25A v1
Drift is the cumulative average deviation of a parameter (either predicted/actual) from the
average fingerprint values. Drift gives a good explanation about parameter deviation as an
average. Deviation is only the current operation's measure. However, drift accumulates the
deviation of a steady drift value ideally near zero, which indicates that the POW (point on
wave) control occurs steadily on the CB. A flickering drift value suggests that the CB POW
control is not operating the intended way. Drift average calculation comprises of deviation of
operating/controlling parameters of CB from the actual/predicted parameters. Drift average,
calculated to estimate the drift of actual/predicted values or operating/controlling
parameters of CB for the initial fingerprint operations, helps the user to estimate the variation
trend of CB performance parameters over a certain operating time. Figure 116 depicts drift
evaluation logic for actual/predicted operating/controlling parameters.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
predAveMechOperTimeOX predDriftMechOperTimeOX
predAveElecOperTimeOX predDriftElecOperTimeOX
predAvePreStrikeAngleX predDriftPreStrikeAngleX
actAveElecOperTimeOX actDriftElecOperTimeOX
actAveMechOperTimeOX actDriftMechOperTimeOX
actAveArcingTimeX actDriftArcingTimeX
actDriftContactVelocityOX
actAveContactVelocityOX
Z-1 actDriftInitialMechDelayOX
actAveInitialMechDelayOX
Init = 0.0
actDriftMechMovementTimeOX
actAveMechMovementTimeOX
actDriftPreStrikeAngleX
actAvePreStrikeAngleX
Average Drift predDriftMechOperTimeCX
predAveMechOperTimeCX = Cumulative Sum/Number of operations
predDriftElecOperTimeCX
predAveElecOperTimeCX
actDriftElecOperTimeCX
actAveElecOperTimeCX
actDriftMechOperTimeCX
actAveMechOperTimeCX
actDriftContactVelocityCX
actAveContactVelocityCX
actDriftInitialMechDelayCX
actAveInitialMechDelayCX
actDriftMechMovementTimeCX
actAveMechMovementTimeCX IEC12000065-1-vsd
Figure 116: Drift average logical diagram
11.16.7.5 Error evaluation logic GUID-2FF4736F-6474-4115-B19B-3945DF5675F1 v1
Error value is evaluated for electrical open/close time, mechanical open/close time and Pre-
strike angle to determine the deviation of predicted value from the actual value. Following
equation provides evaluation of error value for open/close operations.
ErrorValue = ActualValue − Pr edictedValue

11.17 Multilevel threshold alarm generation MONALM GUID-768D13F2-096F-4D18-8612-0737444B992C v1
11.17.1 Identification GUID-D00D44D6-B7FE-4980-BDE9-63B08047DE28 v1
Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device
number
Multilevel threshold MONALM - -
alarm generation
11.17.2 Functionality GUID-92C746A1-FFCA-42A5-BB58-7F00D25D57C5 v2
MONALM is used to monitor up to 9 groups of measured or calculated analog values, to

ascertain whether they are within a defined “normal” range as per the process requirements.
The function compares each input value against 1…4 threshold levels and indicates the range
in which it is currently residing. Values outside the normal range are indicated by a warning or
alarm.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
The numerical range information can be decoded into binary status signals by other functions
such as MVEXP, for example, to control a LED or binary output or to generate an event.
Furthermore, MONALM monitors one group of binary inputs, which represent alarm levels, and
replicates the input values to corresponding output signals. These signals are also used to
indicate the operational capability of the circuit breaker.
A quick indication of the overall status can be obtained from two alarm status outputs, which
summarize the conditions of 5 input groups each.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.17.3 Function block GUID-FAC0AFE4-1441-4210-ABB3-D3010B2EE851 v1
MONALM
BLOCK ALR1L1
BLOCKFUNC ALR1L2
I1L1 ALR1L3
I1L2 ALR2L1
I1L3 ALR2L2
I2L1 ALR2L3
I2L2 ALR3L1
I2L3 ALR3L2
I3L1 ALR3L3
I3L2 ALR4L1
I3L3 ALR4L2
I4L1 ALR4L3
I4L2 ALR5L1
I4L3 ALR5L2
I5L1 ALR5L3
I5L2 ALR6L1
I5L3 ALR6L2
I6L1 ALR6L3
I6L2 ALR7L1
I6L3 ALR7L2
I7L1 ALR7L3
I7L2 ALR8L1
I7L3 ALR8L2
I8L1 ALR8L3
I8L2 ALR9L1
I8L3 ALR9L2
I9L1 ALR9L3
I9L2 B10WRL1
I9L3 B10ALL1
I1ALL1 B10HALL1
I1ALL2 B10WRL2
I1ALL3 B10ALL2
I2ALL1 B10HALL2
I2ALL2 B10WRL3
I2ALL3 B10ALL3
I3ALL1 B10HALL3
I3ALL2 ALS1T5
I3ALL3 ALS6T10
I4ALL1 CBOPCAP3P
I4ALL2
I4ALL3
I5ALL1
I5ALL2
I5ALL3
I6ALL1
I6ALL2
I6ALL3
I7ALL1
I7ALL2
I7ALL3
I8ALL1
I8ALL2
I8ALL3
I9ALL1
I9ALL2
I9ALL3
BI10FLL1
BI10MLL1
BI10LLL1
BI10FLL2
BI10MLL2
BI10LLL2
BI10FLL3
BI10MLL3
BI10LLL3
IEC12000039_1_vsd
Figure 117: MONALM function block

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.17.4 Signals
Table 225: MONALM Input signals

I1L1 REAL 0.0 Analog input 1 L1
I1ALL1 BOOLEAN 0 Alarm input signal showing input 1 L1’s state of health

Technical Manual
Monitoring

BI10FLL1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10 full level signal for phase L1
BI10MLL1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10 medium level signal for phase L1
BI10LLL1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10 low level signal for phase L1
Table 226: MONALM Output signals

ALR1L1 INTEGER Alarm range integer value for signal 1 L1

Technical Manual
Monitoring

B10WRL1 BOOLEAN Output warning signal for binary input 10 L1
B10ALL1 BOOLEAN Output alarm signal for binary input 10 L1
B10HALL1 BOOLEAN Output high alarm signal for binary input 10 L1
B10HALL2 BOOLEAN Output high alarm signal for binary input 10 L2
B10HALL3 BOOLEAN Output high alarm signal for binary input10 L3
ALS1T5 INTEGER Alarm status integer for inputs 1 to 5
ALS6T10 INTEGER Alarm status integer for inputs 6 to 10
CBOPCAP3P INTEGER CB operation capability signal having packed information for
three phases

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.17.5 Settings
Table 227: MONALM Non group settings (basic)

On
Inp1LimitSelect Disabled - - Disabled Selection of monitored limits for input
Hi, HiHi, Lo, LoLo 1
Hi, Hi-Hi
Lo, Lo-Lo
Hi, Lo
Hi-Hi, Lo-Lo
Hi
Hi-Hi
Lo
Lo-Lo
Inp1HystAbsolute 0.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 10.0 Absolute Hysteresis value for input 1
Inp1HiHiLimit -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 100.0 High alarm value limit above which an
upper limit alarm would be issued for
input 1.
Inp1HiLimit -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 100.0 High warning value limit above which
an upper limit warning would be
issued for input 1.
Inp1LoLimit -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Low value limit below which a lower
limit warning would be issued for
input 1.
Inp1LoLoLimit -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Lower value limit below which a lower
limit alarm would be issued for input
1.
Inp1SensorMode 1 sensor mode - - 1 sensor mode Selection of one or three sensors for
3 sensor mode input 1.
Hi, HiHi, Lo, LoLo 2.
Hi, Hi-Hi
Lo, Lo-Lo
Hi, Lo
Hi-Hi, Lo-Lo
Hi
Hi-Hi
Lo
Lo-Lo
input 2.
issued for input 2.
input 2.
2.

Technical Manual
Monitoring

Hi, HiHi, Lo, LoLo 3.
Hi, Hi-Hi
Lo, Lo-Lo
Hi, Lo
Hi
Hi-Hi
Lo
Lo-Lo
input 3.
issued for input 3.
input 3.
3.
Hi, Hi-Hi
Lo, Lo-Lo
Hi, Lo
Hi-Hi, Lo-Lo
Hi
Lo
Lo-Lo
input 4.
issued for input 4.
input 4.
4.
Hi, Hi-Hi
Lo, Lo-Lo
Hi, Lo
Hi-Hi, Lo-Lo
Hi
Hi-Hi
Lo
Lo-Lo

Technical Manual
Monitoring

input 5.
issued for input 5.
input 5.
5.
Hi, Hi-Hi
Lo, Lo-Lo
Hi, Lo
Hi-Hi, Lo-Lo
Hi
Hi-Hi
Lo
Lo-Lo
input 6.
issued for input 6.
input 6
6.
Hi, Hi-Hi
Lo, Lo-Lo
Hi, Lo
Hi-Hi, Lo-Lo
Hi
Hi-Hi
Lo
Lo-Lo
input 7.
issued for input 7.
input 7.

Technical Manual
Monitoring

7.
Hi, Hi-Hi
Lo, Lo-Lo
Hi, Lo
Hi-Hi, Lo-Lo
Hi
Hi-Hi
Lo
Lo-Lo
input 8
issued for input 8.
input 8.
8.
Hi, Hi-Hi
Lo, Lo-Lo
Hi, Lo
Hi-Hi, Lo-Lo
Hi
Hi-Hi
Lo
Lo-Lo
input 9.
issued for input 9.
input 9.
9.

Technical Manual
Monitoring

BinInp10AlarmMode Disable all - - Disable all Selection of alarm mode for binary
Enab only Wrn input 10
Enab only Alarm
Enab only Hi
Alarm
Enab Wrn & Alarm
Enab Al & Hi Al
Enab Wrn Al &
HiAl
BinInp10SensorMode 1 sensor mode - - 1 sensor mode Selection of one or three sensors for
3 sensor mode binary input 10.

Table 228: MONALM Monitored data

ALR1L1 INTEGER 0=Normal - Alarm range integer value for signal 1
1=High Warning L1
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L2
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L3
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L1
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L2
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L3
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L1
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L2
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm

Technical Manual
Monitoring

1=High Warning L3
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L1
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L2
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L3
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L1
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L2
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L3
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L1
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L2
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L3
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L1
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L2
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm

Technical Manual
Monitoring

1=High Warning L3
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L1
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L2
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L3
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L1
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L2
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
1=High Warning L3
2=Low Warning
3=High Alarm
4=Low Alarm
11.17.7 Operation principle GUID-BC2E5956-4F45-4B85-BD83-AF4691E0ACDE v1
The Multilevel threshold alarm generation MONALM function triggers an alarm when an analog
quantity is not in a normal range.
MONALM works on the principle of comparing the analog quantity against a set of thresholds
in two directions at two different levels on either side. Nine analog quantities, for example,
control voltage, temperature, drive pressure, spring pressure and so on can be monitored such
that when they exceed the threshold values, alarms are generated. The binary signals are the
supervising levels of an analog signal, whose status level (for example, gas pressure, spring
charge status and so on) indicates when the analog signal falls below the threshold.
Use the setting InpxSensorMode to select either 1 Sensor Mode or 3 Sensor Mode operation.
Select 1 Sensor Mode if a single sensor signal is connected to the corresponding IxL1 input,
else select 3 Sensor Mode for three sensor signals (one per phase).
Up to nine analog input signals can be supervised. For each signal, one or two supervision
thresholds can be configured in each direction, or supervision can be disabled altogether in
any direction.
The binary input level alarm can be configured to indicate Warning, Alarm and/or High Alarm.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
• If the full level binary signal is high, no warning or alarm is generated, regardless of the
status of the other binary signals.
• If the full level binary signal is low and the medium level signal is high, Warning goes high.
• If only the low level signal is high, Alarm goes high.
• If all binary inputs are low, High Alarm goes high.
For analog quantities, exceeding the thresholds can trigger one of the four alarms. The output
ALRxLn can have different values according to the conditions defined below:
• 0 (normal range) indicates, the input signal is in normal range, that is, between low and
high warning limits, or the alarm input IxALn is high
• 1 (high warning) indicates, the signal has risen to or above InpxHiLimit
• 2 (low warning) indicates, the signal has dropped to or below InpxLoLimit
• 3 (high alarm) indicates, the signal has risen to or above InpxHiHiLimit
• 4 (low alarm) indicates, the signal has dropped to or below InpxLoLoLimit
where x indicates the analog input and n indicates the phase.
The input value 1.175494E-38, which is the smallest possible real value, is not
evaluated for determining the range and is always treated as in Normal range,
regardless of the set limits. The purpose is to prevent raising of alarms on
quantities that have no defined value, for example, a switching time if the
circuit breaker has not been operated yet.
MONALM also generates a general alarm (gives information) when any one of the alarming
condition is present or when a signal connected to IxALn goes high. Loss of the sensor signal
of the monitored analog signals can be connected to this.
11.17.7.1 Alarm status logic GUID-19430436-DA44-4966-994A-10723961982D v1
The status of the supervision alarm is indicated by an alarm status functionality which is
designed to bit pack the alarm status of all ten input groups into two integer signals. The
sequential bits carry the status information of each analog input group for all the three phases
independently. The phase information for every input is described using two bits, where the
least significant bit (LSB) indicates warning and the most significant bit (MSB) indicates alarm
or high alarm.
The alarm status information for phase L1,
• If the signal is in low or high warning range, the LSB is set high.
• If the signal is in low or high alarm range, the MSB is set high.
• If alarm input signal IxALL1 is high, both MSB and LSB are set high (this indicates the
status of signal's health).
• In all other conditions both MSB and LSB are set low.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
ALR1(L1-L3)
Analog input 1 Monitoring alarm
(L1-L3) logic Alarm status 1
ALR2(L1-L3) to ALR8(L1-L3)
Input(s) Logic(s) ALS1T5
2 to 8 2 to 8 Alarm status 2 to 8
Alarm status logic
ALS6T10
ALR9(L1-L3)
Analog input 9 Monitoring alarm
(L1-L3) logic Alarm status 9
Alarm status 10
B10WR(L1-L3)
B10AL(L1-L3) Evaluating alarm
Binary input 10 Binary settings B10HAL(L1-L3) status signal for
(L1-L3) logic binary alarm
outputs
B10WR(L1-L3)
B10AL(L1-L3)
B10HAL(L1-L3)
Evaluating CB
operation capability CBOPCAP3P
signal for the 3
phases IEC12000037_1_vsd
Figure 118: MONALM logic diagram

Figure 118 shows the alarm status processing of the analog inputs and a single binary input in
the three phases. It also evaluates the alarm status logic and generates the outputs.
Similarly, for phase L2 and phase L3, the alarm status are set. The information for all the ten
inputs in three-phases are divided into two 32 bit outputs. Here, output 1 is designated as
ALS1T5 and output 2 is designated as ALS6T10. The last two bits in both outputs are unused.
Calculating alarm status bits for analog input signals GUID-BC10CFB6-4B39-4218-B134-0E5A55D1DD47 v1

Example for alarm status calculation for analog input signals 1-9:
Consider for any input x for phase n, if Warning (Low Warning/High Warning) information is
set, then:
[ 6·(x-1) + 2·(n-1) ]th bit position in alarm status output goes high.
If Alarm (Low Alarm/High Alarm) information needs to be set, then:
[ 6·(x-1) + 2·(n-1) +1 ]th bit position in alarm status output goes high.
The Alarm and Warning information are set as shown in the table
Table 229: Alarm and Warning information for analog input signals
Input phase Assumed alarm range Bit position
1 L1 High Warning 6·(1-1)+2·(1-1) =0
0th bit set high
1 L2 Low Alarm 6·(1-1)+2·(2-1)+1 =3
3rd bit set high
1 L3 Low Warning 6·(1-1)+2·(3-1) =4
4th bit set high
2 L1 Low Warning 6·(2-1)+2·(1-1) =6
6th bit set high

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Input phase Assumed alarm range Bit position

2 L2 High Alarm 6·(2-1)+2·(2-1)+1 =9
9th bit set high
2 L3 Low Alarm 6·(2-1)+2·(3-1)+1 =11
11th bit set high
3 L1 Normal both 12th and 13th bit set low
3 L2 High Warning 6·(3-1)+2·(2-1) =14
14th bit set high
3 L3 Alarm Input is high both 16th and 17th bit set high
4 L1 Normal both 18th and 19th bit set low
4 L2 Low Alarm 6·(4-1)+2·(2-1)+1 =21
21st bit set high
4 L3 Low Warning 6·(4-1)+2·(3-1) =22
22nd bit set high
5 L1 Low Warning 6·(5-1)+2·(1-1) =24
24th bit set high
5 L2 High Warning 6·(5-1)+2·(2-1) =26
26th bit set high
5 L3 Alarm Input is high both 28th and 29th bit set high
ALS1T5 becomes 00110101011000110100101001011001 in binary, that is 895699545 in decimal.
During the bit packing, the 30th and 31st bits are not used (set as zero).
Similar procedure is carried out for ALS6T10
Calculating alarm status bits for binary input signals GUID-B16C1FEF-36F9-4ECB-9E5A-4331029DB904 v1

Example for alarm status calculation for binary input 10:
Table 230: Alarm status bits for binary input signals

Input in phase Alarm range Alarm status
L1 Warning is set to 01
L2 Alarm is set to 1000
L3 High Alarm is set to 100000
Hence the alarm status for binary input 10 is 101001. This gets bit packed in ALS6T10 (in 24th
to 29th bit position).
If none of these conditions are met (that is no warning or alarm), the bits are set to 0.
11.17.7.2 Hysteresis GUID-5C6220FD-69BC-4C82-99EA-0C54603F9A28 v1
Hysteresis is applied to prevent frequent toggling of alarms if the input signal oscillates
around the threshold by a small amount. The extent of the hysteresis zone is defined by
InpxHystAbsolute for each of the analog input signals x. This setting applies equally to all
enabled thresholds for that signal group.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
• If the signal rises above one of the upper thresholds, the output will indicate this
condition until the signal drops below the level threshold minus hysteresis.
• If the signal drops below one of the lower thresholds, the output will indicate this
condition until the signal rises above the level threshold plus hysteresis.
This is demonstrated in Figure 119, showing an analog signal passing from Normal range
through High Warning, High Alarm, High Warning, Normal, Low Warning, and back to Normal
ranges. Hysteresis is indicated by arrows, and small circles mark the points of output status
change.
High Alarm level
High Warning level
Low Warning level
Hysteresis
Low Alarm level
Figure 119: Example of analog signal passing through warning and alarm levels with
hysteresis
11.17.7.3 Circuit breaker operation capability GUID-57128495-A0F6-44AF-B938-CF0A07F1E0E9 v2
The operation capability of the circuit breaker can be determined by the binary input signal
levels for the three phases.
For any phase,
• When the input signal is full level, the breaker can operate a full cycle of open-close-open
operation.
• When the input signal is medium level, the breaker can operate only a close followed by an
open operation.
• When the input signal is low level, the breaker operation is restricted to a single open
operation.
• When the input signal is absent, there cannot be a possible breaker operation.
Example, consider full level binary input signal (representing stored energy in the drive) for
phase L1, medium level signal for phase L2 and low level signal for phase L3.
• Phase L1 has full level binary input signal. It implies that full spring charge is available and
the breaker can operate a complete cycle of open-close-open operation.
• For phase L2, the full level binary signal is absent and only the medium level binary input
signal is high, it implies that sufficient spring charge is unavailable for a full cycle
operation. Hence the breaker can operate only a close followed by an open operation.
• For phase L3, the spring charge is low, the breaker can operate only open operation.
In this case, the integer value of CBOPCAP3P is 131844 as defined in Table 231

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Table 231 shows all possible combinations of circuit breaker operation for the three phases
with the corresponding output integer values.
Table 231: Operation capability of the circuit breaker

Combination Integer
L1 L2 L3 CBOPCAP3P
None None None 65793
None None Open 131329
None None Close-Open 196865
None None Open-Close-Open 262401
None Open None 66049
None Open Open 131585
None Open Close-Open 197121
None Open Open-Close-Open 262657
None Close-Open None 66305
None Close-Open Open 131841
None Close-Open Close-Open 197377
None Close-Open Open-Close-Open 262913
None Open-Close-Open None 66561
None Open-Close-Open Open 132097
None Open-Close-Open Close-Open 197633
None Open-Close-Open Open-Close-Open 263169
Open None None 65794
Open None Open 131330
Open None Close-Open 196866
Open None Open-Close-Open 262402
Open Open None 66050
Open Open Open 131586
Open Open Close-Open 197122
Open Open Open-Close-Open 262658
Open Close-Open None 66306
Open Close-Open Open 131842
Open Close-Open Close-Open 197378
Open Close-Open Open-Close-Open 262914
Open Open-Close-Open None 66562
Open Open-Close-Open Open 132098
Open Open-Close-Open Close-Open 197634
Open Open-Close-Open Open-Close-Open 263170
Close-Open None None 65795
Close-Open None Open 131331
Close-Open None Close-Open 196867
Close-Open None Open-Close-Open 262403
Close-Open Open None 66051
Close-Open Open Open 131587

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Combination Integer
L1 L2 L3 CBOPCAP3P
Close-Open Open Close-Open 197123
Close-Open Open Open-Close-Open 262659
Close-Open Close-Open None 66307
Close-Open Close-Open Open 131843
Close-Open Close-Open Close-Open 197379
Close-Open Close-Open Open-Close-Open 262915
Close-Open Open-Close-Open None 66563
Close-Open Open-Close-Open Open 132099
Close-Open Open-Close-Open Close-Open 197635
Close-Open Open-Close-Open Open-Close-Open 263171
Open-Close-Open None None 65796
Open-Close-Open None Open 131332
Open-Close-Open None Close-Open 196868
Open-Close-Open None Open-Close-Open 262404
Open-Close-Open Open None 66052
Open-Close-Open Open Open 131588
Open-Close-Open Open Close-Open 197124
Open-Close-Open Open Open-Close-Open 262660
Open-Close-Open Close-Open None 66308
Open-Close-Open Close-Open Open 131844
Open-Close-Open Close-Open Close-Open 197380
Open-Close-Open Close-Open Open-Close-Open 262916
Open-Close-Open Open-Close-Open None 66564
Open-Close-Open Open-Close-Open Open 132100
Open-Close-Open Open-Close-Open Close-Open 197636
Open-Close-Open Open-Close-Open Open-Close-Open 263172
In the default configuration, connecting no signals to the hardware binary

inputs for spring charge levels results in CBOPCAP3P permanently indicating
full for all three phases (integer value 263172).
11.18 ACBMSCBR GUID-3CAEF8F5-1011-46EF-BFAC-E666EFF91B32 v1
11.18.1 Identification GUID-098C27C6-A8C0-4B16-ACE9-84CF24ABC921 v1

Advanced circuit breaker operation ACBMSCBR — —
monitoring

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.18.2 Functionality GUID-95C5500E-1C42-455E-A3CC-831181DAFDBA v2
ACBMSCBR monitors the condition of a circuit breaker pole by measuring and supervising its
electrical and mechanical performance during opening and closing operations. Accordingly,
the measurements will be used to report and, if configured, adaptively compensate for
changes in the circuit breaker’s performance, including optimizing the arcing time to avoid re-
strikes/re-ignitions.
In controlled switching applications, ACBMSCBR assists SSCPOW in determining the precise

target phase angles. For this purpose, it evaluates compensation values according to actual
system frequency and voltage, circuit breaker scatter characteristics, etc. so that switching
transients due to mechanical and electrical variations in CB operating parameters are
minimized.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.18.3 Function block GUID-5BD2F362-E6D7-477E-A8EE-FDE48D9B784B v1
Figure 120: ACBMSCBR function block

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.18.4 Signals
Table 232: ACBMSCBR Input signals

U3P GROUP - Three phase voltage input
SIGNAL
I3P GROUP - Three phase current input
SIGNAL
U3PL GROUP - Three phase load voltage input
SIGNAL
REFIN GROUP - Zero crossing and reference misc signals input
SIGNAL
INNOOPLX REAL 0.0 Time to operate NO contact for phase LX open operation
(from CBLEARN)
INNCOPLX REAL 0.0 Time to operate NC contact for phase LX open operation
(from CBLEARN)
INPRIOPLX REAL 0.0 Time to operate primary contact for phase LX open operation
(from CBLEARN)
INPRICLLX REAL 0.0 Time to operate primary contact for phase LX close operation
(from CBLEARN)
INNOCLLX REAL 0.0 Time to operate NO contact for phase LX close operation
(from CBLEARN)
INNCCLLX REAL 0.0 Time to operate NC contact for phase LX close operation
(from CBLEARN)
STRANGLX REAL 0.0 Strategy switching angle for phase LX
DELTAT2LX REAL 0.0 Circuit breaker switching correction delay for phase LX
TMPIN REAL 0.0 Temperature input
CRDSSACLX INTEGER 0 Coordination input from SSCPOW to ACBMSCBR for phase LX
ALMS1T5A INTEGER 0 Alarm status integer for input 1 to 5 from MONALMa
ALMS6T10A INTEGER 0 Alarm status integer for input 6 to 10 from MONALMa
ALMS1T5B INTEGER 0 Alarm status integer for input 1 to 5 from MONALMb
ALMS6T10B INTEGER 0 Alarm status integer for input 6 to 10 from MONALMb
T2ALSTS INTEGER 0 Alarm status for circuit breaker switching correction delay
CLCMDINP BOOLEAN 0 Input close command received by ACBMSCBR from SSCPOW
CLCMDLX BOOLEAN 0 Time activated control close synchronous switching
command given by SSCPOW for phase LX
OPCMDINP BOOLEAN 0 Input open command received by ACBMSCBR from SSCPOW
OPCMDLX BOOLEAN 0 Time activated control open synchronous switching
command given by SSCPOW for phase LX
INPNOLX BOOLEAN 0 NO status feedback from CB phase LX
INPNCLX BOOLEAN 0 NC status feedback from CB phase LX
LERACTIVE BOOLEAN 0 Indication for active CB test mode
RESOPCNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset operation count
RESADCOMP BOOLEAN 0 Reset adaptive corrections delta T3 and delta T7
RESRCNT BOOLEAN 0 Input to reset re-strike count

Technical Manual
Monitoring

RESRESTRC BOOLEAN 0 Reset input to clear re-strike correction for open operations
RESETUNST BOOLEAN 0 Reset input to exit from CB unstable state
RESETABL BOOLEAN 0 Reset input to clear ablation sum and relative ablation sum
outputs
Table 233: ACBMSCBR Output signals

DELTAT1LX REAL Electrical switching compensation delay from switching
instant for phase LX
DELTAT3LX REAL Adaptive switching compensation delay for re-strike and pre-
strike for phase LX
DELTAT6LX REAL Switching strategy delay from switching instant for handling
mechanical scatter for phase LX
DELTAT7LX REAL Switching delay for open if re-strike/re-ignition detected as
per user set value for phase LX
REFOUT GROUP SIGNAL Zero crossing and reference misc signals output
ARCTMLX REAL Arcing time duration of CB for phase LX
PRESTRALX REAL Angle of pre-strike from previous voltage zero for phase LX
PRETRTMLX REAL Prestrike time for phase LX
TMCMSCHLX REAL Time from command to status change for phase LX
RTKCTLX REAL Re-strike count output for phase LX
ELORTMLX REAL CB electrical operating time for phase LX
MCORTMLX REAL CB mechanical operating time for phase LX
MCMOVTMLX REAL Mechanical movement time between auxiliary contacts
observed for phase LX
OPTOPNOLX REAL Operation time open output for phase LX
OPTCLSOLX REAL Operation time close output for phase LX
RCTTOPOLX REAL Reaction time measurement open (initial mechanical delay for
open) output for phase LX
RCTTCLOLX REAL Reaction time measurement close (initial mechanical delay
for close) output for phase LX
AUXSWTOLX REAL Auxiliary switches' time during open for phase LX
AUXSWTCLX REAL Auxiliary switches' time during close for phase LX
CONVELLX REAL Calculated contact velocity for phase LX
OPSPOPOLX REAL Operation speed open output for phase LX
OPSPCLOLX REAL Operation speed close output for phase LX
ITMCDLLX REAL Initial mechanical movement delay observed for phase LX
LOOPABLLX REAL Last open operation ablation calculated for breaker contacts
in phase LX
ABLSUMLX REAL Cumulated sum of calculated ablation for phase LX
ABLSUMRLX REAL Ablation sum relative to set alarm level for phase LX
LOOPILX REAL Instantaneous current interrupted during last open operation
for phase LX
LOOPPILX REAL Peak current interrupted during last open operation for phase
LX

Technical Manual
Monitoring

SWALX REAL RMS current detected before last open operation for phase
LX
TMPOUT REAL Temperature output
OPRCNTRST INTEGER Resettable operation counter
OPRCNTOPN INTEGER Total number of open operations
OPRCNTCLS INTEGER Total number of close operations
INOPCNOLX INTEGER Count for number of in-sync operations for Open for phase
LX
INOPCNCLX INTEGER Count for number of in-sync operations for Close for phase
LX
CBSTSLX INTEGER CB position derived from mechanical and electrical status for
phase LX
CBSTSCFLX INTEGER CB position confirmation output to SSCPOW for phase LX
MECHHOLX INTEGER Alarm signal for unstable mechanical behaviour for phase LX
CRDACSSLX INTEGER Co-ordination output from ACBMSCBR to SSCPOW for phase
LX
CRDPSMCLX INTEGER Co-ordination output from pre-strike detection to MONCOMP
for phase LX
CRDRSMCLX INTEGER Co-ordination output from re-strike detection to MONCOMP
for phase LX
CBSTNCLX BOOLEAN Circuit breaker status derived from NC contact for phase LX
CBSTNOLX BOOLEAN Circuit breaker status derived from NO contact for phase LX
UNSTOPOLX BOOLEAN Indication of an unstable operation detected for phase LX
RSTRDETLX BOOLEAN Indication of re-strike detected for phase LX
FLTDETLX BOOLEAN Output signalling detection of fault current for phase LX
CNTPOSOLX BOOLEAN Indication of contradicting electrical and mechanical CB
position indications for phase LX
OPERWALLX BOOLEAN Indication for consecutive operations with any monitored
value more than warning limit for phase LX
OPCWRNOLX BOOLEAN Warning signal for number of operations exceeding set level
for phase LX
OPCALMOLX BOOLEAN Alarm signal for number of operations exceeding set level for
phase LX
MAXRCALLX BOOLEAN Alarm signal for maximum restrike correction limit reached
OPTMALOLX BOOLEAN Alarm signal indicating switch operating time exceeding
threshold for phase LX
MAXRALOLX BOOLEAN Re-strike count alarm output for phase LX
WRABLLX BOOLEAN Warning signal for ablation exceeding threshold for phase LX
ALABLLX BOOLEAN Alarm signal for ablation exceeding threshold for phase LX
ALOUTLX BOOLEAN General alarm output for phase LX

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.18.5 Settings
Table 234: ACBMSCBR Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On
On
BetaAdjustElec 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.1 Electrical factor of adjustment applied
on scatter correction time
BetaAdjustMech 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.1 Mechanical factor of adjustment
applied on scatter correction time
TotalDispLX 10.0 - 1000.0 mm 0.1 200.0 Total mechanical contact
displacement (in mm) for phase LX
NODispLX 1.0 - 1000.0 mm 0.1 200.0 NO displacement from fully open
position (in mm) for phase LX
NCDispLX 1.0 - 1000.0 mm 0.1 20.0 NC displacement from fully open
EarliestOpenTime 0.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 20.0 Earliest time for reignition free
window(ms)
LatestOpenTime 0.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 20.0 Latest time for reignition free
window(ms)
ArcTimeTrafoLX 0.0 - 100.0 ms 0.1 5.0 Arcing time required for transformer
for phase LX
FaultCurrentPercent 110 - 800 %IB 10 150 Current level in percent for detection
of fault
PriDispLX 1.0 - 1000.0 mm 0.1 20.0 Primary displacement from fully open
ScatterMechClLX 0.05 - 3.00 ms 0.05 1.00 Mechanical scatter for close operation
in ms
ScatRDDSPercLX 0.0 - 25.0 % 0.1 5.0 Spread of nominal RDDS in percent for
phase LX
OpCntAlm Disab warn & - - Enab warn Enable/Disable alarm for operation
alarm count
Enab warn
Enab alarm
Enab warn &
alarm
MaxRkRiAlm Disable - - Enable Enable/Disable alarm for re-strike
Enable count output
CntrlPosAlm Disable - - Enable Enable/Disable indication of
Enable contradicting electrical and
mechanical CB position
OutAlm Disable - - Enable Enable/Disable general alarm output
Enable
AblationAlm Disable - - Enable Enable/Disable alarm for ablation
Enable
Ablation Disable - - Enable Enable/Disable ablation calculation
Enable
OpTmAlm Disable - - Enable Enable/Disable alarm for operation
Enable time
UnstOpChrAlm Disable - - Enable Enable/Disable indication of an
Enable unstable operation

Technical Manual
Monitoring

OperWithAlm Disable - - Enable Enable/Disable alarm for monitored
Enable outputs exceeding warning threshold
MaxReStrCorrAlm Disable - - Enable Enable/Disable alarm for maximum
Enable re-strike correction limit reached
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 GlobalBaseSel
Table 235: ACBMSCBR Non group settings (advanced)

UDead 5.0 - 80.0 %UB 1.0 20.0 Dead voltage setting
IDead 5.0 - 80.0 %IB 1.0 20.0 Dead current setting
RDDSLX 5.0 - 999.0 kV/ms 1.0 100.0 Initial RDDS for phase LX
AblationAlarmLevel 0.0 - 99999.9 - 1.0 20000.0 Ablation threshold for alarm state
CumCurrPower 0.05 - 5.00 - 0.05 2.00 Current exponent setting for
cumulative calculation
InitialCumAblLX 0.000 - 99999.999 - 0.001 0.000 Initial cumulated ablation for phase LX
AblationCoeff0 -99999.99999 - - 0.00001 0.14400 Coefficient 0 in ablation calculation
99999.99999 formula
99999.99999 formula
99999.99999 formula
99999.99999 formula
99999.99999 formula
PowerCoeff1 0.0000 - 10.0000 - 0.0001 1.0000 Power coefficient 1 in ablation
calculation formula
calculation formula
calculation formula
calculation formula
AblationWarnLevel 0.0 - 99999.9 - 1.0 15000.0 Ablation threshold for warning state
MinCurrentLimit 0.0 - 99999.9 A 1.0 614.0 Minimum current limit for ablation
calculation
OvercurrentLimit 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 1.0 150.0 Overcurrent limit in percent for
ablation calculation
AblatCalShEst 0.0 - 99999.9 - 1.0 5000.0 Ablation for current exceeding higher
threshold
NumOfHalfCycle 2 - 16 - 1 10 Number of half cycles to be
considered for half cycle average time
period evaluation
LoadRef Current - - Current Load energization reference
Volt 3 Ph star gr
Volt 3 Ph delta
AuxPosAvailable None - - NO and NC Availability status of NO/NC contact
NO information
NC
NO and NC

Technical Manual
Monitoring

OperWithAlmCnt 1 - 10 - 1 3 Number of error operations to trigger
warning operation alarm
OperationsMon 1 - 10 - 1 3 Number of operations to be
monitored for unstable detection
MaxReStrikeCorr 0-3 ms 1 1 Switching correction for open
operation setting
11.18.6 Operation principle GUID-B8ABC553-4A7F-468A-91DB-BDEE232B74D2 v1
For full functionality, ACBMSCBR needs to interact closely with other function blocks. Refer to
section Controlled Switching and Monitoring.
11.19 CBLEARN GUID-8232E0F9-9DF5-484C-9F1D-2CEE43AFCF9F v1
11.19.1 Identification GUID-164A8C2D-3C88-4969-9A08-DEF8FFF6AC10 v1
Table 236: Identification

Circuit breaker contact operation CBLEARN — —
time learning
11.19.2 Functionality GUID-51251660-53CD-4FC6-97C2-BF907017265D v2
This function provides semi-automatic learning of the mechanical closing and opening times
of a circuit breaker's primary contacts and, optionally, auxiliary contacts. In addition, logical
wiring errors are detected and reported during the learning process. This function learns the
timing information of three phases of a circuit breaker independently, each of which may have
its individual drive. When a switching command is received, it generates a request to SSCPOW
function for sending the commands to the circuit breaker poles, and acquires the changeover
times of the connected contacts accurately through precision binary inputs. The user has an
option to accept or reject the results of each operation. Accepted results are averaged and are
available for use in the controlled switching application.
For performing controlled switching and monitoring, the knowledge of status changeover of
primary contact’s mechanical touch/separation instants is of prime importance. This
information is required for determining the precise target switching instant. While monitoring
live switching operations, the timing information of auxiliary contacts (NO/52a and NC/52b) is
required for accurate estimation of primary contact timing. During CB test mode, the function
also detects logical wiring errors. This function has the option to provide the other functions
with either the default setting values or the learnt values (if learning has been performed at
least once) at its output interfaces.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.19.3 Function block GUID-6631FFEF-4483-452D-A358-E2136FF60511 v1
CBLEARN
BLOCK OPAVGNOL1
CMDOPEN OPAVGNOL2
CMDCLO SE OPAVGNOL3
CMDOPL1 OPAVGNCL1
CMDOPL2 OPAVGNCL2
CMDOPL3 OPAVGNCL3
CMDCLL1 OPAVGPRIL1
CMDCLL2 OPAVGPRIL2
CMDCLL3 OPAVGPRIL3
INPNOL1 CLAVGNOL1
INPNOL2 CLAVGNOL2
INPNOL3 CLAVGNOL3
INPNCL1 CLAVGNCL1
INPNCL2 CLAVGNCL2
INPNCL3 CLAVGNCL3
INPPRIL1 CLAVGPRIL1
INPPRIL2 CLAVGPRIL2
INPPRIL3 CLAVGPRIL3
CBTMD OPTIMNOL1
ACPTLO OPTIMNOL2
REJLO OPTIMNOL3
FINISH OPTI MNCL1
ABORT OPTIMNCL2
OPTIMNCL3
OPTIMPRIL1
OPTIMPRI L2
OPTIMPRI L3
CLTIMNOL1
CLTIMNOL2
CLTIMNOL3
CLTIMNCL1
CLTIMNCL2
CLTIMNCL3
CLTIMPRIL1
CLTIMPRIL2
CLTIMPRIL3
LO NOTIML1
LO NOTIML2
LO NOTIML3
LO NCTIML1
LO NCTIML2
LONCTIML3
LOPRITIML1
LOPRITIML2
LOPRITIML3
WIERCD
CMDERCD
OPSHTDO NE
CLSHTDONE
COORBLSS
WIERL1
WIERL2
WIERL3
CMDER
LERACTIVE
LO PSUC
LO PFAIL
LCLSUC
LCLFAIL
TIMOUTAL
LONOL1AL
LONOL2AL
LONOL3AL
LO NCL1AL
LO NCL2AL
LO NCL3AL
LO PRIL1AL
LO PRIL2AL
LO PRIL3AL

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.19.4 Signals
Table 237: CBLEARN Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of the function
CMDOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open command issued by user
CMDCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close command issued by user
CMDOPL1 BOOLEAN 0 Open command input from SSCPOW for phaseL1
CMDCLL1 BOOLEAN 0 Close command input from SSCPOW for phaseL1
INPNOL1 BOOLEAN 0 NO contact feedback from circuit breaker phaseL1
INPNCL1 BOOLEAN 0 NC contact feedback from circuit breaker phaseL1
INPPRIL1 BOOLEAN 0 Primary contact feedback from circuit breaker phaseL1
CBTMD BOOLEAN 0 Command input for activating CB test mode
ACPTLO BOOLEAN 0 Accept the last operation and corresponding calculations
REJLO BOOLEAN 0 Reject the last operation and corresponding calculations
FINISH BOOLEAN 0 Finish the CB test mode and accept learnt values as final
values
ABORT BOOLEAN 0 Finish the CB test mode and reject learnt values
Table 238: CBLEARN Output signals

OPAVGNOL1 REAL Average value of NO contact operating time till the last
accepted open operation for phaseL1
OPAVGNCL1 REAL Average value of NC contact operating time till the last

Technical Manual
Monitoring

OPAVGPRIL1 REAL Average value of primary contact operating time till the last
CLAVGNOL1 REAL Average value of NO contact operating time till the last
accepted close operation for phaseL1
CLAVGNCL1 REAL Average value of NC contact operating time till the last
CLAVGPRIL1 REAL Average value of primary contact operating time till the last
OPTIMNOL1 REAL Final average value of NO contact operating time for open
operations for phaseL1
OPTIMNCL1 REAL Final average value of NC contact operating time for open
OPTIMPRIL1 REAL Final average value of primary contact operating time for
open operations for phaseL1
CLTIMNOL1 REAL Final average value of NO contact operating time for close
CLTIMNCL1 REAL Final average value of NC contact operating time for close

Technical Manual
Monitoring

CLTIMPRIL1 REAL Final average value of primary contact operating time for
close operations for phaseL1
LONOTIML1 REAL NO contact operating time for last operation for phaseL1
LONCTIML1 REAL NC contact operating time for last operation for phaseL1
LOPRITIML1 REAL Primary contact operating time for last operation for phaseL1
WIERCD INTEGER Integer for indicating type of wiring error
CMDERCD INTEGER Integer for indicating type of command error
OPSHTDONE INTEGER Number of successful open shots performed
CLSHTDONE INTEGER Number of successful close shots performed
COORBLSS INTEGER Co-ordination output to SSCPOW to indicate the command
WIERL1 BOOLEAN Indication for wiring error in phaseL1
CMDER BOOLEAN Indication for command error
LERACTIVE BOOLEAN Indication for CB test mode is active
LOPSUC BOOLEAN Indication for successful last open operation
LOPFAIL BOOLEAN Indication for unsuccessful last open operation
LCLSUC BOOLEAN Indication for successful last close operation
LCLFAIL BOOLEAN Indication for unsuccessful last close operation
TIMOUTAL BOOLEAN Signal time out for not receiving auxiliary contact or primary
contact feedback
LONOL1AL BOOLEAN Alarm if NO contact operating time last operation for
phaseL1 is not in the tolerance limit
LONCL1AL BOOLEAN Alarm if NC contact operating time last operation for phaseL1
is not in the tolerance limit

Technical Manual
Monitoring

LOPRIL1AL BOOLEAN Alarm if Primary contact operating time last operation for
11.19.5 Settings
Table 239: CBLEARN Non group settings (basic)

DefaultNOOpTimeL1 1.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 10.0 Default operating time of NO contact
for open command for phaseL1
DefaultNCOpTimeL1 1.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 10.0 Default operating time of NC contact
for open operation for phase L1
DefaultPriOpTimeL1 1.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 10.0 Default operating time of primary
contact for open operation for phase
L1
L2
L3
DefaultNOClTimeL1 1.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 10.0 Default operating time of NO contact
for Close operation for phaseL1
DefaultNCClTimeL1 1.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 10.0 Default operating time of NC contact
DefaultPriClTimeL1 1.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 10.0 Default operating time of primary
contact for close operation for phase
L1
L2

Technical Manual
Monitoring

L3
TimeOutAlarmDelay 1.0 - 1500.0 ms 1.0 500.0 Maximum time delay for status
change of auxiliary & primary contacts
after receiving input command
Mode Open - - Open & Close Operation type selection (open/close/
Close open and close)
Open & Close
BreakerType SPO breaker - - SPO breaker Type of circuit breaker(single pole
TPO breaker operated or single drive)
LearnNONC MainOnly - - MainOnly Option for learning the auxiliary
NO&Main contacts operating time
NC&Main
NO&NC&Main
AvgSetSel setOPisCalcAvgVa - - setOPisCalcAvgV Selection for final average outputs
lues alues either learnt values or default set
setOPisDefaultVal values
ues
Table 240: CBLEARN Non group settings (advanced)

AlmTolRange 0.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 10.0 Tolerance for generating the last
operation time alarms
AlmTolSetSel AlmTolOnDefVal - - AlmTolOnDefVal Relative tol selection for last oper time
AlmTolOnAvgCalV alarms based on default set or
al calculated average values
11.19.6 Operation principle GUID-208395C4-A02D-4A25-B4ED-9D2108B91703 v1
This function is used to acquire the primary contacts’ and optionally the auxiliary contacts’
(NO/52a and NC/52b) timing information during CB test mode. CBLEARN receives the
switching commands from the user and releases time staggered commands to the individual
poles of the circuit breaker through SSCPOW function block. From the status changeover
instants of primary and auxiliary contacts, CBLEARN calculates the switching times and
detects command errors and wiring errors. Typical expected sequences of contact
changeover, in each CB pole, are shown in Figure 122 and Figure 123.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
CMDCLOSE
coorBLSS
CMDCLLp
INPNCLp
INPPRILp
INPNOLp
X= operating time of Primary contact for close command Time
Y= operating time of NO contact for close command
Z= operating time of NC contact for close command
p=phase
Figure 122: Expected sequence of contact status changes for a closing operation

Technical Manual
Monitoring
CMDOPEN
coorBLSS
CMDOPLp
INPNOLp
INPPRILp
INPNCLp
X= operating time of Primary contact for open command Time
Y= operating time of NO contact for open command
Z= operating time of NC contact for open command
p=phase
Figure 123: Expected sequence of contact status changes for an opening operation
CBLEARN can be activated from LHMI menu or by activating the CBTMD input. Once this
trigger goes high, CBLEARN enters the learning mode (the LERACTIVE output becomes high)
and it remains in this mode until FINISH or ABORT inputs are activated. In learning mode,
CBLEARN interacts closely with the SSCPOW function block, as shown in Figure 122.

Technical Manual
11.19.6.1
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 275-UEN C
Close/Open commands

CB
Coordination signal
Command Handling
Error signal
Close
Learning
Command handling logic

Mode
Figure 124: Signal flow diagram

Open
Data Acquisition Learning Active
Close / Open
OR Commands
Abort / Finish
Breaker learnt
Close
Reject / Accept Core Module values
Normal Mode
last operation Open
Wiring Error Wiring error

Detection
outputs SSCPOW
CBLEARN Command feedback with timing
Primary, NO and NC contact position feedback for all

three poles
CBLEARN receives the Open/Close command and releases separate commands through
SSCPOW function block to the three poles of the circuit breaker, as shown in Figure 124. Circuit
303
GUID-92B52B0F-1192-42C6-A011-167A2D06F8BD v1
Monitoring
Section 11
Monitoring
breaker pole L1 is operated first, then L2, and finally L3. The time delay between poles is
defined by the TimeOutAlarmDelay setting. It ensures that no cross cable interference or
wiring mix up between phases is present.
The function also detects static wiring errors, dynamic wiring errors and errors in command
execution. These are described below.
Static wiring errors

When static wiring errors are detected, operation of the circuit breaker is not permitted until
they are rectified. Static wiring errors are detected by a plausibility algorithm as described
below.
1. All 3 poles are either not open or closed simultaneously. If two poles are open and one pole
is closed, the pole that is closed will be declared to have an error as it is not in agreement
with the other two poles being open. The same applies vice versa if two poles are closed
and one pole is open.
2. For any phase, if the primary contact is open it expects NO/52a to be open and NC/52b to
be closed.
3. For any phase, if the primary contact is closed it expects NO/52a to be closed and NC/52b
to be open.
CBLEARN checks the position of the breaker from the primary and auxiliary contacts. If the CB
position of any phase has errors, the wiringError (WIERLX) signal of the corresponding phase
is activated. The observed wiring errors and the corresponding error codes are shown in Table
241.
Table 241: Wiring errors and corresponding error codes

Static wiring error in phase Error Code for WIERCD Numeric code of WIERCD
WIERL1 WIERL2 WIERL3
0 0 0 NoWiringErr 0
1 0 0 WirErrL1 1
0 1 0 WirErrL2 2
0 0 1 WirErrL3 3
1 1 0 WirErrL1&L2 4
1 0 1 WirErrL1&L3 5
0 1 1 WirErrL2&L3 6
1 1 1 WirErrL1&L2&L3 7
Command issued to phase L1 or WirErrStatChngeNR Refer the table below
phase L2 or phase L3 but status
changeovers are not received
Command issued to one phase WirErrStChOtherPh
but status changeovers are
observed in different phase(s)
Dynamic wiring errors

Dynamic wiring errors are detected during the execution of the Open/Close commands. For
example: If the command is released to phase L1, CBLEARN expects status changes of the
primary and auxiliary contacts of phase L1 only. If no status changeover is observed within a
set period, it declares a time-out alarm and dynamic wiring error in phase L1. The same is
applied to detect wiring errors in phases L2 and L3. If an Open or Close command is issued to
one phase but status changeovers are detected in another phase, CBLEARN issues a wiring
error. Error codes for different types of wiring errors are explained in Table 242.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Table 242: Wiring error codes

Command Status Description WIERCD wiringErrorStatus
issued to changeover
phase observed
L1 L2 L3 WIERL1 WIERL2 WIERL3
L1 No No No Command issued 8 1 0 0
to phase L1 but
status
changeovers are
not received
to phase L2 but
status
changeovers are
not received
to phase L3 but
status
changeovers are
not received
L1 No Ye No Command issued 9 1 1 0
s to phase L1 but
status
changeovers are
observed in phase
L2
L1 No No Yes Command issued 9 1 0 1
to phase L1 but
status
changeovers are
observed in phase
L3
L1 No Ye Yes Command issued 9 1 1 1
s to phase L1 but
status
changeovers are
observed in
phases L3 and L2
L1 Ye Ye No Command issued 9 1 1 0
s s to phase L1 but
status
changeovers are
observed in
phases L1 and L2
L1 Ye No Yes Command issued 9 1 0 1
s to phase L1 but
status
changeovers are
observed in
phases L1 and L3

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Command Status Description WIERCD wiringErrorStatus

issued to changeover
phase observed
L1 L2 L3 WIERL1 WIERL2 WIERL3
L1 Ye Ye Yes Command issued 9 1 1 1
s s to phase L1 but
status
changeovers are
observed in all
three phases
L2 No No Yes Command issued 9 0 1 1
to phase L2 but
status
changeovers are
observed in phase
L3
L2 No Ye Yes Command issued 9 0 1 1
s to phase L2 but
status
changeovers are
observed in
phases L2 and L3
Command Errors
Whenever CBLEARN receives an invalid command, CMDER is set high. The identified error is
indicated on the CMDERCD output, see Table 243.
Table 243: Command Error codes

Present state Command received Error code for CMDERCD Description for CMDERCD
Breaker is Open Open command CmdErrOpen Function received OPEN
command from the user when CB
is in open position
Breaker is Closed Close command CmdErrClose Function received CLOSE
command from the user when CB
is in closed position
Close operation is in Open command CmdErrOpenProg Function received OPEN
progress command from the user when
close operation of CB is still in
progress
Open operation is in Close command CmdErrCloseProg Function received CLOSE
progress command from the user when
open operation of CB is still in
progress
Open operation is in Open command NoCmdErr Command is ignored
progress
Close operation is in Close command NoCmdErr Command is ignored
progress
During the command, if for any phase, errors are detected, learning for the
current operation is stopped and an emergency trip (instantaneous trip
command to all three poles simultaneously) is issued. Identified errors are
expected to be corrected before proceeding.
Commands are accepted until CB test mode is excited by activating ABORT or FINISH inputs.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
11.19.6.2 Data acquisition logic GUID-45E90641-9FE7-4EA4-8B08-E2FCCB5EEEFC v1
After the command request has been sent to SSCPOW, this block receives the actual command
information sent to the circuit breaker from SSCPOW and waits for the update of main and
auxiliary contact information. Upon receiving this information, the operating times can be
evaluated.
11.19.6.3 Core logic GUID-3CE4E298-EC09-4F39-90D0-1E504EF87D87 v1
Core module is executed when data acquisition is successful following an open or close
command from SSCPOW. Once the appropriate timing information has been evaluated for
primary and auxiliary contacts, the core logic derives the actual switching times from
command to NO/52a, NC/52b and Primary contact changeover, and makes them available on
the outputs LONOTIMLX, LONCTIMLX, LOPRITIMLX (where LX is L1, L2 L3). At the same time
the function increments the counter of operations performed.
If the acquired values are considered not to be correct, they can be discarded by activating the
REJLO input. Once the REJLO command is received, CBLEARN discards the calculated
temporary time values that correspond to the last operation and decrements the number of
operations performed counter.
The calculated switching times from the last operation are accepted implicitly, by issuing a
new switching command, or explicitly, by activating the ACPTLO input. Once a new switching
command or the ACPTLO signal is received, the accepted values acquired thus far are averaged
and presented at the outputs OPAVGNOLX, OPAVGNCLX, OPAVGPRILX and CLAVGNOLX,
CLAVGNCLX, CLAVGPRILX for open and close respectively (where LX is L1, L2, or L3). If the
average values are found satisfactory, CB test mode can be completed and exited by
activating the FINISH input. Once FINISH is activated, CBLEARN exits CB test mode. Only when
AvgSetSel has been set to "setOpIsCalcAvgValues", the average values are presented at the
outputs OPTIMNOLx, OPTIMNCLx, OPTIMPRILx and CLTIMNOLx, CLTIMNCLx, CLTIMPRILx for
opening and closing respectively (where Lx is L1, L2, or L3).
Change AvgSetSel to "setOpIsCalcAvgValues" only when CB test mode has been

completed successfully!
To avoid loss of the calculated average values, make sure to keep the IED
powered up for minimum 1 hour after completing CB test mode.
CB test mode can be aborted at any stage of learning by activating the ABORT input if the
learning cannot be continued or the results are not satisfactory. In such a case the function
discards the currently calculated average values and retains the set average outputs to either
the previously learnt values (if available) or user-set values, depending on AvgSetSel setting.
Depending on the Mode selection, the function calculates the operating times of the auxiliary
and primary contacts for the open command or close command or both. For example, if Mode
is set to “Open only”, only the operating times corresponding to the open command are
evaluated and are updated at the corresponding average outputs. The average outputs for the
close command follow the previously learnt values if available or user-set values otherwise.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Table 244: Selection of operating time values based on Mode

Mode Open set average outputs Close set average outputs
OPTIMNOLX, OPTIMNCLX, CLTIMNOLX, CLTIMNCLX,
OPTIMPRILX CLTIMPRILX
Open & Close Learnt values Learnt values
Open Learnt values Set values
Close Set Values Learnt values
Depending on the availability of auxiliary contacts, LearnNONC should be set to define the
scope of learning as follows:
Table 245: Selection of auxiliary contacts for learning purpose

LearnNONC setting Learn primary contacts Learn NO (52a) auxiliary Learn NC (52b) auxiliary
contacts contacts
MainOnly yes no no
NO&Main yes yes no
NC&Main yes no yes
NO&NC&Main yes yes yes
Successful and unsuccessful operations GUID-527381B8-513D-42A2-B08F-A2781D90946F v1

An operation is declared successful if status changes of auxiliary and primary contacts are
detected for all the phase commands within a set time of TimeOutAlarmDelay after CMDOPX
(for open operation) or CMDCLX (for close operation) information has been received from
SSCPOW. Otherwise the operation is declared as failed. This is indicated externally on the
LOPSUC, LCLSUC and LOPFAIL, LCLFAIL outputs, respectively, as shown in Table 246 and Table
247.
Table 246: Last opening operation type

Last opening operation type LOPFAIL LOPSUC
No open operation 0 0
Successful open operation 0 1
Unsuccessful open operation 1 0
Table 247: Last closing operation type

Last closing operation type LCLFAIL LCLSUC
No close operation 0 0
Successful close operation 0 1
Unsuccessful close operation 1 0
Last operation time alarms GUID-DC5703CC-3AF0-4A20-BBCD-CE0ACC2A253D v1

The operation times of the last operation are compared against their expected values, which
are either set values or calculated average values, depending on the AlmTolSetSel setting.
Refer Table 248 for detailed description.

Technical Manual
Monitoring
Table 248: Reference values for checking actual switching times (X = L1 / L2 / L3)
AlmTolSetSel Primary Primary NO (52a) NO (52a) NC (52b) NC (52b)
setting contact contact closing time opening time closing time opening time
closing time opening time
AlmTolOnDef DefaultPriClT DefaultPriOp DefaultNOCl DefaultNOO DefaultNCCl DefaultNCOp
Val imeX setting TimeX TimeX pTimeX TimeX TimeX
setting setting setting setting setting
AlmTolOnAv CLAVGPRIX OPAVGPRIX CLAVGNOX OPAVGNOX CLAVGNCX OPAVGNCX
gCalVal
Any deviation of more than AlmTolRange from the expected value will raise an alarm. The only
exception is the first operation when comparison to calculated average values
(AlmTolOnAvgCalVal) is selected:
Here, an alarm will be raised if the difference between phases exceeds the AlmTolRange
setting.

Technical Manual
310
Section 12 Station communication
12.1 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
D0E7350T201305151403 v1

IEC 61850-8-1 communication IEC 61850-8-1 - -
protocol
The IED supports the communication protocol IEC 61850-8-1. All operational information and
controls are available through this protocol.
The IED is equipped with optical Ethernet rear port(s) for the substation communication
standard IEC 61850-8-1. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows intelligent electrical devices (IEDs) from
different vendors to exchange information and simplifies system engineering. Peer-to-peer
communication according to GOOSE is part of the standard. Disturbance files downloading is
provided.
Disturbance files (waveform files in Switchsync PWC600 terminology) are accessed using the
IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. Disturbance files are also available to any Ethernet based application
via FTP in the standard Comtrade format. Further, the IED can send and receive binary values,
double point values and measured values (for example from MMXU functions), together with
their quality bit, using the IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE profile. The IED meets the GOOSE
performance requirements for tripping applications in substations, as defined by the IEC
61850 standard. The IED interoperates with other IEC 61850-compliant IEDs and systems, and
simultaneously reports events to five different clients on the IEC 61850 station bus.
The Denial of Service functions DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT are included to limit the inbound
network traffic. The communication can thus never compromise the primary functionality of
the IED.
The event system has a rate limiter to reduce CPU load. The event channel has a quota of 10
events/second after the initial 30 events/second. If the quota is exceeded the event channel
transmission is blocked until the event changes is below the quota, no event is lost.
All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed on integrated
communication modules. The IED is connected to Ethernet-based communication systems via
the fibre-optic multimode LC connector(s) (100BASE-FX).
The IED supports SNTP and IRIG-B time synchronization methods with a time-stamping
accuracy of ±1 ms.
• Ethernet based: SNTP

• With time synchronization wiring: IRIG-B

Technical Manual
12.1.3 Communication interfaces and protocols D0E7214T201305151403 v3
Table 249: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols

Protocol Ethernet
100BASE-FX LC
IEC 61850-8-1 ●
HTTPS ●
● = Supported
12.1.4 Settings
D0E7392T201305151403 v1
Table 250: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)

On
PortSelGOOSE Front - - LAN1 Port selection for GOOSE
LAN1 communication
PortSelMMS Front - - LAN1 Port selection for MMS
LAN1 communication
Front+LAN1

D0E7195T201305151403 v1
Table 251: Communication protocol

Function Value
Protocol TCP/IP (Ethernet)
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s
Protocol IEC 61850–8–1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
12.2 GOOSE binary receive GOOSEBINRCV
D0E7411T201305151403 v1

GOOSE binary receive GOOSEBINRCV - -
12.2.2 Functionality GUID-2A465DC9-5F06-48A6-B055-1003422DA9B0 v1
GOOSEBINRCV is used to receive 16 binary values via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages.

Technical Manual
GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK ÔUT1
OUT1VAL
ÔUT2
OUT2VAL
ÔUT3
OUT3VAL
ÔUT4
OUT4VAL
ÔUT5
OUT5VAL
ÔUT6
OUT6VAL
ÔUT7
OUT7VAL
ÔUT8
OUT8VAL
ÔUT9
OUT9VAL
ÔUT10
OUT10VAL
ÔUT11
OUT11VAL
ÔUT12
OUT12VAL
ÔUT13
OUT13VAL
ÔUT14
OUT14VAL
ÔUT15
OUT15VAL
ÔUT16
OUT16VAL
IEC09000236_en.vsd
D0E13072T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 125: GOOSEBINRCV function block
12.2.4 Signals
D0E7435T201305151403 v1
Table 252: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals
D0E7436T201305151403 v1
Table 253: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1
OUT1VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1

Technical Manual

12.2.5 Settings
D0E7437T201305151403 v1
Table 254: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
12.2.6 Operation principle GUID-EE39046D-9B5A-4BD9-9A65-35DAF019A7BA v1
The OUTxVAL output will be 1 (high) if the incoming message contains valid data for channel x.
In case of invalid data the OUTx output will be forced to 0 (low). In case of communication
error the OUTx output will retain the last valid value.

Technical Manual
12.3 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value

GOOSEDPRCV
D0E7427T201305151403 v1

GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEDPRCV - -
double point value
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.
GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK ^DPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
D0E13789T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 126: GOOSEDPRCV function block
12.3.4 Signals
D0E7508T201305151403 v1
Table 255: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals

D0E7509T201305151403 v1
Table 256: GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

DPOUT INTEGER Double point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for double point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output
12.3.5 Settings
D0E7510T201305151403 v1
Table 257: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)

On

Technical Manual
DPOUT represents the double-point status (transmitted via IEC 61850 GOOSE message) of a
switching element according to the following table.
DPOUT (integer value) DPOUT (binary value) Status

0 00 intermediate / unknown
1 01 off / open
2 10 on / closed
3 11 faulty
The DATAVALID output will be 1 (high) as long as the incoming message contains valid data. In
case of invalid data DPOUT will be forced to 0.
The COMMVALID output will become 0 (low) when the subscribed GOOSE messages are not
received as expected. In this case DPOUT will retain the last valid value.
The TEST output will be 1 (high) when the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT to receive the double
point values.
The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a

simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be
HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE
or OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.
12.4 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV
D0E7444T201305151403 v1

GOOSE function block to receive an GOOSEINTRCV - -
integer value
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.

Technical Manual
GOOSEINTRCV
BLOCK ÎNTOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
D0E13792T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 127: GOOSEINTRCV function block
12.4.4 Signals
D0E7511T201305151403 v1
Table 258: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals

D0E7512T201305151403 v1
Table 259: GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

INTOUT INTEGER Integer output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output
12.4.5 Settings
D0E7513T201305151403 v1
Table 260: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
case of invalid data INTOUT will be forced to 0.
received as expected. In this case INTOUT will retain the last valid value.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT to receive the integer
values.

Technical Manual

or OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.
12.5 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value

GOOSEMVRCV
D0E7445T201305151403 v1

GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEMVRCV - -
measurand value
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive a measured value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.
GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK ^MVOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
D0E13795T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 128: GOOSEMVRCV function block
12.5.4 Signals
D0E7514T201305151403 v1
Table 261: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals

D0E7515T201305151403 v1
Table 262: GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

MVOUT REAL Measurand value output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output

Technical Manual
12.5.5 Settings
D0E7516T201305151403 v1
Table 263: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
case of invalid data MVOUT will be forced to 0.
received as expected. In this case MVOUT will retain the last valid value.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT to receive the measurand
values.

or OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW
12.6 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value

GOOSESPRCV
D0E7517T201305151403 v1

GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSESPRCV - -
single point value
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.

Technical Manual
GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK ^SPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
D0E13786T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 129: GOOSESPRCV function block
12.6.4 Signals
D0E7505T201305151403 v1
Table 264: GOOSESPRCV Input signals

D0E7506T201305151403 v1
Table 265: GOOSESPRCV Output signals

SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output
12.6.5 Settings
D0E7507T201305151403 v1
Table 266: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
case of invalid data SPOUT will be forced to 0.
received as expected. In this case SPOUT will retain the last valid value.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT to receive the binary
single point values.

Technical Manual

or OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW
12.7 IEC 61850-9-2(LE) merging unit
12.7.1 Introduction GUID-BA744DF4-1854-4E69-BDF2-1A569DE290BE v2
The IEC 61850-9-2 standard defines a process bus for transmitting sampled values of primary
voltage and current signals over Ethernet. “LE” (Light Edition) is a commonly agreed
implementation guideline, which defines a practical subset of IEC 61850-9-2 to allow
straightforward implementation and application.
IEC 61850-9-2(LE) defines a logical device Merging Unit (MU). A MU collects up to four
individual current and four voltage signals and merges them into a single data stream.
In the Switchsync PWC600 IED, sampled values streams from up to four MUs are received on
the LAN2 A port of the communication interface module COM03. The application can access
them as outputs of the MUx_4I_4U function blocks (x = 1…4) and use them in the same manner
as analog inputs on a TRM or AIM card.
12.7.2 Identification GUID-C97C65A7-DA6C-4CA7-BE68-8687A948AAEA v1
Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

description identification identification device number
IEC 61850-9-2(LE) MU1_4I_4U - -
merging unit MU2_4I_4U
MU3_4I_4U
MU4_4I_4U
12.7.3 Function block GUID-E5258705-E5D4-4C20-87B0-87FA8D086B6D v1
MU1_4I_4U
^MU1_I1
^MU1_I2
^MU1_I3
^MU1_I4
^MU1_U1
^MU1_U2
^MU1_U3
^MU1_U4
MU1DATA
MU1SYNCH
MU1SMPLT
MU1SYNMU
MU1TSTMD

Technical Manual
12.7.4 Signals
Table 267: MU1_4I_4U Output signals

MU1_I1 STRING Analogue input I1
MU1_U1 STRING Analogue input U1
MU1DATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
MU1SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock not synchronized to same clock as IED
MU1SMPLT BOOLEAN Sample lost
MU1SYNMU BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
MU1TSTMD BOOLEAN MU in test mode
12.7.5 Settings
Table 268: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

SVId 0 - 35 - 1 ABB_MU0101 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
Table 269: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation
GUID-242C96FD-E2AA-4B57-AD66-79571D067FCB v1
MU2_4I_4U, MU3_4I_4U and MU4_4I_4U have the same settings as MU1_4I_4U.

Technical Manual
12.7.6 Operation principle GUID-1318F925-300F-418F-9526-BD8540DFF22E v1
A merging unit (MU) gathers sampled values of primary current and voltage signals from
instrument transformers, electronic transducers, or both. The gathered data are transmitted
to subscribers over the process bus, utilizing a process bus according to the IEC 61850-9-2(LE)
specification.
The IED communicates with the MUs over the process bus via the LAN2 A port (X3) of the
communication interface module. Only data streams sampled at 80 samples/cycle are
accepted. In ACT, the MU appears as a function block (unlike an analog input module).
IED
Application Station Wide

GPS Clock
SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT Preprocessing blocks
DFTSPFC AI3P SMAI
^GRP1L1 AI1 Splitter
^GRP1L2 AI2 Electrical-to-
^GRP1L3 AI3
Optical Converter
^GRP1N AI4
TYPE AIN 1PPS
MU1 (Logic MU) MU2 (Logic MU)
COM03 Module
LAN2 A
IEC61850-9-2LE
Ethernet Switch
IEC61850-9-2LE
IEC61850-9-2LE
ABB ABB
1PPS 1PPS
Merging Merging
Unit Unit
Combi Combi
Sensor Sensor
GUID-B5973EFD-8304-4A30-8CC9-B64FF531A197 V1 EN-US
Figure 130: Example of signal path for sampled analog values from merging units via
process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE with PPS synchronization

Technical Manual
IED
Application
Station Wide
Preprocessing blocks Preprocessing blocks GPS Clock
SMAI SMAI
MU1 MU2
Splitter
Electrical-to-
Optical Converter
1PPS
TRM module COM03 Module
LAN2 A
110 V 1A 1A
IEC61850-9-2LE
Ethernet Switch
IEC61850-9-2LE
IEC61850-9-2LE
ABB ABB
1PPS 1PPS
Merging Merging
Unit Unit
Combi Combi
CT CT
Sensor Sensor
Conventional VT
GUID-938F229C-5768-4DF9-B3B6-78A52266F643 V1 EN-US
Figure 131: Example of signal path for sampled analog values from MU and conventional
CT/VT
12.7.6.1 Signal identification GUID-35A49B49-EA89-40A0-97B3-CA9BCB3A02AE v1
Up to four logical MUs can be connected to an IED on a single physical interface. The data
streams from individual MUs are distinguished by the SVId (Sampled Values Identification)
setting, which must be set identical to the MsvID data attribute of MSVCB01 in the MU.
The IEC 61850-9-2(LE) guideline specifies that the value of SVId shall comprise 10 characters
and follow the convention “xxxxMUnn01”. The portions “xxxx” and “nn” can be substituted by

Technical Manual
user-defined strings, whereas “MU” and “01” are fixed and should not be changed. However,
the MUx_4I_4U function blocks will work correctly also with less restrictive values of SVId.
The SmplGrp parameter is not used in the PWC600 implementation, keep it at default value 0.
Within a MU1_4I_4U function block, the assignment of sampled values streams (4 currents, 4
voltages) is fixed, as provided by the MU.
12.7.6.2 Time synchronization GUID-BEF65E7B-EB03-4E43-8EC5-2FF6824BA24C v1
Sampled values received over the process bus are time stamped. For synchronizing the signal
processing in the IED to the incoming data stream, an external 1PPS signal shall be provided on
the PPS Rx port (X10) of the communication interface module. Accuracy shall be class T4 (±4
µs) or better.
Preferably, a GPS based clock source is used as master for generating a station-wide 1PPS
clock for all merging units and receiving IEDs. This is particularly important when an IED may
receive sampled values from more than one MU. Only if any IED is connected to just one MU
then the MU may be used as clock master for the receiving IED(s).
The SynchMode parameter determines handling of the synchronization information in the

datastream:
• When set to "NoSynch" it will not check the SmpSynch flag.

• When set to "Operation" it will always check the SmpSynch flag.
• "Init" should not be used.
See TIMESYNCHGEN for further information on time synchronization.
12.7.6.3 Alarm signals GUID-1DC11181-BDA8-4AF2-AC8B-EE57D22C4C13 v1
Each MU function block has five binary alarm signal outputs.
• MUDATA: Indicates when sample sequence needs to be realigned, that is, the application
needs to be restarted soon. The signal is raised for 2 seconds before the application is
restarted.
• SYNCH: Indicates that the internal time synchronization quality is out of the set value from
parameter TIMESYNCHGEN.syncAccLevel (“1 μs”, “4 μs” or “unspecified”) and the
parameter TIMESYNCHGEN.AppSynch is set to “Synch”. If TIMESYNCHGEN.AppSynch is
set to “NoSynch”, the SYNCH output never goes high.
• SMPLT: Indicates that more than one sample has been lost or marked as invalid, overflown
or failed and the sample has thereafter been substituted.
• SYNMU: Indicates that the MU connected is not synchronized. Received from SmpSynch
flag in datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.
• TSTMD: Indicates that the MU connected is in “Test Mode”. Received from Test flag in
datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.
In case of communication problems, all analog outputs will be forced to 0.0.
Connect the binary output signals, except for TSTMD, to the BLKSYNSW input
of the SSCPOW function, for blocking controlled switching operations in case
of communication problems. See the section on Controlled Switching &
Monitoring.

Technical Manual
12.7.6.4 Accuracy of power measurement functions GUID-2521102E-1229-4796-A073-83F11C8D04F0 v1
The power measurement functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU) contain
correction factors to account for the nonlinearity in the input circuits, mainly in the input
transformers, when using direct analog connection to the IED.
The IED uses the same correction factors when feeding the IED with analog signals over IEC
61850-9-2(LE). Since the signals via IEC 61850-9-2(LE) are not subjected to the same
nonlinearity errors, this causes an inaccuracy in the measured values.
For voltage signals, the correction factors are less than 0.05% of the measured value and no
angle compensation, hence the impact on the reported value can be ignored.
For current signals, the correction factors cause a significant impact on the reported values at
low currents. The correction factors are +2.4% and -3.6 degrees at signal levels below 5% of
the set base current, +0.6% and -1.12 degrees at signal level 30% of the set base current and
0% and -0.44 degrees at signal levels above 100% of the set base current. Between the
calibration points 5%, 30% and 100% of the set base current, linear interpolation is used.
12.7.7 Technical data GUID-D7474867-326C-44CD-B21E-BEE52756918F v1
Table 270: IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol

Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-9-2LE
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
12.8 Redundant station bus communication D0E8296T201305151403 v1
12.8.1 Identification D0E8094T201305151403 v1

System component for parallel PRPSTATUS - -
redundancy protocol
Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 is available as

option in the IED. It uses both ports LAN1A and LAN1B on the COM03 module to connect to
two redundant networks using Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP).
PRPSTATUS
LAN1-A
LAN1-B
D0E13918T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 132: PRPSTATUS function block

Technical Manual
12.8.4 Signals
D0E8356T201305151403 v1
Table 271: PRPSTATUS Output signals

LAN1-A BOOLEAN LAN1 channel A status
LAN1-B BOOLEAN LAN1 channel B status
12.8.5 Setting parameters D0E8125T201305151403 v1
The PRPSTATUS function has no user settings.
Redundant station bus communication is configured in the LHMI under Main menu/
Configuration/Communication/TCP-IP configuration/ETHLAN1_AB where Operation mode,
IPAddress and IPMask can be entered.
The redundant station bus communication is configured using the local HMI, Main Menu/
Configuration/Communication/TCP-IP configuation/ETHLAN1_AB. The settings are also
visible in PST in PCM600.
Redundant communication runs in parallel, meaning that the same data package is
transmitted on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one channel
is compared with the data package identity from the other channel. If the identity is the same,
the last package is discarded.
PRPSTATUS supervises redundant communication on the two channels. If no data package has
been received on one or both channels within the last 10 s, the output LAN1-A and/or LAN1-B
are set to indicate error.

Technical Manual
Station Control System
Redundancy
Supervision
Duo
Data Data
Switch A Switch B
1 2 1 2
Data Data
A B
IED
COM03
PRPSTATUS
D0E13912T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 133: Redundant station bus
12.9 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG
12.9.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG D0E3183T201305151403 v1
ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging.
There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to. Each server can be configured
with IP address; IP port number and protocol format. The format can be either syslog (RFC
5424) or Common Event Format (CEF) from ArcSight.

Technical Manual
12.9.2 Settings
D0E3185T201305151403 v1
Table 272: ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)

ExtLogSrv1Type Off - - Off External log server 1 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv1Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 1 port number
ExtLogSrv1IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 1 IP-address
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address

Technical Manual
12.10 Generic security application component AGSAL
12.10.1 Generic security application AGSAL D0E3184T201305151403 v1
As a logical node AGSAL is used for monitoring security violation regarding authorization,
access control and inactive association including authorization failure. Therefore, all the
information in AGSAL can be configured to report to 61850 client.

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
Section 13 Basic IED functions
13.1 Self supervision with internal event list
The Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG and SELFSUPEVLST function reacts to
internal system events generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The
internal events are saved in an internal event list presented on the LHMI and in PCM600 event
viewer tool.
13.1.2 Internal error signals INTERRSIG
D0E6866T201305151403 v1

Internal error signal INTERRSIG - -
INTERRSIG
FAIL
WARNING
TSYNCERR
RTCERR
STUPBLK
D0E13195T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 134: INTERRSIG function block
13.1.2.3 Signals
D0E7377T201305151403 v1
Table 273: INTERRSIG Output signals

FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail
WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
STUPBLK BOOLEAN Application startup block

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
13.1.2.4 Settings
D0E7258T201305151403 v1
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).
13.1.3 Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST
D0E6867T201305151403 v1

Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST - -
13.1.3.2 Settings
D0E7393T201305151403 v1

D0E7094T201305151403 v1
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:
• Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

• Checking of digitized measuring signals.
• Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.
The SELFSUPEVLST function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the Event
Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-supervision
function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main menu/Diagnostics/
Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General. The information from the
self-supervision function is also available in the Event Viewer in PCM600. Both events from the
Event list and the internal events are listed in time consecutive order in the Event Viewer.
A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free change-over alarm
contact IRF (Internal Fail) located on the power supply module. This output contact is
activated (where there is no fault) and deactivated (where there is a fault) by the Internal Fail
signal, see Figure 135. The software watchdog timeout and the undervoltage detection of the
PSM will deactivate the contact as well.

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
Power supply fault Power supply Fault

module
Watchdog I/O nodes

TX overflow
Master resp. Fault
Supply fault AND
ReBoot I/O
INTERNAL
FAIL
Internal Fail (CPU) Fault

CEM
I/O nodes = BIO

xxxx = Inverted signal
D0E13262T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 135: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free contact
LIODEV FAIL
>1
LIODEV STOPPED S e.g.BIO1- ERROR
R
LIODEV STARTED
>1
WDOG STARVED SW Watchdog Error >1 Internal Fail

RTE FATAL ERROR Runtime Exec Error
FTF FATAL ERROR File System Error >1
RTE APP FAILED S

Runtime App Error
R
RTE ALL APPS OK
GENTS RTC ERROR

S
Real Time Clock Error
GENTS RTC OK R
IEC 61850 NOT READY S

IEC 61850 Error
R >1 Internal Warning
IEC 61850 READY DNP 3 Error
DNP 3 STARTUP
ERROR S
DNP 3 READY R
GENTS SYNC ERROR S

>1 Time Synch Error
GENTS TIME RESET
R
GENTS SYNC OK
CHANGE LOCK ON S
Change lock
CHANGE LOCK OFF R
SETTINGS CHANGED Setting groups changed
SETTINGS CHANGED Settings changed
D0E13256T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 136: Self supervision, function block internal signals

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from INTERRSIG
function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The signals from
the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via
output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired.
Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in the
Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the time
synchronization block INTERRSIG.
13.1.4.1 Internal signals D0E7081T201305151403 v1
SELFSUPEVLST function provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the
IED. As they provide information about the internal status of the IED, they are also called
internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups.
• Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 274.
• Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see Table 275.
Explanations of internal signals are listed in Table 276.
Table 274: SELFSUPEVLST standard internal signals

Name of signal Description
Internal Fail Internal fail status
Internal Warning Internal warning status
Real Time Clock Error Real time clock status
Time Synch Error Time synchronization status
Runtime App Error Runtime application error status
Runtime Exec Error Runtime execution error status
IEC61850 Error IEC 61850 error status
SW Watchdog Error SW watchdog error status
Setting(s) Changed Setting(s) changed
Setting Group(s) Changed Setting group(s) changed
Change Lock Change lock status
File System Error Fault tolerant file system status
Table 275: Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Card Name of signal Description
PSM PSM-Error Power supply module error status
TRM TRM-Error Transformator module error status
COM COM-Error Communication module error status
BIO BIO-Error Binary input/output module error status
PIO PIO-Error Precision binary input/output module error status

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
Table 276: Explanations of internal signals

Name of signal Reasons for activation
Internal Fail This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals
are active; Real Time Clock Error, Runtime App Error, Runtime Exec
Error, SW Watchdog Error, File System Error
Internal Warning This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals
are active; IEC 61850 Error, DNP3 Error
Real Time Clock Error This signal will be active if there is a hardware error with the real time
clock.
Time Synch Error This signal will be active when the source of the time synchronization
is lost, or when the time system has to make a time reset.
Runtime Exec Error This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some
actions with the application threads. The actions can be loading of
settings or parameters for components, changing of setting groups,
loading or unloading of application threads.
IEC61850 Error This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not succeed in
some actions like reading IEC 61850 configuration, startup, for
example.
SW Watchdog Error This signal will be activated when the IED has been under too heavy
load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems background task is
used for the measurements.
Runtime App Error This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads are
not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can be
CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example.
Setting(s) Changed This signal will generate an internal event to the internal event list if
any setting(s) is changed.
Setting Group(s) Changed This signal will generate an internal event to the Internal Event List if
any setting group(s) is changed.
Change Lock This signal will generate an internal Event to the Internal Event List if
the Change Lock status is changed
File System Error This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup file are
corrupted and cannot be recovered.
13.1.4.2 Run-time model D0E7074T201305151403 v1
The analog signals to the A/D converter are internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure 137.
ADx
ADx_Low
x1
u1
x2
ADx
ADx_High Controller
x1
u1
x2
D0E12659T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 137: Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the IED.

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converter(s) with different
amplification makes it possible to supervise the A/D converters under normal conditions
where the signals from the two A/D converters should be identical. An alarm is given if the
signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improves the dynamic performance
of the A/D conversion.
The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller function. One of
the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input signals. The ADx_Controller
function is included in all IEDs equipped with an analog input module. This is done in a
validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is the validation part that checks that the
A/D conversion seems to work as expected. Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two
signals shall be sent to the CPU, that is the signal that has the most suitable signal level, the
ADx_LO or the 16 times higher ADx_HI.
When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the two
A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed and
an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.
The ADx_Controller also supervises other parts of the A/D converter.

D0E7190T201305151403 v1
Table 277: Self supervision with internal event list

Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out
13.2 Time system D0E6698T201305151403 v1
The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of absolute time
for the IED when it is a part of a control and protection system. This makes it possible to
compare event and disturbance data between all IEDs in a station automation system.
Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time synchronization source.
13.2.2 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN
D0E6869T201305151403 v1

Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGE - -
N

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
13.2.2.2 Settings
Table 278: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)

CoarseSyncSrc Off - - Off Coarse time synchronization source
SNTP
FineSyncSource Off - - Off Fine time synchronization source
SNTP
IRIG-B
SyncMaster Off - - Off Activate IEDas synchronization master
SNTP-Server
HWSyncSrc Off - - Off Hardware time synchronization
IRIG-B source
PPS
AppSynch NoSynch - - NoSynch Time synchronization mode for
Synch application
SyncAccLevel Class T5 (1us) - - Unspecified Wanted time synchronization accuracy
Class T4 (4us)
Unspecified
13.2.3 Time synchronization via SNTP
D0E6870T201305151403 v1

Time synchronization via SNTP SNTP - -
13.2.3.2 Settings
D0E7328T201305151403 v1
Table 279: SNTP Non group settings (basic)

ServerIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Server IP-address
Address
RedServIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Redundant server IP-address
Address
13.2.4 SYNCHPPS:1
13.2.4.1 Settings
Table 280: SYNCHPPS Non group settings (basic)

SynchType Galvanic - - Optical Physical input
Optical

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
13.2.5 Time system, summer time begin DSTBEGIN
D0E6871T201305151403 v1

Time system, summer time begins DSTBEGIN - -
13.2.5.2 Settings
D0E7375T201305151403 v1
Table 281: DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)

MonthInYear January - - March Month in year when daylight time
February starts
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time
First starts
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay 00:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when
00:30 daylight time starts
1:00
1:30
...
48:00
13.2.6 Time system, summer time ends DSTEND
D0E6872T201305151403 v1

Time system, summer time ends DSTEND - -

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
13.2.6.2 Settings
D0E7376T201305151403 v1
Table 282: DSTEND Non group settings (basic)

MonthInYear January - - October Month in year when daylight time
February ends
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time
First ends
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay 00:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when
00:30 daylight time ends
1:00
1:30
...
48:00
13.2.7 Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE
D0E6873T201305151403 v1

Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE - -
13.2.7.2 Settings
D0E7327T201305151403 v1
Table 283: TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)

NoHalfHourUTC -24 - 24 - 1 0 Number of half-hours from UTC

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
13.2.8 Time synchronization via IRIG-B
D0E6874T201305151403 v1

Time synchronization via IRIG-B IRIG-B - -
13.2.8.2 Settings
D0E7281T201305151403 v2
Table 284: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)

TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ
Encoding
This type of encoding consists of the following options:
• IRIG-B. This encoding is based on the legacy of(pre-2004) IRIG-B standard which is without
any time zone information. IRIG-B uses the timecoding available in IRIG-B 00x and IRIG-B
12x, where x = 0-7. When x is set in the range from 4- 7, the year information is provided
along with year and time data.
• 1344. This encoding is based on the current (2004) IRIG-B standard. IED uses the time zone
information from TIMEZONE:1. The setting 1344 refers to the Annex F in IEEE1344, which
adds information regarding quality of the time using the control bits in the IRIG-B
message. This annex also contains the year information with the variable x that ranges
from 4-7 in the 2004 version of IRIG-B.
• 1344TZ. This encoding is based on the current (2004) IRIG-B standard. The time zone
information from IRIG-B overrides the TIMEZONE:1 settings.
TimeZoneAs1344
This type of encoding consists of the following options:
• MinusTZ. Encoded IRIG time minus time zone offset equals UTC at all times.
• PlusTZ. Encoded IRIG time plus time zone offset equals UTC at all times.
13.2.9.1 General concepts D0E6679T201305151403 v1

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
Time definitions D0E6680T201305151403 v1

The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time the
clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the time
gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to compensate
for them.
Design of the time system (clock synchronization) D0E6773T201305151403 v1
External
synchronization Time tagging and general synchronization
sources
Protection and
Communication Events control
Off
functions
SNTP
IRIG - B Time-regulator
SW-time
Synchronization for different protection

Off (ECHO-mode or GPS)
IRIG - B
Time-regulator HW-time
PPS
(fast or slow)
A/D
Converter Transducers*
*IEC 61850-9-2
D0E13057T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 138: Design of time system (clock synchronization)
Synchronization principle D0E6681T201305151403 v1

From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A
function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.
Synchronization from
a higher level
Function
Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level
D0E12044T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 139: Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization messages
from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization decreases as
well. A function can have several potential sources of synchronization, with different maximum

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
errors. This gives the function the possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to
adjust its internal clock after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:
• The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

• The time since the last used synchronization message
• The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.
13.2.9.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation D0E6655T201305151403 v1
The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The clock has a
built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.
Real-time clock at power off D0E6661T201305151403 v1

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time clock that
will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the time in the IED
may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the time will be lost
completely.
Real-time clock at startup D0E6662T201305151403 v1

At IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the last up time,
the time in the IED will be accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the RTC power has been lost
during power off (will happen after 5 days), the IED time will start at 1970-01-01.
Time synchronization startup procedure D0E6678T201305151403 v1

Coarse time synchronization is used to set the time on the very first message and if any
message has an offset of more than ten seconds. If no FineSyncSource is given, the
CoarseSyncSource is used to synchronize the time.
Fine time synchronization is used to set the time on the first message after a time reset or if
the source may always set the fine time, and the source gives a large offset towards the IED
time. After this, the time is used to synchronize the time after a spike filter, that is, if the
source glitches momentarily or there is a momentary error, this is neglected. FineSyncSource
that may always set the time is only IRIG-B.
It is not recommended to use SNTP as both fine and coarse synchronization source, as some
clocks sometimes send out a bad message. For example, Arbiter clocks sometimes send out a
"zero-time message", which if SNTP is set as coarse synchronization source (with or without
SNTP as fine synchronization source) leads to a jump to "2036-02-07 06:28" and back. In all
cases, except for demonstration, it is recommended to use SNTP as FineSynchSource only.
Rate accuracy D0E6684T201305151403 v1

In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized for a while,
the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is constant.
Normally, it takes 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.
Time-out on synchronization sources D0E6685T201305151403 v1

All synchronization interfaces has a time-out and a configured interface must receive time-
messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR). Normally, the time-out is
set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one
message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.
13.2.9.3 Synchronization options D0E6637T201305151403 v1
Two main options of external time synchronization are available. The synchronization message
is applied either via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message
including date and time or via IRIG-B.

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
Synchronization via SNTP D0E6653T201305151403 v1

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an IED to an
SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a reception time and a
transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs via IEC
61850 station bus. For SNTP to operate properly, there must be an SNTP server present,
preferably in the same station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1
ms accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.
SNTP provides complete time-information and can be used as both fine and coarse time synch
source. However shall SNTP normally be used as fine synch only. The only reason to use SNTP
as coarse synch is in combination with PPS as fine source. The combination SNTP as both fine
and coarse source shall not be used.
SNTP server requirements D0E6710T201305151403 v1

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5
switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at least
equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server software. The
SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or
local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without synchronization as primary or
secondary server in a redundant configuration is not recommended.
Synchronization via IRIG-B D0E6636T201305151403 v1

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local time of the
year in this format. The “B” in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are transmitted, and the
message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there numbers stating if and how the signal is
modulated and the information transmitted.
To receive IRIG-B there are one dedicated connector for the IRIG-B port. IRIG-B 00x messages
can be supplied via the galvanic interface, where x (in 00x) means a number in the range of 1-7.
If the x in 00x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information of the year. If x
is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time within the year, and year information has
to come from the tool or local HMI.
The IRIG-B input also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B clocks, as IRIG-B
previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is compatible with IRIG-B and contains
year information and information of the time-zone.
It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG-B module. In
this case, send also the local time in the messages.
Synchronization via process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE GUID-684E5B3A-AF6B-4BDC-966A-BB5B3AAC4280 v1

An optical PPS signal can be used for the time synchronisation of the process bus
communication (IEC 61850-9-2LE protocol). This signal should emanate either from the
external GPS clock or from the merging unit.
D0E7191T201305151403 v1
Table 285: Time synchronization, time tagging

Function Value
Time tagging resolution, events 1 ms
Time tagging resolution, waveform records 0.25 ms (50 Hz) / 0.208 ms
(60 Hz)
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization ±1.0 ms max.
Time tagging error with IRIG-B synchronization ±0.1 ms max.

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
13.3 Test mode functionality TESTMODE
D0E7349T201305151403 v1

Test mode functionality TESTMODE - -
When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the functions in the IED are
automatically blocked. Activated TESTMODE is indicating by a flashing yellow LED on the local
HMI. It is then possible to unblock every function(s) individually from the local HMI to perform
required tests.
When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes normal operation.
However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later restored, the IED will
remain in TESTMODE with the same protection functions blocked or unblocked as before the
power was removed. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the
IED. No settings will be changed, thus mistakes are avoided.
Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode.
TESTMODE
INPUT ACTIVE
OUTPUT
SETTING
NOEVENT
IEC09000219-1.vsd
D0E13066T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 140: TESTMODE function block
13.3.4 Signals D0E7240T201305151403 v1
D0E7398T201305151403 v1
Table 286: TESTMODE Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Sets terminal in test mode when active
D0E7399T201305151403 v1
Table 287: TESTMODE Output signals

ACTIVE BOOLEAN Terminal in test mode when active
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Test input is active
SETTING BOOLEAN Test mode setting is (On) or not (Off)
NOEVENT BOOLEAN Event disabled during testmode

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
13.3.5 Settings D0E7241T201305151403 v1
D0E7400T201305151403 v1
Table 288: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)

TestMode Off - - Off Test mode in operation (On) or not
On (Off)
EventDisable Off - - Off Event disable during testmode
On
CmdTestBit Off - - Off Command bit for test required or not
On during testmode
D0E7120T201305151403 v1
Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED. Set the IED in test mode by
• configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.

• setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under Main menu/Tests/IED test mode/
1:TESTMODE.
While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is activated.
The outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the “Test mode: being in On”
state. If the input from the configuration (OUTPUT signal is activated) or setting from local
HMI (SETTING signal is activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions are blocked. Any
function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality and event signalling.
Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode.
D0E7113T201305151403 v1
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from the local
HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (output ACTIVE is activated).
When leaving the test mode, and returning to normal operation, these blockings are disabled
and everything is set back to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and
configured parameter values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are
possible.
The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the blockings
were not reset. The released function will return to blocked state if test mode is set to off.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no outputs
will be activated.
When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a parameter, that
requires restart of the application, is changed, the IED will re-enter test mode
and all functions will be blocked, also functions that were unblocked before the
change. During the re-entering to test mode, all functions will be temporarily
unblocked for a short time, which might lead to unwanted operations. This is
only valid if the IED is set in TEST mode by a binary input, not by local HMI.
The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test
handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30) can
supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TESTMODE function block.
Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to prevent
filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a commissioning or
maintenance test.
13.4 Change lock function CHNGLCK
D0E6772T201305151403 v1

Change lock function CHNGLCK - -
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED configuration and
settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to block inadvertent IED
configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.
The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.

D0E6913T201305151403 v1
When CHNGLCK has a logical one on its input, then all attempts to modify the IED
configuration and setting will be denied and the message "Error: Changes blocked" will be
displayed on the local HMI; in PCM600 the message will be "Operation denied by active
ChangeLock". The CHNGLCK function should be configured so that it is controlled by a signal
from a binary input card. This guarantees that by setting that signal to a logical zero,
CHNGLCK is deactivated. If any logic is included in the signal path to the CHNGLCK input, that
logic must be designed so that it cannot permanently issue a logical one to the CHNGLCK
input. If such a situation would occur in spite of these precautions, then please contact the
local ABB representative for remedial action.
CHNGLCK
LOCK* ACTIVE
OVERRIDE
D0E13015T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 141: CHNGLCK function block
13.4.4 Signals
D0E7272T201305151403 v1
Table 289: CHNGLCK Input signals

LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Activate change lock

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
D0E7273T201305151403 v1
Table 290: CHNGLCK Output signals

ACTIVE BOOLEAN Change lock active
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN Change lock override
13.4.5 Settings D0E6903T201305151403 v1
IED Manager (PCM600)
The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.
The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state that does
not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
• Monitoring
• Reading events
• Resetting events
• Reading disturbance data
• Clear disturbances
• Reset LEDs
• Reset counters and other runtime component states
• Control operations
• Set system time
• Enter and exit from test mode
• Change of active setting group
The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Binary input Function

1 Activated
0 Deactivated
13.5 IED identifiers TERMINALID
D0E7438T201305151403 v1

IED identifiers TERMINALID - -

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED in the
system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.
13.5.3 Settings
D0E7526T201305151403 v1
Table 291: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)

StationName 0 - 18 - 1 Station name Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 - 1 Object name Object name
ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Object number
UnitName 0 - 18 - 1 Unit name Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Unit number
IEDMainFunType 0 - 255 - 1 0 IED main function type for
IEC60870-5-103
TechnicalKey 0 - 18 - 1 AA0J0Q0A0 Technical key
13.6 Product information
D0E7439T201305151403 v1

Product information PRODINF - -
The Product identifiers function identifies the IED. The function has seven pre-set, settings
that are unchangeable but nevertheless very important:
• IEDProdType
• ProductVer
• ProductDef
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate
The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product
identifiers

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).
13.6.3 Settings D0E7494T201305151403 v1
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
13.7 Primary system values PRIMVAL
D0E7625T201305151403 v1

Primary system values PRIMVAL - -
The rated system frequency and phasor rotation are set under Main menu/Configuration/
Power system/ Primary values/PRIMVAL in the local HMI and PCM600 parameter setting tree.
13.7.3 Settings
D0E7988T201305151403 v1
Table 292: PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)

Frequency 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation Normal=L1L2L3 - - Normal=L1L2L3 System phase rotation
Inverse=L3L2L1
13.8 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI
Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function,
processes the analog signals connected to it and gives information about all aspects of the
analog signals connected, like the RMS value, phase angle, frequency, harmonic content,
sequence components and so on. This information is then used by the respective functions in
ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring).
The SMAI function is used within PCM600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool or the
Application Configuration tool.
In the Switchsync PWC600 pre-configuration, all analog inputs to SMAI function

blocks are routed through SRCSELECT function blocks. This is to enable
selection of input signal sources either from TRM or IEC 61850-9-2(LE) merging
units, through a setting.

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
D0E8594T201305151403 v1

Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI_80_x - -
D0E8601T201305151403 v1
SMAI_80_1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
REVROT AI1
^GRP1L1 AI2
^GRP1L2 AI3
^GRP1L3 AI4
^GRP1N AIN
Figure 142: SMAI_80_1 function block
SMAI_80_2
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
^GRP2L1 AI2
^GRP2L2 AI3
^GRP2L3 AI4
^GRP2N AIN
Figure 143: SMAI_80_2 to SMAI_80_12 function block
13.8.4 Signals
Table 293: SMAI_80_1 Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 80.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT
calculation
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity
GRP1L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3 quantity
GRP1L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1 quantity
GRP1N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
Table 294: SMAI_80_1 Output signals

SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT
reference function
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Grouped three phase signal containing data from inputs 1-4
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the first analog input
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the second analog input
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the third analog input
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the fourth analog input
AIN GROUP SIGNAL Calculated residual quantity if inputs 1-3 are connected
Table 295: SMAI_80_12 Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 12
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 12
GRP12L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity
GRP12L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3 quantity
GRP12L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1 quantity
GRP12N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity
Table 296: SMAI_80_12 Output signals

AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Grouped three phase signal containing data from inputs 1-4
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the first analog input
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the second analog input
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the third analog input
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the fourth analog input
AIN GROUP SIGNAL Calculated residual quantity if inputs 1-3 are connected

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
13.8.5 Settings
Table 297: SMAI_80_1 Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current
Table 298: SMAI_80_1 Non group settings (advanced)

Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
Table 299: SMAI_80_12 Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current
Table 300: SMAI_80_12 Non group settings (advanced)

Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase
Every SMAI can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value), either voltage
or current. The AnalogInputType setting should be set according to the input connected. The
signal received by SMAI is processed internally to obtain 244 different electrical parameters,
for example RMS value, peak-to-peak, frequency and so on. The activation of BLOCK input
resets all outputs to 0.
SMAI_80 does all the calculation based on nominal 80 samples per line frequency period, this
gives a sample frequency of 4 kHz at 50 Hz nominal line frequency and 4.8 kHz at 60 Hz
nominal line frequency.
The output signals AI1...AI4 in SMAI_80_x function block are direct outputs of the connected
input signals GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN. GRPxN is always the neutral current. If
GRPxN is not connected, the output AI4 is zero. The AIN output is the calculated residual
quantity, obtained as a sum of inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 but is equal to output AI4 if
GRPxN is connected. The output signals AI1, AI2, AI3 and AIN are normally connected to the
analog disturbance recorder.
The SMAI function block always calculates the residual quantities in case only
the three phases (Ph-N) are connected (GRPxN input not used).

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
The output signal AI3P in the SMAI function block is a group output signal containing all
processed electrical information from inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN.
Applications with a few exceptions shall always be connected to AI3P.
The input signal REVROT is used to reverse the phase order.
A few points need to be ensured for SMAI to process the analog signal correctly.
• It is not mandatory to connect all the inputs of SMAI function. However, it is very
important that same set of three phase analog signals should be connected to one SMAI
function.
• The sequence of input connected to SMAI function inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and
GRPxN should normally represent phase L1, phase L2, phase L3 and neutral currents
respectively.
• It is possible to connect analog signals available as Ph-N or Ph-Ph to SMAI.
ConnectionType should be set according to the input connected.
• If the GRPxN input is not connected and all three phase-to-earth inputs are connected,
SMAI calculates the neutral input on its own and it is available at the AI3P and AIN outputs.
It is necessary that the ConnectionType should be set to Ph-N.
• If any two phase-to-earth inputs and neutral currents are connected, SMAI calculates the
remaining third phase-to-neutral input on its own and it is available at the AI3P output. It
is necessary that the ConnectionType should be set to Ph-N.
• If any two phase-to-phase inputs are connected, SMAI calculates the remaining third
phase-to-phase input on its own. It is necessary that the ConnectionType should be set to
Ph-Ph.
• All three inputs GRPxLx should be connected to SMAI for calculating sequence
components for ConnectionType set to Ph-N.
• At least two inputs GRPxLx should be connected to SMAI for calculating the positive and
negative sequence component for ConnectionType set to Ph-Ph. Calculation of zero
sequence requires GRPxN input to be connected.
• Negation setting inverts (reverse) the polarity of the analog input signal.
Frequency adaptivity
SMAI function performs DFT calculations for obtaining various electrical parameters. DFT uses
some reference frequency for performing calculations. For most of the cases, these
calculations are done using a fixed DFT reference based on system frequency. However, if the
frequency of the network is expected to vary more than 2 Hz from the nominal frequency, more
accurate DFT results can be obtained if the adaptive DFT is used. This means that the
frequency of the network is tracked and the DFT calculation is adapted according to that.
DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference need to be set appropriately for adaptive DFT calculations.
DFTRefExtOut: Setting valid only for the instance of function block SMAI_80_1. It decides the
reference block for external output SPFCOUT.
DFTReference: Reference DFT for the block. This setting decides DFT reference for DFT
calculations. DFTReference set to InternalDFTRef uses fixed DFT reference based on the set
system frequency. DFTReference set to DFTRefGrpX uses DFT reference from the selected
group block, when own group selected adaptive DFT reference will be used based on the
calculated signal frequency from own group. DFTReference set to External DFT Ref will use
reference based on input signal DFTSPFC.

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. However, if it is necessary to use
frequency adaptive DFT (DFTReference set to other than default, referring
current measuring SMAI) when no voltages are available, note that the
MinValFreqMeas setting is still set in reference to UBase (of the selected
GBASVAL group). This means that the minimum level for the current amplitude
is based on UBase. For example, if UBase is 20000, the resulting minimum
amplitude for current is 20000 * 10% = 2000.
MinValFreqMeas: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is calculated,
expressed as percent of the voltage in the selected Global Base voltage group (GlobalBaseSel).
13.9 Global base values GBASVAL D0E7957T201305151403 v1
D0E7977T201305151403 v1

Global base values GBASVAL - -
Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common for all
applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values for current,
voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have six different sets.
This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of base values.
This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a single point for updating
values when necessary.
Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out of the six
sets of GBASVAL functions.
13.9.3 Settings D0E7978T201305151403 v1
D0E8306T201305151403 v1
Table 301: GBASVAL Non group settings (basic)

UBase 0.05 - 1500.00 kV 0.05 132.00 Global base voltage
IBase 1 - 50000 A 1 1000 Global base current
SBase 0.050 - 7500.000 MVA 0.001 229.000 Global base apparent power

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
13.10 Authority check ATHCHCK
D0E7346T201305151403 v1

Authority check ATHCHCK - -
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are accessing the
IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization handling of the IED
and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:
• local, through the local HMI

• remote, through the communication ports
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with PCM600 IED user management
tool.
D0E13909T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 144: PCM600 user management tool
13.10.3 Settings
D0E7263T201305151403 v1

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas of the
IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 302.
Table 302: Pre-defined user types

User type Access rights
SystemOperator Control from local HMI, no bypass
ProtectionEngineer All settings
DesignEngineer Application configuration (including SMT, GDE and
CMT)
UserAdministrator User and password administration for the IED
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management within
PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED, there are no users,
groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.
Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names and

passwords.
The maximum of characters in a password is 12.
At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to be able to

write users, created in PCM600, to IED.
13.10.4.1 Authorization handling in the IED D0E7206T201305151403 v1
At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED until a
user has been created with the IED User Management.
Once a user is created and written to the IED, that user can perform a Log on, using the
password assigned in the tool. Then the default user will be Guest.
If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: “No user defined!”
If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main menu/
Configuration/HMI/Screen/SCREEN:1) elapses, the IED returns to Guest state, when only
reading is possible. By factory default, the display timeout is set to 60 minutes.
If one or more users are created with the IED User Management and written to the IED, then,
when a user attempts a Log on by pressing the key or when the user attempts to perform
an operation that is password protected, the Log on window opens.
The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the key, one can change
the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the “up” and “down” arrows. After choosing
the right user name, the user must press the key again. When it comes to password, upon
pressing the key, the following characters will show up: “✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳”. The user must
scroll for every letter in the password. After all the letters are introduced (passwords are case
sensitive) choose OK and press the key again.

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
At successful Log on, the local HMI shows the new user name in the status bar at the bottom
of the LCD. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a password protected
setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the Log on has failed, an "Error
Access Denied" message opens. If a user enters an incorrect password three times, that user
will be blocked for ten minutes before a new attempt to log in can be performed. The user will
be blocked from logging in, both from the local HMI and PCM600. However, other users are to
log in during this period.
13.11 Authority management AUTHMAN
D0E7404T201305151403 v1

Authority management AUTHMAN - -
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the maintenance menu
log on time out.
13.11.3 Settings
D0E7402T201305151403 v1
Table 303: AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)

MaintMenuEnable No - - Yes Maintenance menu enabled
Yes
AuthTimeout 10 Min - - 10 Min Authority blocking timeout
20 Min
30 Min
40 Min
50 Min
60 Min
13.12 FTP access with password FTPACCS
D0E7405T201305151403 v1

FTP access with SSL FTPACCS - -
The FTP Client defaults to the best possible security mode when trying to negotiate with SSL.

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
The automatic negotiation mode acts on port number and server features. It tries to
immediately activate implicit SSL if the specified port is 990. If the specified port is any other,
it tries to negotiate with explicit SSL via AUTH SSL/TLS.
Using FTP without SSL encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities. This mode is only
for accessing disturbance recorder data from the IED.
If normal FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings, create a specific

account for this purpose with rights only to do File transfer. The password of
this user will be exposed in clear text on the wire.
13.12.3 Settings
D0E7391T201305151403 v1
Table 304: FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)

PortSelection None - - Front+LAN1 Port selection for communication
Front
LAN1
Front+LAN1
SSLMode FTP+FTPS - - FTPS Support for AUTH TLS/SSL
FTPS
TCPPortFTP 1 - 65535 - 1 21 TCP port for FTP and FTP with Explicit
SSL
TCPPortFTPS 1 - 65535 - 1 990 TCP port for FTP with Implicit SSL
13.13 Authority status ATHSTAT
D0E7347T201305151403 v1

Authority status ATHSTAT - -
Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on activity.
User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.
ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON
D0E13069T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 145: ATHSTAT function block

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
13.13.4 Signals
D0E7280T201305151403 v1
Table 305: ATHSTAT Output signals

USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on
13.13.5 Settings D0E7242T201305151403 v1
IED Manager (PCM600)
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and the user
authorization:
• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked
(the output USRBLKED)
• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or LOGGEDON)
is activated.
13.14 Denial of service
The Denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) are designed to limit overload on the
IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic. The communication facilities must not be
allowed to compromise the primary functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic will
be quota controlled so that too heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load
might for instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.
13.14.2 Denial of service, frame rate control for front port DOSFRNT
D0E7336T201305151403 v1

Denial of service, frame rate control DOSFRNT - -
for front port

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
D0E13228T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 146: DOSFRNT function block
13.14.2.3 Signals
D0E7269T201305151403 v1
Table 306: DOSFRNT Output signals

LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state
13.14.2.4 Settings D0E7217T201305151403 v1

D0E7268T201305151403 v1
Table 307: DOSFRNT Monitored data

State INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent 0-100
IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets received in
normal mode
IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets received in
polled mode
IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets discarded
NonIPPackRecNor INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets received in
m normal mode
NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets received in
polled mode
NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets discarded

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
13.14.3 Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1
D0E7337T201305151403 v1

Denial of service, frame rate control DOSLAN1 - -
for LAN1 port
DOSLAN1
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
D0E13231T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 147: DOSLAN1 function block
13.14.3.3 Signals
D0E7271T201305151403 v1
Table 308: DOSLAN1 Output signals

LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state
13.14.3.4 Settings D0E7217T201305151403 v1

D0E7270T201305151403 v1
Table 309: DOSLAN1 Monitored data

State INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent 0-100
IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets received in
normal mode
IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets received in
polled mode
IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets discarded

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions

NonIPPackRecNor INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets received in
m normal mode
NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets received in
polled mode
NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets discarded
The Denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) measures the IED load from
communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs control and protection
functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following outputs:
• LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status

• WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal
• ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication
13.15 Source selection SRCSELECT
13.15.1 Identification GUID-C4F69AF5-FDBE-464D-B28E-C4C539613E17 v1
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE

identification identificatio C37.2 device
n number
Source selection between SrcSelect - -
transformer module and
merging unit
13.15.2 Functionality GUID-2FA7F39C-76E0-4B03-B68F-E49A61FA6C6E v2
Switchsync PWC600 is supplied with a pre-configuration that can be customized to most

applications by settings entered in Switchsync Setting Tool (SST). The SRCSELECT function
allows selecting the source of an analog (voltage or current) signal from TRM (hardware based)
or MU (software based) by settings. Flexibility of selection of the input source from all the MUs
(that is, four MUs) and TRM (that is, two TRMs) sources modeled as three-phase + neutral
inputs eliminates the need for modifications in ACT or SMT. A SRCSELECT function block is
placed between TRM or MU outputs and SMAI inputs.
There are eight sets of input available in the function. Each set is modeled as the three-phase
+neutral input. For each MU, the function has five binary status inputs. The selection needs to
be done for the status signals of MU from which the data is subscribed. TRM signals can be
connected to any of the eight input phase group.

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
13.15.3 Function block GUID-F0F5275E-B405-4464-A1CA-8802F740F220 v1
INPUT1-1
INPUT1-2
INPUT1-3
INPUT1-N
INPUT2-1
INPUT2-2
INPUT2-3
INPUT2-N
INPUT3-1
INPUT3-2
INPUT3-3
INPUT3-N
INPUT4-1
INPUT4-2
INPUT4-3
INPUT4-N
INPUT5-1 OUTPUT-1
INPUT5-2 OUTPUT-2
INPUT5-3 OUTPUT-3
INPUT5-N OUTPUT-N
DIAG5DATA DIAGDATA
DIAG5SYNCH DIAGSYNCH
DIAG5SMPLT DIAGSMPLT
DIAG5SYNMU DIAGSYNMU
DIAG5TSTMD DIAGTSTMD
INPUT6-1 SRCSELECT
INPUT6-2
INPUT6-3
INPUT6-N
DIAG6DATA
DIAG6SYNCH
DIAG6SMPLT
DIAG6SYNMU
DIAG6TSTMD
INPUT7-1
INPUT7-2
INPUT7-3
INPUT7-N
DIAG7DATA
DIAG7SYNCH
DIAG7SMPLT
DIAG7SYNMU
DIAG7TSTMD
INPUT8-1
INPUT8-2
INPUT8-3
INPUT8-N
DIAG7DATA
DIAG7SYNCH
DIAG7SMPLT
DIAG7SYNMU
DIAG7TSTMD

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
13.15.4 Signals
Table 310: SRCSELECT Input signals

INPUT1-1 STRING 0 First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity of
INPUT1
INPUT1-2 STRING 0 Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3 quantity of
INPUT1
INPUT1-3 STRING 0 Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1 quantity of
INPUT1
INPUT1-N STRING 0 Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity of
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT2
INPUT2
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT3
INPUT3
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT4
INPUT4
INPUT4
INPUT5-1 STRING 0 First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2(not in case of
MU) quantity of INPUT5
INPUT5-2 STRING 0 Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3(not in case of
INPUT5-3 STRING 0 Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1(not in case of
INPUT5
DIAG5DATA BOOLEAN 0 Serious data loss from MU over INPUT5 group
DIAG5SYNCH BOOLEAN 0 MU clock not synced to same clock as IED over INPUT5 group
DIAG5SMPLT BOOLEAN 0 Sample lost; Current sample estimated for MU over INPUT5
group
DIAG5SYNMU BOOLEAN 0 SmpSynch flag in frame for MU not ok over INPUT5 group
DIAG5TSTMD BOOLEAN 0 Used channel from MU is in testmode over INPUT5 group

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions

INPUT6
DIAG6DATA BOOLEAN 0 Serious data loss from MU over INPUT6 group
group
DIAG6SYNMU BOOLEAN 0 smpSynch flag in frame for MU not ok over INPUT6 group
INPUT7
DIAG7DATA BOOLEAN 0 Serious data loss from MU over INPUT7 group.
group
INPUT8
DIAG8DATA BOOLEAN 0 Serious data loss from MU over INPUT8 group.
group

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
Table 311: SRCSELECT Output signals

OUTPUT-1 STRING Selected Output -1
OUTPUT-N STRING Selected Output -N
DIAGDATA BOOLEAN Serious data loss from selected MU
DIAGSYNCH BOOLEAN Selected MU clock not synced to same clock as IED
DIAGSMPLT BOOLEAN Sample lost; Current sample estimated for selected MU
DIAGSYNMU BOOLEAN smpSynch flag in frame for selected MU not ok
DIAGTSTMD BOOLEAN Used channel from selected MU is in testmode
13.15.5 Settings
Table 312: SRCSELECT Non group settings (advanced)

InputSelect INPUT1 - - INPUT1 Input group selection to output
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
13.15.6 Operation principle GUID-50D0531A-AF51-4762-A957-21957195F2DF v1
The source selector function is a multiplexer, where the output is selected from one of the
eight input phase group with a setting. It selects one of the analog input groups and forwards
the selected input group to the pre-processing component connected to its output. A group of
transformer module channels or merging unit channels can be connected to the source
selector as the input source.

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
SRCSELECT SMAI Application
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
InputSelect
Figure 149: Source selector application

Figure 149 depicts the source selector embedded in an application. When InputSelect is set to
"INPUT1", the INPUT1 channel link strings are passed to the pre-processing component, and so
forth. Based on that link, the pre-procesing component fetches the data from the particular
channel.
The IED supports four IEC 61850- 9-2 (LE) merging unit streams, wherein each stream has four
sets of current and voltage signals. In a hybrid configuration, the current and voltage can be
either from a conventional CT/VT (connection through TRM) or through the IEC 61850- 9-2 (LE)
MU. The eight input groups are provided per instance for the selection, out of which the last
four input groups can be connected to the merging unit signals, as there are diagnostic status
signals that need to be selected and provided as an output from the function.
The input groups are named INPUT1-x to INPUT8-x and each group supports four analog
inputs. INPUT5-x to INPUT8-x additionally support the diagnostic binary status signals from a
merging unit (see description of MU_4I_4U). If any of INPUT1 through INPUT4 is selected, the
diagnostic outputs assume default value 0.
13.16 Web server GUID-93701C18-1852-4054-919D-9EB6A8100FFF v1
GUID-71A1BFD4-58DA-4A12-87FD-614E38E91D7B v1

Web server WEBSERVER - -
13.16.2 Functionality GUID-DC133893-7C9D-46AD-828F-7953795F9D72 v1
Web server function is used for configuring the access to the IED through the web interface
(WHMI) using a web browser.

Technical Manual
Basic IED functions
Table 313: WEBSERVER Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
WriteMode Writing disabled - - Writing disabled Writing of settings enabled
Writing enabled
SessionTimeout 2 - 60 Min 1 3 Session timeout
Table 314: WEBSERVER Non group settings (advanced)

Port None - - All Select network port
Front
Rear
All
SSLMode Off - - Optional Support for AUTH TLS/SSL/Clear text
Optional
Mandatory
ClientCert Off - - Off Support for client certificate
Optional
Mandatory
13.16.3 Operation principle GUID-D9F399C0-CD50-4E85-950F-FF4142317132 v1
For accessing the IED using a web browser, WEBSERVER works as an interface function to
accept requests and send data. The actual webpages to be displayed are defined by HTML files
stored in the IED. WEBSERVER interacts with the authority system in the IED to validate user
permissions.
Access to the IED from a web browser can be disabled by setting Operation to “Off”.
It is possible to change IED parameters and settings through Web HMI. This feature can be
disabled by setting WriteMode to “Writing disabled”.
From a security point of view, it is desirable to terminate a browser session if the user has
been idle for some duration. This duration can be set by SessionTimeout.
The IED has two physical ports through which it can be accessed using web browser. Allowed
access can be configured using the Port setting. The options are described in the table below.
Port option Description

None Web access is disabled
Front Web access is enabled only through the
front port
Rear Web access is enabled only through the
rear port
All Web access is enabled through both
front and rear ports
Refer to the Web HMI section in the User manual for additional information on WHMI.

Technical Manual
370
IED physical connections
Section 14 IED physical connections
14.1 Protective earth connections D0E7951T201305151403 v1
The IED shall be earthed with a 16.0 mm2 flat copper cable.
The earth lead should be as short as possible, less than 1500 mm. Additional
length is required for door mounting.
D0E13861T201305151403 V1 EN-US
Figure 150: The protective earth pin is located to the left of connector X101 on the 3U full
19” case
14.2 Inputs
14.2.1 Measuring inputs D0E7938T201305151403 v5
Each terminal for CTs/VTs is dimensioned for one 0.5...6.0 mm2 wire or for two wires of
maximum 2.5 mm2.
Table 315: Assignment of conventional CT and VT inputs in pre-configuration

Connector Pin Signal Description Software signal
X101 1 L1 I N L1 phase current TRM_2.CH1(I)
X101 2 L1 I L
X101 4 L2 I L
X101 6 L3 I L
X101 7 - Not used TRM_2.CH4(I)
X101 8 -

Technical Manual

X101 9 L1 V1 N Source voltage L1 / L1-L2 / TRM_2.CH5(U)
only available single phase
X101 10 L1 V1 L
X102 1 L2 V1 N Source voltage L2 / L2-L3 TRM_2.CH6(U)
X102 2 L2 V1 L
X102 3 L3 V1 N Source voltage L3 / L3-L1 TRM_2.CH7(U)
X102 4 L3 V1 L
X102 5 L1 V2 N Load voltage L1 (optional) TRM_2.CH8(U)
X102 6 L1 V2 L
X102 8 L2 V2 L
X102 10 L3 V2 L
A single-phase reference VT shall always be connected to terminals X101:9-10,

regardless which system phase(s) it measures. If it does not measure L1 then
the application configuration should be adjusted for proper recording and
display of the signals.
To avoid mismatch between CT and VT connections the connectors are mechanically encoded
and cannot be inserted in the wrong location.
14.2.2 Auxiliary supply voltage input D0E8128T201305151403 v4
The auxiliary voltage of the IED is connected to terminals X420-1 and X420-2/3. The terminals
used depend on the power supply.
The permitted auxiliary voltage range of the IED is marked on the identification sticker on the
IED's enclosure.
Table 316: Auxliary supply voltage input

X420 1 UB- IED supply voltage (battery PSM_102.BATTAMPL
voltage)
X420 2 UB+ Me IED supply voltage (battery
voltage) for 48…125V DC
variant
X420 3 UB+ Hi IED supply voltage (battery
voltage) for 110… 250V DC
variant
The two LEDs next to X420 indicate the following conditions:
• Bat1 = input voltage (e.g. station battery) is within the expected range.
• Rdy1 = output voltage of internal power supply is within the expected range (no IED
internal short circuit or overvoltage).

Technical Manual
14.2.3 Binary inputs D0E8133T201305151403 v6
The binary inputs can be used, for example, to generate a blocking signal, to unlatch output
contacts, to trigger the disturbance recorder or for remote control of IED settings.
Each connector terminal is connected with one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or with two 0.5...1.0 mm2
wires.
Table 317: Circuit breaker auxiliary switch position inputs

X324 1 L1 NO/52a - UB- PIO_3.PBI4
X324 2 L1 NO/52a + L1 auxiliary contact NO (52a), the other
pole of which is connected to UB+
X324 3 L2 NO/52a - UB- PIO_3.PBI5
X324 5 L3 NO/52a - UB- PIO_3.PBI6
X324 7 L1 NC/52b - UB- PIO_3.PBI7
X324 8 L1 NC/52b + L1 auxiliary contact NC (52b), the other
X324 9 L2 NC/52b - UB- PIO_3.PBI8
X324 11 L3 NC/52b - UB- PIO_3.PBI9
X324 13 L1 prim - UB- PIO_3.PBI10
X324 14 L1 prim + L1 primary contact (make available on
terminal; only used during
commissioning)
commissioning)
commissioning)
Table 318: Recommended shunt resistor ratings for precision binary inputs
Cable length 110…127 V supply 220…250 V supply
Up to 30 m 100 kΩ, 0.5 W 100 kΩ, 2 W
Up to 150 m 33 kΩ, 2 W 33 kΩ, 5 W
Up to 300 m 15 kΩ, 3 W 15 kΩ, 15 W
Above 300 m 4.7 kΩ, 10 W 4.7 kΩ, 30 W

Technical Manual
Table 319: Inputs for close/open commands and CB drive energy level
X329 1 Close in - Close command input from bay control BIO_4.BI1
X329 2 Close in +
X329 4 Open in - Open command input from bay control BIO_4.BI2
X329 5 Open in +
X329 8 L1 Spr - L1 spring charge level (common terminal) *
X329 9 L1 Spr OCObk + L1 spring charge level: OCO blocked BIO_4.BI4
X329 10 L1 Spr CObk + L1 spring charge level: CO blocked BIO_4.BI5
X321 13 LED Rst - Reset latched status LEDs PIO_3.PBI1
X321 14 LED Rst + Reset latched status LEDs
* No separate software designation, as this is the common terminal for the next two signals.
Binary inputs for spring charge level are intended for circuit breakers in which the drive energy
and the operating capability can differ with the position of the main storage element (spring).
This occurs in spring-hydraulic drives such as ABB models HMB/HMC. The spring charge
information is used for compensation of operating times and for reporting the CB's operating
capability. However, if the breaker is not used for fast reclosing and if the spring is always fully
charged prior to each operation, these inputs need not be connected. Similarly, these inputs
are not used with drives in which the spring is always fully charged by design.
14.3 Outputs
D0E8360T201305151403 v3
Each connector terminal is connected with one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or with two 0.5...1.0 mm2
wires.
Table 320: Open and close command outputs

X321 1 L1 Close - Controlled close command output L1 PIO_3.PBO1
X321 2 L1 Close +
X321 4 L2 Close +
X321 6 L3 Close +
X321 7 L1 Open - Controlled open command output L1 PIO_3.PBO4
X321 8 L1 Open +
X321 10 L2 Open +
X321 12 L3 Open +

Technical Manual
14.3.1 Outputs for signalling D0E8361T201305151403 v3
Signal output contacts are used for signalling alarms and warning conditions.
Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or with two 0.5...1.0
mm2 wires.
Table 321: Signalling outputs

X317 13 Al Discr NO Alarm: Breaker testing discrepancy PSM_102.BO7_SO
trip
X317 14
X317 15 Al 9-2 NO Warning: Loss of 9-2 data or PSM_102.BO8_SO
synchronization
X317 16
X317 17 Al SigPr NO Alarm: Error in signal processing PSM_102.BO9_SO
X317 18
X326 7 Wa Reig NO Warning: Re-Strike / re-ignition BIO_4.BO4_SO
detected
X326 8
X326 9 Wa Accur NO Warning: Reduced accuracy of last BIO_4.BO5_SO
controlled switching operations
X326 10
X326 11 Wa LComp NO Warning: Loss of compensation BIO_4.BO6_SO
signal
X326 12
X326 13 Wa Thresh NO Threshold supervision warning BIO_4.BO7_SO
X326 14 Al Thresh NO Threshold supervision alarm BIO_4.BO8_SO
X326 15 Thresh Com Threshold supervision (common) -
X326 16 Wa Uncont NC Warning: Controlled switching not BIO_4.BO9_SO
possible
X326 17 Wa Uncont NO
X326 18 Wa Uncont Com
14.3.2 IRF D0E8362T201305151403 v3
The IRF contact functions as a change-over output contact for the self-supervision system of
the IED. Under normal operating conditions, the IED is energized and one of the two contacts
is closed. When a fault is detected by the self-supervision system or the auxiliary voltage is
disconnected, the closed contact drops off and the other contact closes.
Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or with two 0.5...1.0
mm2 wires.
Table 322: Internal failure output

Connector Pin Signals Description
X319 1 IRF NO Closed: no IRF, and Ub connected
X319 2 IRF NC Closed: IRF, or Ub disconnected
X319 3 IRF Com IRF, common

Technical Manual
14.4 Communication interfaces D0E8365T201305151403 v2
The IED's LHMI is provided with an RJ-45 connector. This interface is intended for
configuration and setting purposes.
Station bus and process bus communication runs on the communication module via the
optical interfaces (LC Ethernet connectors) on the rear panel. If both are used, the process bus
shall run as a separate network from the station bus to prevent interference of control data
with the sampled values stream.
Rear communication via the X8/EIA-485/IRIG-B connector uses a communication module with
the galvanic EIA-485 serial connection.
The HMI connector X0 and the serial interface X9 are not used in Switchsync PWC600.
14.4.1 Ethernet RJ-45 front connection D0E8363T201305151403 v2
The IED's LHMI is provided with an RJ-45 connector designed for point-to-point use. This
interface is intended for configuration and setting purposes. The interface on the PC has to be
configured in a way that it obtains the IP address automatically if the DHCP server is enabled
in LHMI. The DHCP server inside the IED can be activated for the front interface only.
Usually this port is used only for temporary connection, thus no permanent wiring is required.
Events, setting values and all input data such as operation records and waveform records can
be read via the front communication port.
Only one of the possible clients can be used for parametrization at a time.
• PCM600
• LHMI
• WHMI
The default IP address of the IED through this port is 10.1.150.3.
The front port supports TCP/IP protocol. A standard Ethernet CAT 5 crossover cable with
RJ-45 connector is used with the front port.
14.4.2 Station communication rear connection D0E8366T201305151403 v2
The default IP address of the IED through the rear Ethernet port is 192.168.1.10. The physical
connector is X1/LAN1 A. The communication speed is 100 Mbps for the 100BASE-FX LC
interface.
For redundant communication, X1/LAN1 A and X2/LAN1 B can be used.
Table 323: Station bus

X1 All LAN1 A Station bus
X2 All LAN1 B Redundant station bus, optional
For specification of the optical fibers to be used, see the corresponding technical data table.

Technical Manual
14.4.3 Optical serial rear connection D0E8367T201305151403 v2
The optical serial communication port (X9) is not used in Switchsync PWC600.
Always keep the factory supplied cap on the Tx output of port X9, to prevent
exposure to laser radiation.
14.4.4 EIA-485 serial rear connection D0E8368T201305151403 v2
The communication module follows the EIA-485 standard and is intended to be used in multi-
point communication.
Table 324: EIA-485 and IRIG-B connections

X8 1 RS485_GNDC RS485 ground through capacitance
X8 2 RS485_RXTERM Termination for RS485 receiver
X8 3 RS485_RX + RS485 receiver
X8 4 RS485_TXTERM Termination for RS485 transmitter
X8 5 RS485_SIGGND Signal ground for RS485
X8 6 IRIG-B - Time synchronization input
X8 7 IRIG-B_GNDC IRIG-B ground through capacitance
X8 8 RS485_GND RS485 ground
X8 9 RS485_RX - RS485 receiver
X8 10 RS485_TX + RS485 transmitter
X8 11 RS485_TX - RS485 transmitter
X8 12 RS485_SIGGND Signal ground for RS485
X8 13 IRIG-B + Time synchronization input
X8 14 IRIG-B_GND IRIG-B ground
EIA-485 communication is not enabled in this product.
14.4.5 Process bus rear connection GUID-60053C7B-4AD3-4DEC-9C47-BD2C2479516E v2
Switchsync PWC600 can receive digital sampled values (voltage and/or current) via IEC
61850-9-2(LE) on its X3/LAN2 A interface. Up to four logical merging units can be connected,
which are distinguished by their sampled values ID (svID). The specifications of X3 are identical
to X1 and X2.
Hardware synchronization of the sampled values is achieved by a 1PPS signal received on

optical input X10. Time synchronization via SNTP or IRIG-B cannot be used for this purpose.
If the 9-2 process values to Switchsync PWC600 originate from two or more
separate physical merging units, they should be synchronized to the same
master. Otherwise, occasional communication interruptions may occur.

Technical Manual
Table 325: Process bus

X3 All 9-2LE Process bus: sampled values from one or more merging
units compliant to IEC 61850-9-2 LE
Table 326: Optical 1PPS signal

X10 Rx 1PPS Optical 1PPS signal from time synchronization master
For specification of the optical fibers to be used, see the corresponding technical data table.
14.4.6 Communication interfaces and protocols D0E7214T201305151403 v3

Protocol Ethernet
100BASE-FX LC
IEC 61850-8-1 ●
HTTPS ●
● = Supported
14.4.7 Recommended industrial Ethernet switches D0E8405T201305151403 v1
ABB recommends ABB industrial Ethernet switches.
14.5 Connection diagrams D0E8410T201305151403 v3
The connection diagrams are delivered on the IED Connectivity package DVD as part of the
product delivery. They can be accessed through the IED's context menu (item Documentation),
or directly on the DVD.
The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from

http://new.abb.com/high-voltage/monitoring/switchsync.

Technical Manual
Technical data
Section 15 Technical data
15.1 Dimensions D0E7937T201305151403 v1
Table 328: Dimensions of the IED - 3U full 19" rack

Description Value
Width 442 mm (17.40 inches)
Height 132 mm (5.20 inches), 3U
Depth 249.5 mm (9.82 inches)
Weight box 10 kg (<22.04 lbs)
15.2 Power supply D0E7960T201305151403 v2
Table 329: Power supply

Description 600PSM02 600PSM03
Uauxnominal 48, 60, 110, 125 V DC 110, 125, 220, 250 V DC
Uauxvariation 80...120% of Un (38.4...150 V DC) 80...120% of Un (88...300 V DC)
Maximum load on auxiliary voltage 35 W for DC

supply
Ripple in the DC auxiliary voltage Max 15% of the DC value (at frequency of 100 and 120 Hz)
Maximum interruption time in the 50 ms at Uaux
auxiliary DC voltage without
resetting the IED
Resolution of the voltage 1 bit represents 1 V (+/- 1 VDC) 1 bit represents 2 V (+/- 1 VDC)
measurement in PSM module
GUID-80AA04F6-C989-4E8A-81C0-1A9A7458ADCC v7.1.1
15.3 Measuring inputs D0E7961T201305151403 v3
Table 330: Measuring inputs

Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50 or 60 Hz
Operating range fr ± 10%
Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1 or 5 A1)
Operating range 0 – 500 A

Technical Manual
Technical data
Description Value
Thermal withstand 500 A for 1 s *)
100 A for 10 s
40 A for 1 min
20 A continuously
Dynamic withstand 1250 A one half wave
Burden < 10 mVA at Ir = 1 A
< 200 mVA at Ir = 5 A

*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.
Voltage inputs**)
Rated voltage Ur 100 or 220 V
Operating range 0 – 420 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s
420 V continuously
Burden < 50 mVA at 100 V
< 200 mVA at 220 V
**) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency
1) Phase currents or residual current
15.4 Binary inputs D0E7948T201305151403 v2
Table 331: Binary inputs

Description Value
Operating range Maximum input voltage 300 V DC
Rated voltage 24...250 V DC
Current drain 1.6...1.8 mA
Power consumption/input <0.38 W
Threshold voltage 15...221 V DC (parametrizable in the range in steps of 1%
of the rated voltage)
Table 332: Precision binary inputs

Description Value
Operating range Maximum input voltage 300 V DC
Rated voltage 33...288 V DC
Current drain 0...0.5 mA
Power consumption/input <0.15 W
Threshold voltage 15...221 V DC (parametrizable in the range in steps of 1%
of the rated voltage)

Technical Manual
Technical data
15.5 Signal outputs D0E7949T201305151403 v2
Table 333: Signal outputs and IRF output

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous contact carry 5A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 10 A
Make and carry 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time ≤0.5 A/≤0.1 A/≤0.04 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at U <48/110/220 V DC
15.6 Power outputs D0E8276T201305151403 v2
Table 334: Power output relays without TCS function (not used in default pre-configuration)
Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time ≤1 A/≤0.3 A/≤0.1 A
Table 335: Power output relays with TCS function (not used in default pre-configuration)
Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V DC
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time ≤1 A/≤0.3 A/≤0.1 A
Control voltage range 20...250 V DC
Current drain through the supervision circuit ~1.0 mA
Minimum voltage over the TCS contact 20 V DC
Table 336: Precision binary outputs

Description Value
Rated switching voltage 33...288 V DC
Continuous carry (resistive) 0.5 A DC
DC make and carry 10 A DC
ton <1 s (single shot, toff >600 s)
L/R <10 ms
Usw ≤50 V

Technical Manual
Technical data
Description Value
DC make and carry 6 A DC
ton <1 s (single shot, toff >600 s)
L/R <10 ms
Usw >150 V
Impedance in On state ≤0.5 Ω
Impedance in Off state ≥100 kΩ
15.7 Data communication interfaces D0E7950T201305151403 v4
Table 337: Ethernet interfaces

Ethernet interface Protocol Cable Data transfer rate
100BASE-TX (front port) TCP/IP CAT 5 S/FTP or better 100 MBit/s
100BASE-FX (rear TCP/IP Fibre-optic cable with LC 100 MBit/s
Ethernet ports) connector
Table 338: Fibre-optic communication links

Wave length Fibre type Connector Permitted path Distance
attenuation1)
1300 nm MM 62.5/125 LC <8 dB <2 km
μm glass fibre
core
1) Maximum allowed attenuation caused by connectors and cable together

Protocol Ethernet
100BASE-FX LC
IEC 61850-8-1 ●
HTTPS ●
● = Supported
Table 340: X8/IRIG-B and EIA-485 interface

Type Protocol Cable
Tension clamp IRIG-B Shielded twisted pair cable
connection Recommended: CAT 5, Belden RS-485 (9841- 9844) or
Alpha Wire (Alpha 6222-6230)
Tension clamp DNP3.0 Shielded twisted pair cable
connection (not used in Switchsync Recommended: DESCAFLEX RD-
PWC600) H(ST)H-2x2x0.22mm2, Belden 9729, Belden 9829

Technical Manual
Technical data
Table 341: IRIG-B

Type Value Accuracy
Input impedance 430 Ohm -
Minimum input voltage 4.3 V -
HIGH
Maximum input voltage 0.8 V -
LOW
Table 342: EIA-485 interface

Type Value Conditions
Minimum differential 1.5 V –
driver output voltage
Maximum output current 60 mA -
Minimum differential 0.2 V -
receiver input voltage
Supported bit rates 300, 600, 1200, 2400, -
4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 57600, 115200
Maximum number of 32 -
IEDs supported on the
same bus
Max. cable length 925 m (3000 ft) Cable: AWG24 or better, stub lines shall be avoided
Table 343: Optical serial port (X9) and PPS synchronization input (X10)
Wave length Fibre type Connector Permitted path attenuation1)
820 nm MM 62,5/125 µm ST 6.8 dB (approx. 1700 m length with 4 dB/km
glass fibre core fibre attenuation)
820 nm MM 50/125 µm glass ST 2.4 dB (approx. 600 m length with 4 dB/km
fibre core fibre attenuation)
1) Maximum allowed attenuation caused by fibre
15.8 Enclosure class D0E7771T201305151403 v1
Table 344: Degree of protection of rack-mounted IED

Description Value
Front side IP 40
Rear side, connection terminals IP 20
Table 345: Degree of protection of the LHMI

Description Value
Front and side IP40

Technical Manual
Technical data
15.9 Ingress protection D0E8127T201305151403 v1
Table 346: Ingress protection

Description Value
IED front IP 54
IED rear IP 21
IED sides IP 42
IED top IP 42
IED bottom IP 21
15.10 Environmental conditions and tests D0E7972T201305151403 v2
Table 347: Environmental conditions

Description Value
Operating temperature range -25...+55ºC (continuous)
Short-time service temperature range -40...+70ºC (<16h)
Note: Degradation in MTBF and HMI performance
outside the temperature range of -25...+55ºC
Relative humidity <93%, non-condensing
Altitude up to 2000 m
Transport and storage temperature range -40...+85ºC
Table 348: Environmental tests

Description Type test value Reference
Cold tests operation 96 h at -25ºC IEC 60068-2-1
16 h at -40ºC ANSI C37.90-2005 (chapter 4)
storage 96 h at -40ºC
Dry heat tests operation 16 h at +70ºC IEC 60068-2-2
ANSI C37.90-2005 (chapter 4)
storage 96 h at +85ºC
Damp heat steady state 240 h at +40ºC IEC 60068-2-78
tests humidity 93%
cyclic 6 cycles at +25 to +55ºC IEC 60068-2-30

humidity 93...95%

Technical Manual
Technical data
15.11 Electromagnetic compatibility tests D0E7974T201305151403 v2
Table 349: Electromagnetic compatibility tests

100 kHz and 1 MHz burst IEC 61000-4-18, level 3
disturbance test IEC 60255-22-1
ANSI C37.90.1-2012
• Common mode 2.5 kV
• Differential mode 2.5 kV
Electrostatic discharge test IEC 61000-4-2, level 4

IEC 60255-22-2
ANSI C37.90.3-2001
• Contact discharge 8 kV
• Air discharge 15 kV
Radio frequency interference

tests
• Conducted, common mode 10 V (emf), f=150 kHz...80 MHz IEC 61000-4-6 , level 3
IEC 60255-22-6
• Radiated, amplitude- 20 V/m (rms), f=80...1000 MHz and IEC 61000-4-3, level 3
modulated f=1.4...2.7 GHz IEC 60255-22-3
ANSI C37.90.2-2004
Fast transient disturbance tests IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 60255-22-4, class A
ANSI C37.90.1-2012
• Communication ports 4 kV
• Other ports 4 kV
Surge immunity test IEC 61000-4-5

IEC 60255-22-5
• Communication ports 1 kV line-to-earth
• Other ports 2 kV line-to-earth, 1 kV line-to-line
• Power supply 4 kV line-to-earth, 2 kV line-to-line
Power frequency (50 Hz) IEC 61000-4-8, level 5

magnetic field
• 3s 1000 A/m
• Continuous 100 A/m
Pulse magnetic field immunity 1000 A/m IEC 61000-4-9, level 5

test
Damped oscillatory magnetic 100 A/m, 100 kHz and 1 MHz IEC 61000-4-10, level 5
field
Power frequency immunity test IEC 60255-22-7, class A
IEC 61000-4-16
• Common mode 300 V rms

Technical Manual
Technical data

• Differential mode 150 V rms
Voltage dips and short Dips: IEC 60255-11

interruptionsc on DC power 40%/200 ms IEC 61000-4-11
supply 70%/500 ms
Interruptions:
0...50 ms: No restart
0...∞ s : Correct behaviour at power
down
Voltage dips and interruptions on Dips: IEC 60255-11
AC power supply 40% 10/12 cycles at 50/60 Hz IEC 61000-4-11
70% 25/30 cycles at 50/60 Hz
Interruptions:
0...50 ms: No restart
0...∞ s: Correct behaviour at power
down
Electromagnetic emission tests EN 55011, class A
IEC 60255-25
ANSI C63.4, FCC
• Conducted, RF-emission
(mains terminal)
0.15...0.50 MHz <79 dB(µV) quasi peak

<66 dB(µV) average
0.5...30 MHz <73 dB(µV) quasi peak
<60 dB(µV) average
• Radiated RF-emission, IEC
30...230 MHz <40 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,

measured at 10 m distance
230...1000 MHz <47 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,
measured at 10 m distance
15.12 Insulation tests D0E7975T201305151403 v1
Table 350: Insulation tests

Dielectric tests: IEC 60255-5
ANSI C37.90-2005
• Test voltage 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
1 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min, communication
Impulse voltage test: IEC 60255-5
ANSI C37.90-2005
• Test voltage 5 kV, unipolar impulses, waveform
1.2/50 μs, source energy 0.5 J
1 kV, unipolar impulses, waveform
1.2/50 μs, source energy 0.5 J,
communication
Insulation resistance IEC 60255-5
measurements ANSI C37.90-2005
• Isolation resistance >100 MΏ, 500 V DC
Protective bonding resistance IEC 60255-27

• Resistance <0.1 Ώ (60 s)

Technical Manual
Technical data
15.13 Mechanical tests D0E8295T201305151403 v1
Table 351: Mechanical tests

Description Reference Requirement
Vibration response tests IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
(sinusoidal)
Vibration endurance test IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
Shock response test IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Shock withstand test IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Bump test IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Seismic test IEC 60255-21-3 Class 2
15.14 Product safety D0E7923T201305151403 v1
Table 352: Product safety

Description Reference
LV directive 2006/95/EC
Standard EN 60255-27 (2005)
15.15 EMC compliance D0E7922T201305151403 v1
Table 353: EMC compliance

Description Reference
EMC directive 2004/108/EC
Standards EN 50263 (2000)
EN 60255-26 (2007)

Technical Manual
388
Glossary
Section 16 Glossary
D0E688T201305141612 v5
Names of function blocks, IEC 61850 logical nodes, data objects, data
attributes etc. are not listed here. Refer to the respective section of this
document or to the relevant part of the standard.
AC Alternating current
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
ACSI Abstract communication service interface, as defined in IEC 61850-7-2
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AP Access point for digital communication
AR Autoreclosing
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BI Binary input
BIO Binary input/output module
BO Binary output
BRCB Buffered report control block
BS British Standards
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial
communication
CB Circuit breaker
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A
United Nations-sponsored standards body within the International
Telecommunications Union.
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
CDC Common data class
CID Configured IED description file as per IEC 61850-6
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle Close-open cycle
COM Communication module
COMTRADE Standard format according to IEC 60255-24
CPU Central processing unit
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CSV Comma-separated values
CT Current transformer
CVT Capacitive voltage transformer

Technical Manual
Glossary
DA Data attribute
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer of the
TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DC Direct current
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DI Digital input
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DO Data object
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Data type template section in the SCL description file of a station or IED
DVD Digital versatile disc
EHV Extra high voltage
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMI Electromagnetic interference
EN European standard
ESD Electrostatic discharge
FC Function constraint
GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
GoCB GOOSE control block
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GSE Generic substation event
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HTTPS Hypertext transfer protocol secure
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
HW Hardware
ICD IED capability description file as per IEC 61850-6
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6: Requirements for
protective current transformers for transient performance
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard
IEC 61850-8-1 Communication protocol standard for station bus
IEC 61850-9-2(LE) Communication protocol standard for sampled values
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

Technical Manual
Glossary
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-pair
or optical fiber cable
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) Cyber
Security Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available in the IED,
they are referred to as instances of that function. One instance of a
function is identical to another of the same kind but has a different
number in the IED user interfaces. The word "instance" is sometimes
defined as an item of information that is representative of a type. In the
same way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type of
function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite widely
used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless, best-effort packet-
switching protocol. It provides packet routing, fragmentation and
reassembly through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC standard
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 20
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LCD Liquid crystal display
LD Logical device in IEC 61850
LED Light-emitting diode
LHMI Local human-machine interface
LN Logical node in IEC 61850
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MICS Model implementation conformance statement, for IEC 61850
MMS Manufacturing Message Specification
MU Merging unit
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed for
use in trains.
NC Normally closed auxiliary contact
NCC National Control Centre
NCIT Non-conventional instrument transformer
NO Normally open auxiliary contact
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
PC Personal computer
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PICS Protocol implementation conformance statement, for IEC 61850
PIO Precision input/output module

Technical Manual
Glossary
PIXIT Protocol implementation extra information for testing, for IEC 61850
PoW Point on wave
PPS, 1PPS One pulse per second, time synchronization interface
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the
measured and/or controlled components
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PWC Point-on-wave controller
RBAC Role-based access control (role-based security)
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RJ-45 Registered jack 45, commonly used as plug connector for electrical
Ethernet
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-to-
point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
Rx Receive line
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCD System configuration description file as per IEC 61850-6
SCL System configuration language in IEC 61850
SCS Station control system
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronize computer clocks on
local area networks. This reduces the requirement to have accurate
hardware clocks in every embedded system in a network. Each embedded
node can instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the required
accuracy.
SPO Single-pole operated (circuit breaker), i.e. one drive for each pole.
SST Switchsync Setting Tool within PCM600
Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
SW Software
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer protocol
used on Ethernet and the Internet.

Technical Manual
Glossary
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de facto

standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP was
developed by DARPA for Internet working and encompasses both network
layer and transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols
at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US
Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these, including Telnet,
FTP, UDP and RDP.
TICS Tissue implementation conformance statement, for IEC 61850
TPO Three-pole operated (circuit breaker), i.e. one drive for three poles
TPZ, TPY, TPX, Current transformer class according to IEC
TPS
TRM Transformer module
TRV Transient recovery voltage
Tx Transmit line
UAC User Account Control in Microsoft Windows operating systems
UHV Ultra high voltage
UMT User management tool
Unicode Universal standard for text encoding
URCB Unbuffered report control block
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by the
Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis
of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals.
UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a
whole number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal Time 1
(UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth's orbit, the rotational
axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth's irregular rotation, on
which UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a
24-hour clock, and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane
and ship navigation, where it is also sometimes known by the military
name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet stands for "Z", which
stands for longitude zero.
VT Voltage transformer
WAN Wide area network
WHMI Web human-machine interface
XML Extensible markup language

Technical Manual
394
395
ABB AB
Grid Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås, Sweden
Phone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Scan this QR code to visit our website
www.abb.com/protection-control
1MRK 511 275-UEN
© Copyright 2017 ABB.

All rights reserved.

PWC 600

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PWC 600

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PWC 600

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Relion® 650 series

Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0

© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved

This product includes cryptographic software written/developed by: Eric Young

Non-observance can result in death, personal injury or substantial property

Only a competent electrician is allowed to carry out the electrical installation.

National and local electrical safety regulations must always be followed.

The frame of the IED has to be carefully earthed.

Always keep the factory supplied caps on unused optical communication

The IED contains components which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge.

Section 2 Available functions........................................................................................... 19

Section 3 Analog inputs.................................................................................................... 23

Section 4 Binary inputs and outputs............................................................................... 29

Section 5 Local HMI............................................................................................................35

Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0 1

Section 6 Web HMI (WHMI)............................................................................................... 53

Section 7 Controlled Switching and Monitoring............................................................55

Section 8 Control.............................................................................................................. 111

2 Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0

Section 9 General calculation......................................................................................... 133

Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0 3

Section 10 Logic................................................................................................................. 147

4 Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0

10.6.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 164

Section 11 Monitoring....................................................................................................... 167

Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0 5

11.1.8 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 185

6 Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0

11.3.6.6 Disturbance recorder ............................................................................................................218

Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0 7

11.9.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 231

8 Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0

11.15.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 246

Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0 9

11.19.6.3 Core logic.................................................................................................................................307

Section 12 Station communication..................................................................................311

10 Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0

12.7.2 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 321

Section 13 Basic IED functions......................................................................................... 331

Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0 11

13.2.4 SYNCHPPS:1................................................................................................................................ 337

12 Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0

13.8.1 Functionality ............................................................................................................................. 349

Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0 13

13.15 Source selection SRCSELECT...................................................................................................... 363

Section 14 IED physical connections............................................................................... 371

Section 15 Technical data................................................................................................. 379

14 Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0

Section 16 Glossary........................................................................................................... 389

Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0 15

1.1 This manual GUID-44873E8A-0624-49D3-AA84-4DA61C513D66 v3

1.2 Intended audience GUID-0EFD9002-000E-43C2-A39F-D790486D43C1 v5

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set GUID-DBA0DD95-55A1-42D3-B161-8F1C487BA9AB v6

The communication protocol manual describes a communication protocol supported by the

1.3.1.1 Related documents GUID-42926503-028A-4885-96EA-39CE83211411 v5

Documents related to Switchsync PWC600 Identity number

Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0 17

Documents related to Switchsync PWC600 Identity number